US20130017960A1 - Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification - Google Patents

Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20130017960A1
US20130017960A1 US13/551,486 US201213551486A US2013017960A1 US 20130017960 A1 US20130017960 A1 US 20130017960A1 US 201213551486 A US201213551486 A US 201213551486A US 2013017960 A1 US2013017960 A1 US 2013017960A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
nucleic acid
species
oligonucleotide
extension
extended
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
US13/551,486
Other versions
US10604791B2 (en
Inventor
Christiane Honisch
Dirk J. Van Den Boom
Michael Mosko
Anders NYGREN
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
BIOSCIENCES ACQUISITION Co
Agena Bioscience Inc
Original Assignee
Sequenom Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority to US13/551,486 priority Critical patent/US10604791B2/en
Application filed by Sequenom Inc filed Critical Sequenom Inc
Assigned to SEQUENOM, INC reassignment SEQUENOM, INC ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: HONISCH, CHRISTIANE, VAN DEN BOOM, DIRK JOHANNES, MOSKO, Michael, NYGREN, ANDERS
Publication of US20130017960A1 publication Critical patent/US20130017960A1/en
Priority to US13/790,996 priority patent/US20140011195A1/en
Assigned to BIOSCIENCES ACQUISITION COMPANY reassignment BIOSCIENCES ACQUISITION COMPANY ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: SEQUENOM, INC.
Assigned to AGENA BIOSCIENCE, INC. reassignment AGENA BIOSCIENCE, INC. CHANGE OF NAME (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: BIOSCIENCES ACQUISITION COMPANY
Assigned to MIDCAP FINANCIAL TRUST reassignment MIDCAP FINANCIAL TRUST SECURITY INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: AGENA BIOSCIENCE, INC.
Assigned to MIDCAP FINANCIAL TRUST, AS AGENT reassignment MIDCAP FINANCIAL TRUST, AS AGENT SECURITY INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: AGENA BIOSCIENCE, INC.
Priority to US16/793,732 priority patent/US11667958B2/en
Publication of US10604791B2 publication Critical patent/US10604791B2/en
Application granted granted Critical
Assigned to AGENA BIOSCIENCE, INC. reassignment AGENA BIOSCIENCE, INC. RELEASE OF SECURITY INTEREST IN REEL 041621 FRAME 0548 Assignors: MIDCAP FINANCIAL TRUST
Assigned to AGENA BIOSCIENCE, INC. reassignment AGENA BIOSCIENCE, INC. RELEASE BY SECURED PARTY (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: MIDCAP FUNDING IV TRUST
Assigned to JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A. reassignment JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A. SECURITY INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: AGENA BIOSCIENCE, INC.
Priority to US18/139,303 priority patent/US20230407375A1/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12QMEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/68Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
    • C12Q1/6813Hybridisation assays
    • C12Q1/6816Hybridisation assays characterised by the detection means
    • C12Q1/6823Release of bound markers
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12QMEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/68Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
    • C12Q1/6809Methods for determination or identification of nucleic acids involving differential detection
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12QMEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/68Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
    • C12Q1/6844Nucleic acid amplification reactions
    • C12Q1/6853Nucleic acid amplification reactions using modified primers or templates
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C12BIOCHEMISTRY; BEER; SPIRITS; WINE; VINEGAR; MICROBIOLOGY; ENZYMOLOGY; MUTATION OR GENETIC ENGINEERING
    • C12QMEASURING OR TESTING PROCESSES INVOLVING ENZYMES, NUCLEIC ACIDS OR MICROORGANISMS; COMPOSITIONS OR TEST PAPERS THEREFOR; PROCESSES OF PREPARING SUCH COMPOSITIONS; CONDITION-RESPONSIVE CONTROL IN MICROBIOLOGICAL OR ENZYMOLOGICAL PROCESSES
    • C12Q1/00Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions
    • C12Q1/68Measuring or testing processes involving enzymes, nucleic acids or microorganisms; Compositions therefor; Processes of preparing such compositions involving nucleic acids
    • C12Q1/6844Nucleic acid amplification reactions
    • C12Q1/6858Allele-specific amplification

Definitions

  • the technology relates in part to nucleic acid identification procedures in which multiple target nucleic acids can be detected in one procedure.
  • the technology also in part relates to identification of nucleic acid modifications.
  • nucleic acid assays currently play roles in identifying infectious organisms such as bacteria and viruses, in probing the expression of normal genes and identifying mutant genes such as oncogenes, in typing tissue for compatibility preceding tissue transplantation, in matching tissue or blood samples for forensic medicine, and for exploring homology among genes from different species, for example.
  • a method for determining the presence or absence of a plurality of target nucleic acids in a composition which includes: (a) preparing amplicons of the target nucleic acids by amplifying the target nucleic acids, or portions thereof, under amplification conditions; (b) contacting the amplicons in solution with a set of oligonucleotides under hybridization conditions, where each oligonucleotide in the set includes a hybridization sequence capable of specifically hybridizing to one amplicon under the hybridization conditions when the amplicon is present in the solution; (c) generating extended oligonucleotides that include a capture agent by extending oligonucleotides hybridized to the amplicons by one or more nucleotides, wherein one of the one of more nucleotides is a terminating nucleotide and one or more of the nucleotides added to the oligonucleotides includes the capture agent; (d) contacting the extended oligonu
  • the mass of one oligonucleotide species detectably differs from the masses of the other oligonucleotide species in the set; and (ii) each oligonucleotide species specifically corresponds to a specific amplicon and thereby specifically corresponds to a specific target nucleic acid.
  • each oligonucleotide in the set includes a mass distinguishable tag located 5′ of the hybridization sequence, (ii) the mass of the mass distinguishable tag of one oligonucleotide detectably differs from the masses of mass distinguishable tags of the other oligonucleotides in the set; and (iii) each mass distinguishable tag specifically corresponds to a specific amplicon and thereby specifically corresponds to a specific target nucleic acid, the mass of the mass distinguishable tag is detected by mass spectrometry, and the presence or absence of each target nucleic acid is determined by the presence or absence of the corresponding mass distinguishable tag.
  • detecting the mass distinguishable tag detects the extended oligonucleotide.
  • the extended oligonucleotides released in (e), or the mass distinguishable tags associated or cleaved from the released extended oligonucleotides are detected by mass spectrometry.
  • a method for determining the presence or absence of a plurality of target nucleic acids in a composition which includes: (a) preparing amplicons of the target nucleic acids by amplifying the target nucleic acids, or portions thereof, under amplification conditions; (b) contacting the amplicons in solution with a set of oligonucleotides under hybridization conditions, where: (i) each oligonucleotide in the set includes a hybridization sequence capable of specifically hybridizing to one amplicon under the hybridization conditions when the amplicon is present in the solution, (ii) each oligonucleotide in the set includes a mass distinguishable tag located 5′ of the hybridization sequence, (iii) the mass of the mass distinguishable tag of one oligonucleotide detectably differs from the masses of mass distinguishable tags of the other oligonucleotides in the set; and (iv) each mass distinguishable tag specifically corresponds to a specific amplicon and
  • the mass distinguishable tag is not cleaved and released from the extended oligonucleotide, and in certain embodiments, the mass distinguishable tag is cleaved and released from the extended oligonucleotide. In some embodiments, the mass distinguishable tag is the extended oligonucleotide. In certain embodiments, the extension in (c) is performed once yielding one extended oligonucleotide. In some embodiments, the extension in (c) is performed multiple times (e.g., under amplification conditions) yielding multiple copies of the extended oligonucleotide.
  • a solution containing amplicons (e.g., amplicons produced in (a)) is treated with an agent that removes terminal phosphates from any nucleotides not incorporated into the amplicons.
  • the terminal phosphate sometimes is removed by contacting the amplicons with a phosphatase, and in certain embodiments the phosphatase is alkaline phosphatase (e.g., shrimp alkaline phosphatase).
  • a method for determining the presence or absence of a plurality of target nucleic acids in a composition which comprises (a) contacting target nucleic acids in solution with a set of oligonucleotides under hybridization conditions, where (i) each oligonucleotide in the set comprises a hybridization sequence capable of specifically hybridizing to one target nucleic acid species under the hybridization conditions when the target nucleic acid species is present in the solution; (b) generating extended oligonucleotides that comprise a capture agent by extending oligonucleotides hybridized to the amplicons by one or more nucleotides under amplification conditions, wherein one of the one of more nucleotides is a terminating nucleotide and one or more of the nucleotides added to the oligonucleotides comprises the capture agent; (c) contacting the extended oligonucleotides with a solid phase under conditions in which the capture agent interacts with the solid phase
  • the mass of one oligonucleotide species detectably differs from the masses of the other oligonucleotide species in the set; and (ii) each oligonucleotide species specifically corresponds to a specific amplicon and thereby specifically corresponds to a specific target nucleic acid.
  • each oligonucleotide in the set includes a mass distinguishable tag located 5′ of the hybridization sequence, (ii) the mass of the mass distinguishable tag of one oligonucleotide detectably differs from the masses of mass distinguishable tags of the other oligonucleotides in the set; and (iii) each mass distinguishable tag specifically corresponds to a specific amplicon and thereby specifically corresponds to a specific target nucleic acid, the mass of the mass distinguishable tag is detected by mass spectrometry, and the presence or absence of each target nucleic acid is determined by the presence or absence of the corresponding mass distinguishable tag.
  • detecting the mass distinguishable tag detects the extended oligonucleotide.
  • detecting the mass distinguishable tag detects the extended oligonucleotide.
  • the extended oligonucleotides released in (d), or the mass distinguishable tags associated or cleaved from the released extended oligonucleotides are detected by mass spectrometry.
  • any suitable amplification procedure can be utilized in multiplex detection assays described herein, and sometimes the following procedure is utilized in some embodiments, which comprises: (a) contacting the target nucleic acids with a set of first polynucleotides, where each first polynucleotide comprises (1) a first complementary sequence that hybridizes to the target nucleic acid and (2) a first tag located 5′ of the complementary sequence; (b) preparing extended first polynucleotides by extending the first polynucleotide; (c) joining a second polynucleotide to the 3′ end of the extended first polynucleotides, where the second polynucleotide comprises a second tag; (d) contacting the product of (c) with a primer and extending the primer, where the primer hybridizes to the first tag or second tag; and (e) amplifying the product of (c) with a set of primers under amplification conditions, where one primer in the set hybridizes to one of the tags and another primer
  • linear amplification is performed with one set of primers.
  • the second polynucleotide comprises a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the target nucleic acid.
  • the nucleotide sequence of the first tag and the nucleotide sequence of the second tag are different in some embodiments, and are identical, or are complementary to one another, in other embodiments.
  • the first tag and the second tag are included in each of the amplification products produced in (e).
  • Such an amplification process can further comprise (f) contacting the amplicons in solution with a set of oligonucleotides under hybridization conditions, where each oligonucleotide in the set comprises a hybridization sequence capable of specifically hybridizing to one amplicon under the hybridization conditions when the amplicon is present in the solution; (g) generating extended oligonucleotides that comprise a capture agent by extending oligonucleotides hybridized to the amplicons by one or more nucleotides, where one of the one of more nucleotides is a terminating nucleotide and one or more of the nucleotides added to the oligonucleotides comprises the capture agent; (h) contacting the extended oligonucleotides with a solid phase under conditions in which the capture agent interacts with the solid phase; (i) releasing the extended oligonucleotides that have interacted with the solid phase by competition with a competitor; and (j) detecting the released extended
  • the extension in (g) is performed once yielding one extended oligonucleotide. In some embodiments, the extension in (g) is performed multiple times (e.g., under amplification conditions) yielding multiple copies of the extended oligonucleotide. In certain embodiments, (i) the mass of one oligonucleotide species detectably differs from the masses of the other oligonucleotide species in the set; and (ii) each oligonucleotide species specifically corresponds to a specific amplicon and thereby specifically corresponds to a specific target nucleic acid.
  • each oligonucleotide in the set includes a mass distinguishable tag located 5′ of the hybridization sequence, (ii) the mass of the mass distinguishable tag of one oligonucleotide detectably differs from the masses of mass distinguishable tags of the other oligonucleotides in the set; and (iii) each mass distinguishable tag specifically corresponds to a specific amplicon and thereby specifically corresponds to a specific target nucleic acid, the mass of the mass distinguishable tag is detected by mass spectrometry, and the presence or absence of each target nucleic acid is determined by the presence or absence of the corresponding mass distinguishable tag.
  • detecting the mass distinguishable tag detects the extended oligonucleotide. In some embodiments, detecting the mass distinguishable tag detects the extended oligonucleotide.
  • competition with a competitor includes contacting the solid phase with a competitor.
  • the nucleotide that includes the capture agent is a capture agent conjugated to a nucleotide triphosphate.
  • the nucleotide triphosphate is a dideoxynucleotide triphosphate.
  • the capture agent includes a member of a binding pair.
  • the capture agent includes biotin or a biotin analogue, and on certain embodiments, the solid phase includes avidin or streptavidin.
  • the capture agent includes avidin or streptavidin, and in certain embodiments, the solid phase includes biotin.
  • releasing the mass distinguishable tags by competition with a competitor is carried out under elevated temperature conditions.
  • the elevated temperature conditions include treatment for between about 1 minute to about 10 minutes (e.g., about 1 minute, about 2 minutes about 3 minutes, about 4 minutes, about 5 minutes, about 6 minutes, about 7 minutes, about 8 minutes, about 9 minutes or about 10 minutes) at a temperature of between about 80 degrees Celsius to about 100 degrees Celsius (e.g., about 80 degrees Celsius (° C.), about 81° C., about 82° C., about 83° C., about 84° C., about 85° C., about 86° C., about 87° C., about 88° C., about 89° C., about 90° C., about 91° C., about 92° C., about 93° C., about 94° C., about 95° C., about 96° C., about 97° C., about 98° C., about 99° C., or 100° C.).
  • the elevated temperature conditions comprise treatment for about 5 minutes at about 90 degrees Celsius.
  • (c) e.g., generating extended oligonucleotides that include a capture agent by extending oligonucleotides hybridized to the amplicons by one or more nucleotides, wherein one of the one of more nucleotides is a terminating nucleotide and one or more of the nucleotides added to the oligonucleotides includes the capture agent
  • the method further comprises transferring the released mass distinguishable tags to another container between (e) and (f).
  • the solution containing amplicons produced in (a) is treated with an agent that removes terminal phosphates from any nucleotides not incorporated into the amplicons.
  • the terminal phosphate is removed by contacting the solution with a phosphatase.
  • the phosphatase is alkaline phosphatase, and in certain embodiments, the alkaline phosphatase is shrimp alkaline phosphatase.
  • the terminal nucleotides in the extended oligonucleotides comprise the capture agent. In certain embodiments, one or more non-terminal nucleotides in the extended oligonucleotides comprise the capture agent. In some embodiments, the hybridization sequence is about 5 to about 200 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, the hybridization sequence in each oligonucleotide is about 5 to about 50 nucleotides in length. In certain embodiments, terminal nucleotides in the extended oligonucleotides comprise the capture agent, and sometimes one or more non-terminal nucleotides in the extended oligonucleotides comprise the capture agent. In some embodiments, the capture agent comprises biotin, or alternatively avidin or streptavidin, in which case the solid phase comprises avidin or streptavidin, or biotin, respectively.
  • the distinguishable tag is distinguished in part by mass in certain embodiments (i.e., a mass distinguishable tag where a distinguishing feature is mass).
  • the distinguishable tag in some embodiments consists of nucleotides, and sometimes the tag is about 5 nucleotides to about 50 nucleotides in length.
  • the distinguishable tag in certain embodiments is a nucleotide compomer, which sometimes is about 5 nucleotides to about 35 nucleotides in length.
  • the distinguishable tag is a peptide, which sometimes is about 5 amino acids to about 100 amino acids in length.
  • the distinguishable tag in certain embodiments is a concatemer of organic molecule units. In some embodiments, the tag is a trityl molecule concatemer.
  • the solid phase is selected from a flat surface, a silicon chip, a bead, sphere or combination of the foregoing.
  • a solid phase sometimes is paramagnetic.
  • the solid phase is a paramagnetic bead, and in certain embodiments, the solid phase includes a capture agent.
  • the presence or absence of about 50 or more target nucleic acid species is detected by a method described herein. In some embodiments, about 100 or more, 150 or more, 200 or more, 250 or more, 300 or more, 325 or more, 350 or more, 375 or more, 400, or more, 425 or more, 450 or more, 475 or more or 500 or more target nucleic acids is detected. In some embodiments, the presence, absence or amount of about 2 to 500 target nucleic acid species is detected by a method described herein (e.g., about 5, 10, 25, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 target nucleic acid species).
  • the target nucleic acids in certain embodiments are genomic DNA (e.g., human, microbial, viral, fungal or plant genomic DNA; any eukaryotic or prokaryotic nucleic acid (RNA and DNA)).
  • the oligonucleotides are RNA or DNA.
  • the mass spectrometry is matrix-assisted laser desorption ionization (MALDI) mass spectrometry. In certain embodiments, the mass spectrometry is electrospray (ES) mass spectrometry. In some embodiments, the presence or absence of about 1 to about 50 or more target nucleic acids is detected. In certain embodiments, the mass distinguishable tag consists of nucleotides. In some embodiments, the mass distinguishable tag is a nucleotide compomer. In certain embodiments, the nucleotide compomer is about 5 nucleotides to about 150 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, the target nucleic acids are genomic DNA, and in certain embodiments, the genomic DNA is human genomic DNA.
  • detecting comprises an increased signal to noise ratio when releasing comprises competition with a competitor as compared to releasing that does not comprise competition with a competitor. In some embodiments, the detecting is with a signal to noise ratio greater than a signal to noise ratio for detecting after releasing without competition with a competitor. In some embodiments, a signal to noise ratio for extending only a mutant is greater than a signal to noise ratio for extending a wild type and a mutant allele. In some embodiments, the sensitivity of detecting a mutant allele is greater for extending only a mutant allele than for extending a wild type allele and a mutant allele. In some embodiments, the detecting comprises a signal to noise ratio greater than the signal to noise ratio for a method in which releasing does not comprise competition with a competitor.
  • a method for detecting the presence, absence or amount of a plurality of genetic variants in a composition comprising: (a) preparing a plurality of amplicons derived from a plurality of target nucleic acid species, or portions thereof, where each target nucleic acid species comprises a first variant and a second variant; (b) hybridizing the amplicons to oligonucleotide species, where each oligonucleotide species hybridizes to an amplicon derived from a target nucleic acid species, thereby generating hybridized oligonucleotide species; and (c) contacting the hybridized oligonucleotide species with an extension composition comprising one or more terminating nucleotides under extension conditions; where (i) at least one of the one or more terminating nucleotides comprises a capture agent, and (ii) the hybridized oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the first variant are extended by a terminating nucleotide and the hybrid
  • the extended oligonucleotide species of the second variant is not detected.
  • each oligonucleotide species comprises a mass distinguishable tag located 5′ of the hybridization sequence.
  • a method comprises a first variant and a second variant where the first variant is a lower abundance variation and the second variant is a higher abundance variation.
  • the genetic variants are single nucleotide polymorphism (SNP) variants, the first variant is a lower abundance allele and the second variant is a higher abundance allele.
  • the one or more terminating nucleotides consist of one terminating nucleotide.
  • the one or more terminating nucleotides consist of two terminating nucleotides. In some embodiments the one or more terminating nucleotides consist of three terminating nucleotides. In some embodiments the one or more terminating nucleotides independently are selected from ddATP, ddGTP, ddCTP, ddTTP and ddUTP. In some embodiments the extension composition comprises a non-terminating nucleotide. In some embodiments the extension composition comprises one or more extension nucleotides, which extension nucleotides comprise no capture agent. In some embodiments releasing the extended oligonucleotide species comprises contacting the solid phase with a releasing agent.
  • the capture agent comprises biotin or a biotin analogue
  • the solid phase comprises streptavidin and the releasing agent comprises free biotin or a biotin analogue.
  • free biotin or a biotin analogue is the releasing agent.
  • free biotin or a biotin analogue is added at a concentration of about 10 to about 100 ug/ml.
  • free biotin or a biotin analogue is added at a concentration of about 25 ug/ml.
  • the releasing agent has a higher affinity for the solid phase than the capture agent.
  • releasing the extended oligonucleotide species comprises heating from about 30° C.
  • releasing the extended oligonucleotide species comprises heating from about 60° C. to about 100° C. In some embodiments releasing the extended oligonucleotide species comprises heating from 89° C. to about 100° C. In some embodiments releasing the extended oligonucleotide species comprises heating to about 90° C.
  • the solid phase is washed after an extended oligonucleotide is captured. In some embodiments, the washing removes salts that produce interfering adducts in mass spectrometry analysis. In some embodiments, an extended oligonucleotide is not contacted with a resin (e.g. an ion exchange resin).
  • a plurality of target nucleic acid species is 20 or more target nucleic acid species. In some embodiments a plurality of target nucleic acid species is 200 or more target nucleic acid species. In some embodiments a plurality of target nucleic acid species is 200 to 300 target nucleic acid species.
  • the extension conditions comprise cycling 20 to 300 times. In some embodiments the extension conditions comprise cycling 200 to 300 times.
  • a composition comprising a plurality of genetic variants comprises a synthetic template.
  • a composition comprising a plurality of genetic variants comprises a synthetic template and the amount and/or percentage of a first variant in the composition is determined wherein the synthetic template comprises a variant different than in the first variant and second variant and hybridizes to the same oligonucleotides species.
  • a plurality of amplicons comprise a synthetic template and the amount and/or percentage of a first variant in a composition is determined wherein the synthetic template comprises a variant different than in the first variant and second variant and hybridizes to the same oligonucleotides species.
  • FIG. 1 shows amplification of a gene of interest using extension of a gene specific primer with a universal PCR tag and a subsequent single strand ligation to a second universal tag followed by exonuclease clean-up and amplification utilizing tag 1 and 2 (Approach 1).
  • FIG. 2 shows amplification of a gene of interest using a gene specific biotinylated primer with a universal tag 3 that is extended on a template then ligated downstream to a gene specific phosphorylated oligonucleotide tag 4 on the same strand. This product is subsequently amplified utilizing tag 3 and 4 (Concept2).
  • FIG. 3 shows the universal PCR products from both Approach 1 and 2 procedures from FIGS. 1 and 2 , which can be identified using a post-PCR reaction (iPLEX Gold, Sequenom).
  • FIG. 4 shows MALDI-TOF MS spectra for genotyping of a single nucleotide polymorphism (dbSNP# rs10063237) using a Approach 1 protocol.
  • FIG. 5A shows MALDI-TOF MS spectra for genotyping of rs1015731 using a Approach 2 protocol.
  • FIG. 5B shows MALDI-TOF MS spectra for genotyping 12 targets (e.g., a 12 plex reaction) using a Approach 2 protocol.
  • FIG. 5C shows MALDI-TOF MS spectra for genotyping a 19 plex reaction using a Approach 2 protocol.
  • FIG. 5D shows MALDI-TOF MS spectra for genotyping a 35 plex reaction using a Approach 2 protocol.
  • FIG. 5E shows the genotypes acquired from MALDI-TOF MS spectra from FIG. 5C (19 plex) and FIG. 5D (35 plex).
  • FIG. 6 shows PCR amplification and post-PCR primer extension with allele-specific extension primers containing allele-specific mass tags.
  • FIG. 7 shows MALDI-TOF MS spectra for 35 plex genotyping using post-PCR primer extension with allele-specific extension primers containing allele-specific mass tags as a readout.
  • FIG. 8 shows MALDI-TOF MS spectra for genotyping of rs1000586 and rs10131894.
  • FIG. 9 shows oligonucleotides mass tags corresponding to a 70 plex assay. All oligonucleotides were diluted to a final total concentration of 10 ⁇ mol and spotted on a 384 well chip. Values for area, peak height and signal-to-noise ratio were collected from Typer 3.4 (Sequenom).
  • FIG. 10 shows peak areas for oligonucleotides mass tags corresponding to 70 plex assay sorted by nucleotide composition. All oligonucleotides were diluted to a final total concentration of 10 ⁇ mol and spotted on a 384 well chip. Area values were collected from Typer 3.4 (Sequenom).
  • FIG. 11A shows a MALDI-TOF MS spectrum (zoomed views) of oligonucleotide tags corresponding to a 100 plex assay.
  • FIG. 11B shows signal to noise ratios of oligonucleotide tags corresponding to a 100 plex assay. All oligonucleotides were diluted to a final total concentration of 10, 5, 2.5 or 1 ⁇ mol, with 8 replicates spotted on a 384 well chip. Values for signal-to-noise ratio were collected from Typer 3.4 (Sequenom).
  • FIG. 11C shows a MALDI-TOF MS spectrum (zoomed views) of a 100 plex assay after PCR amplification and post-PCR primer extension with allele-specific extension primers containing allele-specific mass tags.
  • FIG. 12 shows extension rates for a 5 plex reaction. Comparing extension oligonucleotides with or without a deoxyinosine, and either standard ddNTPs or nucleotides containing a biotin moiety. Extension rates were calculated by dividing the area of extended product by the total area of the peak (extended product and unextended oligonucleotide) in Typer 3.4 (Sequenom). All experiments compare six DNAs.
  • FIG. 13 shows extension rates for 7 plex and 5 plex reactions over two DNAs.
  • Results compare extension by a single biotinylated ddNTP or a biotinylated dNTP and terminated by an unmodified ddNTP, and final amounts of biotinylated dNTP or ddNTP of 210 or 420 ⁇ mol added to the reaction.
  • Extension rates were calculated by dividing the area of extended product by the total area (extended product and unextended oligonucleotide) in Typer 3.4. All experiments include two replicates of two Centre de'Etude du Polymorphisme Humain (CEPH) DNAs, NA07019 and NA11036.
  • CEPH Centre de'Etude du Polymorphisme Humain
  • FIG. 14 shows a comparison of iPLEX Gold enzyme concentrations in an extension reaction using a 70 plex assay. All assays followed the same protocol except for the amount of iPLEX Gold enzyme used. All experiments include four replicates of the two CEPH DNAs NA06991 and NA07019. The results compare the signal-to-noise ratios of the extension products from Typer 3.4 (Sequenom).
  • FIG. 15 shows a comparison of iPLEX Gold buffer concentration in extension reactions using a 70 plex assay. All assays followed the same protocol except for the amount of goldPLEX buffer used. All experiments include four replicates of the two CEPH DNAs NA06991 and NA07019. The results compare the signal-to-noise ratios of the extension products from Typer 3.4 (Sequenom).
  • FIGS. 16 , 17 , 18 and 19 show a comparison of extension oligonucleotide concentration in extension reactions using a 70 plex assay. All assays followed the same protocol except for the amount of extension oligonucleotide used. All experiments include four replicates of the two CEPH DNAs NA06991 and NA07019. The results compare the signal-to-noise ratios of the extension products from Typer 3.4 (Sequenom).
  • FIGS. 20 and 21 show a comparison of biotinylated ddNTP concentration in extension reactions using a 70 plex assay. All assays followed the same protocol except for the amount of biotinylated ddNTP used (value indicates final amount of each biotinylated nucleotide). All experiments include four replicates of the two CEPH DNAs NA06991 and NA07019. The results compare the signal-to-noise ratios of the extension products from Typer 3.4 (Sequenom).
  • FIG. 22 shows a comparison of Solulink and Dynabeads MyOne C1 magnetic streptavidin beads for capturing the extend products.
  • a total amount of 10 ⁇ mol of each oligonucleotide corresponding to the two possible alleles for assay rs1000586 were bound to the magnetic streptavidin beads, in the presence of either water or varying quantities of biotinylated dNTPs (total 10, 100 or 500 ⁇ mol).
  • the mass tags were then cleaved from the bound oligonucleotide with 10 U of endonuclease V.
  • FIG. 23 shows analysis of the ability of endonuclease V to cleave an extension product containing a deoxyinosine nucleotide in different locations.
  • the oligonucleotides were identical aside from the deoxyinosine being 10, 15, 20 or 25 bases from the 3′ end of the oligonucleotide. After binding the oligonucleotide to the magnetic streptavidin beads, the supernatant was collected, cleaned by a nucleotide removal kit (Qiagen) and then cleaved by treatment with endonuclease V (termed unbound oligonucleotide).
  • Qiagen nucleotide removal kit
  • the beads were washed, and cleaved with endonuclease V, as outlined in protocol section (termed captured/cleaved). The results compare the area of the peaks from Typer 3.4 (Sequenom), and are listed as a percentage of oligonucleotide cleaved by endonuclease V without being bound to magnetic streptavidin beads.
  • FIG. 24 shows a comparison of magnetic streptavidin beads and endonuclease V concentration using a 70 plex assay. All assays were conducted using the same conditions except for the amount of magnetic streptavidin beads and endonuclease V. All experiments include four replicates of the CEPH DNA NA11036. The results compare the signal-to-noise ratio from Typer 3.4.
  • FIGS. 25 and 26 show a comparison of magnetic streptavidin beads and endonuclease V concentration using a 70 plex assay. All assays followed the same protocol except for the amount of magnetic streptavidin beads and endonuclease V. All experiments include four replicates of the two CEPH DNAs NA06991 and NA07019. The results compare the signal-to-noise ratio from Typer 3.4.
  • FIGS. 27A-G show a schematic representation of a biotin competition method for releasing a biotinylated amplification product of interest from a streptavidin coated magnetic or paramagnetic bead.
  • panel A a region of interest is PCR amplified (e.g., using uniplex or multiplex methods) with subsequent dephosphorylation of the amplified products with shrimp alkaline phosphatase (not shown in diagram).
  • Panel B illustrates single base extension of biotinylated dideoxynucleotides over the residue of interest in the product amplified in panel A.
  • Panel C illustrates the capture of the biotinylated extension products by streptavidin coated magnetic beads.
  • Panel D illustrates a washing step to remove unused reaction components followed by a capture step, to capture the streptavidin coated magnetic beads to which the biotinylated extension products are bound.
  • Panel E illustrates release of the biotinylated extension products from the streptavidin coated magnetic bead by competition with free biotin.
  • Panel F illustrates the purified biotinylated extension products, which can be further analyzed using a variety of methods, including matrix assisted laser desorption/time of flight (MALDI-TOF) mass spectrometry (MS).
  • MALDI-TOF matrix assisted laser desorption/time of flight
  • MS mass spectrometry
  • the isolated extension products can be dispensed onto a SpectroCHIP® (Sequenom), for example.
  • Panel G illustrates a representative mass spectrum from MALDI-TOF MS analysis of a biotinylated extension product generated as described herein. See Example 12 for experimental details and results.
  • FIG. 28 is a representative mass spectrum of the mass difference of various allelic variants (e.g., polymorphism) as measured by MALDI-TOF MS analysis of single base extension products generated using biotinylated dideoxynucleotide terminators and released from the solid surface by biotin competition as described herein and illustrated in FIG. 27A-G . See Example 12 for experimental details and results.
  • FIG. 28 discloses SEQ ID NOS 337-339, respectively, in order of appearance.
  • FIGS. 29A-G illustrate a flow chart showing a mechanism of a biotin competition releasing step.
  • FIG. 30A illustrates a flow chart showing a mechanism of an inosine cleavage releasing step. Steps are the same as for a biotin capture method through the wash step with the exception that the extension oligonucleotides have a 5′ mass tag separated by an inosine residue. The mass tags are cleaved from captured products through endonuclease V cleavage specific to inosine residues.
  • FIG. 30B illustrates a detection of cleaved mass tags on the MALDI.
  • the mass represents a genetic variant.
  • FIG. 31 shows comparative results of biotin competition vs. inosine cleavage using different concentrations of 3′-biotinylated oligonucleotide and different capture beads.
  • FIG. 32 shows comparative results of biotin competition vs. inosine cleavage using Dynal Cl beads.
  • the mass spectra peak representing detected capture oligonucleotide and detected quantification oligonucleotide are indicated by down arrows.
  • FIG. 32A shows the results of a biotin competition using Dynal C1 streptavidin beads for capture and free-biotin for the competition.
  • the concentration of the biotinylated oligonucleotide and reference oligonucleotide (i.e. quantification oligonucleotide) tested was 0.031 uM.
  • 32B shows the results of an inosine cleavage release using Dynal C1 streptavidin beads for capture and endonuclease V for the release.
  • concentration of the biotinylated oligonucleotide and reference oligonucleotide (i.e. quantification oligonucleotide) tested was 0.031 uM.
  • FIG. 33 shows an evaluation of different capture beads using a competitor template.
  • FIG. 34 shows mass spectrometry results from an assay using a very low competitor template (about 30 molecules) for each bead type tested.
  • the mass spectra peak representing the detected capture oligonucleotide and detected quantification oligonucleotide are indicated by down arrows.
  • FIG. 34A shows results using Dynal C1 beads.
  • FIG. 34B shows results using Solulink Beads.
  • FIG. 34C shows results using Dynal M270 beads.
  • FIG. 35 shows the detection of BRAF-2 and BRAF-15 mutations using different extension compositions and demonstrates an increase in signal to noise ratio when ddNTPs corresponding to the wild type (e.g. more abundant variant) are excluded from the extension composition.
  • FIG. 36 shows results of a competition assay with a 1% rare allele.
  • FIG. 37 illustrates a model plasmid that can be cleaved through EcoRI restriction digest to separate the regions and more adequately reflect a genomic context.
  • Methods for determining the presence or absence of a plurality of target nucleic acids in a composition described herein find multiple uses by the person of ordinary skill in the art (hereafter referred to herein as the “person of ordinary skill”). Such methods can be utilized, for example, to: (a) rapidly determine whether a particular target sequence (e.g.
  • a target sequence comprising a genetic variation is present in a sample; (b) perform mixture analysis, e.g., identify a mixture and/or its composition or determine the frequency of a target sequence in a mixture (e.g., mixed communities, quasispecies); (c) detect sequence variations (e.g., mutations, single nucleotide polymorphisms) in a sample; (d) perform haplotyping determinations; (e) perform microorganism (e.g., pathogen) typing; (f) detect the presence or absence of a microorganism target sequence in a sample; (g) identify disease markers; (h) detect microsatellites; (i) identify short tandem repeats; (j) identify an organism or organisms; (k) detect allelic variations; (l) determine allelic frequency; (m) determine methylation patterns; (n) perform epigenetic determinations; (o) re-sequence a region of a biomolecule; (p) perform analyses in human clinical research and medicine (e.g
  • cancer marker detection sequence variation detection; detection of sequence signatures favorable or unfavorable for a particular drug administration
  • q perform HLA typing
  • r perform forensics analyses
  • s perform vaccine quality control analyses
  • t monitor treatments
  • u perform vector identity analyses
  • v perform vaccine or production strain quality control
  • w test strain identity (x) plants.
  • Such methods also may be utilized, for example, in a variety of fields, including, without limitation, in commercial, education, medical, agriculture, environmental, disease monitoring, military defense, and forensics fields.
  • nucleic acid refers to an oligonucleotide or polynucleotide, including, without limitation, natural nucleic acids (e.g., deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA), ribonucleic acid (RNA)), synthetic nucleic acids, non-natural nucleic acids (e.g., peptide nucleic acid (PNA)), unmodified nucleic acids, modified nucleic acids (e.g., methylated DNA or RNA, labeled DNA or RNA, DNA or RNA having one or more modified nucleotides).
  • natural nucleic acids e.g., deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA), ribonucleic acid (RNA)
  • synthetic nucleic acids e.g., non-natural nucleic acids (e.g., peptide nucleic acid (PNA)
  • PNA peptide nucleic acid
  • unmodified nucleic acids e.g., methylated DNA or RNA, labeled DNA or
  • nucleic acid refers to two or more nucleotides or nucleotide analogs linked by a covalent bond.
  • Nucleic acids may be any type of nucleic acid suitable for use with processes described herein.
  • a nucleic acid in certain embodiments can be DNA (e.g., complementary DNA (cDNA), genomic DNA (gDNA), plasmids and vector DNA and the like), RNA (e.g., viral RNA, message RNA (mRNA), short inhibitory RNA (siRNA), ribosomal RNA (rRNA), tRNA and the like), and/or DNA or RNA analogs (e.g., containing base analogs, sugar analogs and/or a non-native backbone and the like).
  • a nucleic acid can be in any form useful for conducting processes herein (e.g., linear, circular, supercoiled, single-stranded, double-stranded and the like).
  • a nucleic acid may be, or may be from, a plasmid, phage, autonomously replicating sequence (ARS), centromere, artificial chromosome, chromosome, a cell, a cell nucleus or cytoplasm of a cell in certain embodiments.
  • a nucleic acid in some embodiments is from a single chromosome (e.g., a nucleic acid sample may be from one chromosome of a sample obtained from a diploid organism).
  • the nucleic acid may be from the paternal allele, the maternal allele or the maternal and paternal allele.
  • targets refers to one nucleic acid having a nucleotide sequence that differs by one or more nucleotides from the nucleotide sequence of another nucleic acid when the nucleotide sequences are aligned.
  • a first nucleic acid species differs from a second nucleic acid species when the sequences of the two species, when aligned, differ by one or more nucleotides (e.g., about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100 or more than 100 nucleotide differences).
  • nucleotides e.g., about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100 or more than 100 nucleotide differences.
  • the number of nucleic acid species includes, but is not limited to about 2 to about 10000 nucleic acid species, about 2 to about 1000 nucleic acid species, about 2 to about 500 nucleic acid species, or sometimes about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 325, 350, 375, 400, 425, 450, 475, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000 or 10000 nucleic acid species.
  • an oligonucleotide species is hybridized to a nucleic acid template (e.g. an amplicon) thereby forming a double stranded nucleic acid and the oligonucleotide species that is hybridized to the template is referred to herein as a hybridized oligonucleotide species.
  • a hybridized oligonucleotide species can comprise one or more nucleotides that are not hybridized to the template.
  • a hybridized oligonucleotide species can comprise one or more mismatched nucleotides (e.g.
  • a hybridized oligonucleotide species comprises a tag (e.g. a mass distinguishable tag, a sequence tag, a light emitting tag or a radioactive tag).
  • a hybridized oligonucleotide species comprises a capture agent (e.g. biotin, or any member of binding pair).
  • a hybridized oligonucleotide species comprises a terminating nucleotide.
  • nucleotides refers to natural and non-natural nucleotides.
  • Nucleotides include, but are not limited to, naturally occurring nucleoside mono-, di-, and triphosphates: deoxyadenosine mono-, di- and triphosphate; deoxyguanosine mono-, di- and triphosphate; deoxythymidine mono-, di- and triphosphate; deoxycytidine mono-, di- and triphosphate; deoxyuridine mono-, di- and triphosphate; and deoxyinosine mono-, di- and triphosphate (referred to herein as dA, dG, dT, dC, dU and dl, or A, G, T, C, U and I respectively).
  • Nucleotides also include, but are not limited to, modified nucleotides and nucleotide analogs.
  • Modified nucleotides and nucleotide analogs include, without limitation, deazapurine nucleotides, e.g., 7-deaza-deoxyguanosine (7-deaza-dG) and 7-deaza-deoxyadenosine (7-deaza-dA) mono-, di- and triphosphates, deutero-deoxythymidine (deutero-dT) mon-, di- and triphosphates, methylated nucleotides e.g., 5-methyldeoxycytidine triphosphate, 13 C/ 15 N labeled nucleotides and deoxyinosine mono-, di- and triphosphate.
  • Modified nucleotides, isotopically enriched nucleotides, depleted nucleotides, tagged and labeled nucleotides and nucleotide analogs can be
  • composition refers to a tangible item that includes one or more nucleic acids.
  • a composition sometimes is a sample extracted from a source, but also a composition of all samples at the source, and at times is the source of one or more nucleic acids.
  • a composition can comprise nucleic acids.
  • a composition can comprise genomic DNA.
  • a composition can comprise maternal DNA, fetal DNA or a mixture of maternal and fetal DNA.
  • a composition can comprise fragments of genomic DNA.
  • a composition can comprise nucleic acids derived from a virus, bacteria, yeast, fungus, mammal or mixture thereof.
  • a nucleic acid sample may be derived from one or more sources.
  • a sample may be collected from an organism, mineral or geological site (e.g., soil, rock, mineral deposit, fossil), or forensic site (e.g., crime scene, contraband or suspected contraband), for example.
  • a source may be environmental, such as geological, agricultural, combat theater or soil sources, for example.
  • a source also may be from any type of organism such as any plant, fungus, protistan, moneran, virus or animal, including but not limited, human, non-human, mammal, reptile, cattle, cat, dog, goat, swine, pig, monkey, ape, gorilla, bull, cow, bear, horse, sheep, poultry, mouse, rat, fish, dolphin, whale, and shark, or any animal or organism that may have a detectable nucleic acids.
  • Sources also can refer to different parts of an organism such as internal parts, external parts, living or non-living cells, tissue, fluid and the like.
  • a sample therefore may be a “biological sample,” which refers to any material obtained from a living source or formerly-living source, for example, an animal such as a human or other mammal, a plant, a bacterium, a fungus, a protist or a virus.
  • a source can be in any form, including, without limitation, a solid material such as a tissue, cells, a cell pellet, a cell extract, or a biopsy, or a biological fluid such as urine, blood, saliva, amniotic fluid, exudate from a region of infection or inflammation, or a mouth wash containing buccal cells, hair, cerebral spinal fluid and synovial fluid and organs.
  • a sample also may be isolated at a different time point as compared to another sample, where each of the samples are from the same or a different source.
  • a nucleic acid may be from a nucleic acid library, such as a cDNA or RNA library, for example.
  • a nucleic acid may be a result of nucleic acid purification or isolation and/or amplification of nucleic acid molecules from the sample.
  • Nucleic acid provided for sequence analysis processes described herein may contain nucleic acid from one sample or from two or more samples (e.g., from 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 or 1000 or more samples).
  • Nucleic acids may be treated in a variety of manners. For example, a nucleic acid may be reduced in size (e.g., sheared, digested by nuclease or restriction enzyme, de-phosphorylated, de-methylated), increased in size (e.g., phosphorylated, reacted with a methylation-specific reagent, attached to a detectable label), treated with inhibitors of nucleic acid cleavage and the like.
  • size e.g., sheared, digested by nuclease or restriction enzyme, de-phosphorylated, de-methylated
  • increased in size e.g., phosphorylated, reacted with a methylation-specific reagent, attached to a detectable label
  • nucleic acids may be provided for conducting methods described herein without processing, in certain embodiments.
  • nucleic acid is provided for conducting methods described herein after processing.
  • a nucleic acid may be extracted, isolated, purified or amplified from a sample.
  • isolated refers to nucleic acid removed from its original environment (e.g., the natural environment if it is naturally occurring, or a host cell if expressed exogenously), and thus is altered “by the hand of man” from its original environment.
  • An isolated nucleic acid generally is provided with fewer non-nucleic acid components (e.g., protein, lipid) than the amount of components present in a source sample.
  • a composition comprising isolated nucleic acid can be substantially isolated (e.g., about 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or greater than 99% free of non-nucleic acid components).
  • the term “purified” as used herein refers to nucleic acid provided that contains fewer nucleic acid species than in the sample source from which the nucleic acid is derived.
  • a composition comprising nucleic acid may be substantially purified (e.g., about 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or greater than 99% free of other nucleic acid species).
  • Nucleic acids may be processed by a method that generates nucleic acid fragments, in certain embodiments, before providing nucleic acid for a process described herein.
  • nucleic acid subjected to fragmentation or cleavage may have a nominal, average or mean length of about 5 to about 10,000 base pairs, about 100 to about 1,000 base pairs, about 100 to about 500 base pairs, or about 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000 or 10000 base pairs.
  • Fragments can be generated by any suitable method known in the art, and the average, mean or nominal length of nucleic acid fragments can be controlled by selecting an appropriate fragment-generating procedure.
  • nucleic acid of a relatively shorter length can be utilized to analyze sequences that contain little sequence variation and/or contain relatively large amounts of known nucleotide sequence information.
  • nucleic acid of a relatively longer length can be utilized to analyze sequences that contain greater sequence variation and/or contain relatively small amounts of unknown nucleotide sequence information.
  • target nucleic acid or “target nucleic acid species” refers to any nucleic acid species of interest in a sample.
  • a target nucleic acid includes, without limitation, (i) a particular allele amongst two or more possible alleles, and (ii) a nucleic acid having, or not having, a particular mutation, nucleotide substitution, sequence variation, repeat sequence, marker or distinguishing sequence.
  • different target nucleic acids refers to nucleic acid species that differ by one or more features.
  • genetic variation refers to nucleic acid species that differ by one or more features.
  • variant refers to nucleic acid species that differ by one or more features.
  • Features include, without limitation, one or more methyl groups or a methylation state, one or more phosphates, one or more acetyl groups, and one or more deletions, additions or substitutions of one or more nucleotides.
  • Examples of one or more deletions, additions or substitutions of one or more nucleotides include, without limitation, the presence or absence of a particular mutation, presence or absence of a nucleotide substitution (e.g., single nucleotide polymorphism (SNP)), presence or absence of a repeat sequence (e.g., di-, tri-, tetra-, penta-nucleotide repeat), presence or absence of a marker (e.g., microsatellite) and presence of absence of a distinguishing sequence (e.g., a sequence that distinguishes one organism from another (e.g., a sequence that distinguishes one viral strain from another viral strain)).
  • SNP single nucleotide polymorphism
  • a repeat sequence e.g., di-, tri-, tetra-, penta-nucleotide repeat
  • a marker e.g., microsatellite
  • a distinguishing sequence e.g.,
  • the term “plurality of target nucleic acids” or “plurality of target nucleic acid species” refers to more than one target nucleic acid species.
  • a plurality of target nucleic acids can be about 2 to about 10000 nucleic acid species, about 2 to about 1000 nucleic acid species, about 2 to about 500 nucleic acid species, or sometimes about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 325, 350, 375, 400, 425, 450, 475, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000 or 10000 nucleic acid species, in certain embodiments.
  • Detection or identification of nucleic acids results in detection of the target and can indicate the presence or absence of a particular mutation, sequence variation (mutation or polymorphism) or genetic variation (e.g. sequence variation, sequence difference or polymorphism).
  • sequence variation mutation or polymorphism
  • genetic variation e.g. sequence variation, sequence difference or polymorphism.
  • the plurality of target nucleic acids may also be identified quantitatively as well as qualitatively in terms of identification. Also refer to multiplexing below.
  • a nucleic acid (e.g., a target nucleic acid) can be amplified in certain embodiments.
  • amplifying refers to a process of generating copies of a template nucleic acid.
  • nucleic acid template may be subjected to a process that linearly or exponentially generates two or more nucleic acid amplicons (copies) having the same or substantially the same nucleotide sequence as the nucleotide sequence of the template, or a portion of the template.
  • Nucleic acid amplification often is specific (e.g., amplicons have the same or substantially the same sequence), and can be non-specific (e.g., amplicons have different sequences) in certain embodiments. Nucleic acid amplification sometimes is beneficial when the amount of target sequence present in a sample is low. By amplifying the target sequences and detecting the amplicon synthesized, sensitivity of an assay can be improved, since fewer target sequences are needed at the beginning of the assay for detection of a target nucleic acid. A target nucleic acid sometimes is not amplified prior to hybridizing an extension oligonucleotide, in certain embodiments.
  • Amplification conditions are known and can be selected for a particular nucleic acid that will be amplified.
  • Amplification conditions include certain reagents some of which can include, without limitation, nucleotides (e.g., nucleotide triphosphates), modified nucleotides, oligonucleotides (e.g., primer oligonucleotides for polymerase-based amplification and oligonucleotide building blocks for ligase-based amplification), one or more salts (e.g., magnesium-containing salt), one or more buffers, one or more polymerizing agents (e.g., ligase enzyme, polymerase enzyme), one or more nicking enzymes (e.g., an enzyme that cleaves one strand of a double-stranded nucleic acid) and one or more nucleases (e.g., exonuclease, endonuclease, RNase).
  • nucleotides e.g.,
  • Any polymerase suitable for amplification may be utilized, such as a polymerase with or without exonuclease activity, DNA polymerase and RNA polymerase, mutant forms of these enzymes, for example.
  • Any ligase suitable for joining the 5′ of one oligonucleotide to the 3′ end of another oligonucleotide can be utilized.
  • Amplification conditions also can include certain reaction conditions, such as isothermal or temperature cycle conditions. Methods for cycling temperature in an amplification process are known, such as by using a thermocycle device.
  • the term “cycling” refers to amplification (e.g. an amplification reaction or extension reaction) utilizing a single primer or multiple primers where temperature cycling is used.
  • Amplification conditions also can, in some embodiments, include an emulsion agent (e.g., oil) that can be utilized to form multiple reaction compartments within which single nucleic acid molecule species can be amplified.
  • emulsion agent e.g., oil
  • Amplification is sometimes an exponential product generating process and sometimes is a linear product generating process.
  • a strand of a single-stranded nucleic acid target can be amplified and one or two strands of a double-stranded nucleic acid target can be amplified.
  • An amplification product in some embodiments, is about 10 nucleotides to about 10,000 nucleotides in length, about 10 to about 1000 nucleotides in length, about 10 to about 500 nucleotides in length, 10 to about 100 nucleotides in length, and sometimes about 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 325, 350, 375, 400, 425, 450, 475, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 or 1000 nucleotides in length.
  • Any suitable amplification technique and amplification conditions can be selected for a particular nucleic acid for amplification.
  • amplification processes include, without limitation, polymerase chain reaction (PCR), extension and ligation, ligation amplification (or ligase chain reaction (LCR)) and amplification methods based on the use of Q-beta replicase or template-dependent polymerase (see US Patent Publication Number US20050287592).
  • SDA strand displacement amplification
  • thermophilic SDA nucleic acid sequence based amplification
  • NASBA transcription-associated amplification
  • Reagents, apparatus and hardware for conducting amplification processes are commercially available, and amplification conditions are known and can be selected for the target nucleic acid at hand.
  • Polymerase-based amplification can be effected, in certain embodiments, by employing universal primers.
  • hybridization regions that hybridize to one or more universal primers are incorporated into a template nucleic acid.
  • Such hybridization regions can be incorporated into (i) a primer that hybridizes to a target nucleic acid and is extended, and/or (ii) an oligonucleotide that is joined (e.g., ligated using a ligase enzyme) to a target nucleic acid or a product of (i), for example.
  • Amplification processes that involve universal primers can provide an advantage of amplifying a plurality of target nucleic acids using only one or two amplification primers, for example.
  • FIG. 1 shows certain embodiments of amplification processes.
  • only one primer is utilized for amplification (e.g., FIG. 1A ).
  • two primers are utilized.
  • Under amplification conditions at least one primer has a complementary distinguishable tag.
  • the gene specific extend primer has a 5′ universal PCRTag1R (e.g., FIG. 1A ). It may be extended on any nucleic acid, for example genomic DNA.
  • the DNA or the PCR Tag1R gene specific extend primer may be biotinylated, to facilitate clean up of the reaction.
  • the extended strand then is ligated by a single strand ligase to a universal phosphorylated oligonucleotide, which has a sequence that is the reverse complement of Tag2F (universal PCR primer; FIG. 1B ).
  • the phosphorylated oligonucleotide can include exonuclease resistant nucleotides at its 3′ end. During the exonuclease treatment, all non-ligated extended strands are degraded, whereas ligated products are protected and remain in the reaction (e.g., FIG. 1C ).
  • a universal PCR then is performed, using Tag1R and the Tag2F primers, to amplify multiple targets (e.g., FIG. 1D ).
  • FIG. 2 also shows certain embodiments of amplification processes.
  • a method involving primer extension and ligation takes place in the same reaction (e.g., FIG. 2A ).
  • Biotinylated PCRTag3R gene-specific primer is an extension primer.
  • the phosphorylated oligonucleotide has a gene-specific sequence and binds about 40 bases (e.g., 4 to 100 or more) away from the primer extension site, to the same strand of DNA.
  • a DNA polymerase such as Stoffel polymerase, extends the strand, until it reaches the phosphorylated oligonucleotide.
  • a ligase enzyme ligates the gene specific sequence of the phosphorylated oligonucleotide to the extended strand.
  • the 3′ end of phosphorylated oligonucleotide has PCRTag4(RC)F as its universal tag.
  • the biotinylated extended strands then are bound to streptavidin beads. This approach facilitates cleanup of the reaction (e.g., FIG. 2B ).
  • DNA, such as genomic DNA, and the gene specific phosphorylated oligonucleotides are washed away.
  • a universal PCR then is performed, using Tag3R and Tag4F as primers, to amplify different genes of interest (e.g., FIG. 2C ).
  • nucleic acids can be extended in certain embodiments.
  • extension and grammatical variants thereof, as used herein refers to elongating one strand of a nucleic acid.
  • an oligonucleotide that hybridizes to a target nucleic acid or an amplicon generated from a target nucleic acid can be extended in certain embodiments.
  • An extension reaction is conducted under extension conditions, and a variety of such conditions are known and selected for a particular application.
  • Extension conditions include certain reagents, including without limitation, one or more oligonucleotides, extension nucleotides (e.g., nucleotide triphosphates (dNTPs)), terminating nucleotides (e.g., one or more dideoxynucleotide triphosphates (ddNTPs)), one or more salts (e.g., magnesium-containing salt), one or more buffers (e.g., with beta-NAD, Triton X-100), and one or more polymerizing agents (e.g., DNA polymerase, RNA polymerase). Extension can be conducted under isothermal conditions or under non-isothermal conditions (e.g., thermocycled conditions), in certain embodiments.
  • extension nucleotides e.g., nucleotide triphosphates (dNTPs)
  • terminating nucleotides e.g., one or more dideoxynucleotide triphosphates (ddNTP
  • nucleic acid species can be extended in an extension reaction, and one or more molecules of each nucleic acid species can be extended.
  • a nucleic acid can be extended by one or more nucleotides, and in some embodiments, the extension product is about 10 nucleotides to about 10,000 nucleotides in length, about 10 to about 1000 nucleotides in length, about 10 to about 500 nucleotides in length, 10 to about 100 nucleotides in length, and sometimes about 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 325, 350, 375, 400, 425, 450, 475, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 or 1000 nucleotides in length.
  • incorporation of a terminating nucleotide e.g., ddNTP
  • the hybridization location or other factors, can determine the length to which the oligonucleotide is extended.
  • amplification and extension processes are carried out in the same detection procedure.
  • an extension reaction includes multiple temperature cycles repeated to amplify the amount of extension product in the reaction.
  • the extension reaction is cycled 2 or more times.
  • the extension reaction is cycled 10 or more times.
  • the extension reaction is cycled about 10, 15, 20, 50, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500 or 600 or more times.
  • the extension reaction is cycled 20 to 50 times.
  • the extension reaction is cycled 20 to 100 times.
  • the extension reaction is cycled 20 to 300 times.
  • the extension reaction is cycled 200 to 300 times.
  • a target nucleic acid e.g. target nucleic acid species, oligonucleotide species, hybridized oligonucleotide species or amplicon
  • An extension composition can comprise one or more buffers, salts, enzymes (e.g. polymerases, Klenow, etc.), water, templates (e.g. DNA, RNA, amplicons, etc.), primers (e.g. oligonucleotides), nucleotide triphosphates, glycerol, macromolecular exclusion molecules and any other additives used in the art.
  • An extension composition can comprise terminating nucleotides (e.g. dideoxynucleotides (e.g. ddNTPs)), non-terminating or extension nucleotides (e.g. dNTPs) or a mixture of terminating nucleotides and non-terminating nucleotides.
  • An extension composition consisting essentially of a particular terminating nucleotide or terminating nucleotides can contain any other component of an extension composition (e.g. buffers, salts, templates, primers, etc.), but does not contain any other terminating nucleotide or nucleotide triphosphate (e.g. dNTP) except those specified.
  • an extension composition consisting essentially of ddTTP and ddCTP does not contain ddATP, ddGTP or any other dNTP.
  • the nucleotides in an extension composition are only terminating nucleotides and the target nucleic acid is extended by one nucleotide (i.e. sometimes there are no extension nucleotides in the extension composition).
  • an extension composition consists essentially of terminating nucleotides (e.g. ddNTPs).
  • a terminating nucleotide comprises one or more (e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 20, or more) capture agents.
  • a terminating nucleotide comprises one or more (e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 20, or more) different capture agents.
  • a terminating nucleotide comprises (e.g. is covalently bound to) one or more (e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 20, or more) capture agent molecules.
  • a terminating nucleotide comprises one capture agent molecule.
  • a first terminating nucleotide comprises a capture agent and a second terminating nucleotide comprises a different capture agent.
  • an extension composition comprises one or more terminating nucleotides where each terminating nucleotide comprises a different capture agent. In some embodiments, an extension composition comprises one or more terminating nucleotides where each terminating nucleotide comprises a capture agent and the capture agent is the same. In some embodiments, an extension composition comprises a terminating nucleotide and an extension nucleotide and one or more of the nucleotides (e.g. terminating nucleotides and/or extension nucleotides) include a capture agent. In some embodiments a terminating nucleotide comprises a capture agent and the capture agent is biotin or a biotin analogue.
  • the extension composition consists essentially of terminating nucleotides that are bound to one or more capture agents.
  • the capture agent is biotin or a biotin analogue.
  • a biotin analogue can be any modified biotin that effects the binding properties of biotin to avidin or streptavidin (e.g. 9-methylbiotin, biotin methyl ester (MEBio), desthiobiotin (DEBio), 2′-iminobiotin (IMBio), e-N-Biotinyl-L-lysine, diaminobiotin (DABio), including all biotin analogues disclosed in Lai-Qiang et. al.
  • the capture agent is avidin, streptavidin or a modified form of avidin or streptavidin (e.g. nitroavidin, nitrostreptavidin, NeutrAvidin, CaptAvidin and derivatives thereof).
  • Any suitable extension reaction can be selected and utilized.
  • An extension reaction can be utilized, for example, to discriminate SNP alleles by the incorporation of deoxynucleotides and/or dideoxynucleotides to an extension oligonucleotide that hybridizes to a region adjacent to the SNP site in a target nucleic acid.
  • the primer often is extended with a polymerase.
  • the oligonucleotide is extended by only one deoxynucleotide or dideoxynucleotide complementary to the SNP site.
  • an oligonucleotide may be extended by dNTP incorporation and terminated by a ddNTP, or terminated by ddNTP incorporation without dNTP extension in certain embodiments.
  • One or more dNTP and/or ddNTP used during the extension reaction are labeled with a moiety allowing immobilization to a solid support, such as biotin, in some embodiments.
  • Extension may be carried out using unmodified extension oligonucleotides and unmodified dideoxynucleotides, unmodified extension oligonucleotides and biotinylated dideoxynucleotides, extension oligonucleotides containing a deoxyinosine and unmodified dideoxynucleotides, extension oligonucleotides containing a deoxyinosine and biotinylated dideoxynucleotides, extension by biotinylated dideoxynucleotides, or extension by biotinylated deoxynucleotide and/or unmodified dideoxynucleotides, in some embodiments.
  • an oligonucleotide species can hybridize, under hybridization conditions, to a template (e.g. a target nucleic acid species) adjacent to a genetic variation or variant (e.g. the 3′ end of the oligonucleotide species may be located 5′ of the genetic variation site and may be 0 to 10 nucleotides away from the 5′ end of the genetic variation site).
  • a template e.g. a target nucleic acid species
  • a genetic variation or variant e.g. the 3′ end of the oligonucleotide species may be located 5′ of the genetic variation site and may be 0 to 10 nucleotides away from the 5′ end of the genetic variation site.
  • a genetic variant sometimes is a single nucleotide polymorphism (SNP) or single nucleotide variant.
  • oligonucleotide variants may exist at a single base position on a template target located 3′ of a hybridized oligonucleotide.
  • Several single nucleotide variants may differ by a single base located at a position on a template target that is 3′ of a hybridized oligonucleotide species.
  • an oligonucleotide species is extended by one nucleotide at the variant position.
  • the oligonucleotide can be extended by any one of five terminating nucleotides (e.g. ddATP, ddUTP, ddTTP, ddGTP, ddCTP), depending on the number of variants present, in some embodiments.
  • a target nucleic acid species and its variants, or a corresponding amplicon can act as the template and can, in part, determine which terminating nucleotide is added to the oligonucleotide in the extension reaction.
  • a target nucleic acid species may have two or more variants. In some embodiments a target nucleic acid species comprises two variants. In some embodiments a target nucleic acid species comprises three variants. In some embodiments a target nucleic acid species comprises four variants. In some embodiments a target nucleic acid species comprises no variants.
  • the amount of molecules of a target mutant variant (e.g. low abundant variant) present in an assay where the wild type (e.g. high abundance species) extension product is not generated is determined by the use of a synthetic template included in the extension reaction.
  • the amount of target (e.g. copy number, concentration, percentage) mutant variant (i.e. mutant extension products) and/or percentage of target mutant variant in the sample is quantified by including a known amount of synthetic template in the extension reaction.
  • the synthetic template can hybridize to an oligonucleotide species and contain a base substitution at the mutant position located just 3′ of the oligonucleotide species to be extended.
  • the base substitution is different than the wild type or target mutant variant (e.g. first variant, low abundant variant, SNP).
  • the base substitution present in the template is not present in the sample prior to introduction of the template.
  • a ddNTP e.g. a biotin-ddNTP
  • oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the target mutant variant are co-amplified (e.g. co-extended) with oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the synthetic template.
  • multiple reactions that include serial dilutions of a synthetic template, are performed to determine the amount and/or percentage of the target mutant variant.
  • the amount and/or percentage of the target mutant variant is determined by the amount of synthetic template that yields equal extension product as the target mutant variant.
  • one variant can be in greater abundance than other variants.
  • the variant of greatest abundance is referred to as the wild type variant.
  • a target nucleic acid species comprises a first and second variant where the second variant is represented in greater abundance (i.e. more template is present).
  • a target nucleic acid species comprises a first, second and third variant where the second variant is represented in greater abundance over the first and third variant.
  • a target nucleic acid species comprises a first, second, third and fourth variant where the second variant is represented in greater abundance over the first, third and fourth variant.
  • a variant that is represented in a greater abundance generally is present at a higher concentration or is represented by a greater number of molecules (e.g.
  • a higher concentration can be 2-fold or more. In some embodiments, a higher concentration is 10-fold or more. In some embodiments, a higher concentration is a 100-fold, a 1000-fold or 10000-fold or more.
  • a second variant represents a wild type sequence and is present at a 100-fold or higher concentration than a first variant. In some embodiments, a first variant is represented at a significantly lower concentration than a second variant (e.g. a wild type) where the first variant represents less of the target nucleic acid species.
  • a first variant represents less than 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 8%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.8%, 0.75%, 0.5%, 0.1%, 0.05%, 0.01% or less of the target nucleic acid species. In some embodiments a first variant represents between about 5% to about 0.75% of the target nucleic acid species. In some embodiments a first variant represents less than 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 8%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.8%, 0.75%, 0.5%, 0.1%, 0.05%, 0.01% or less of the total nucleic acid in a composition.
  • a terminating nucleotide that is present (or, in some embodiments absent) in an extension composition determines which terminating nucleotide is added to an oligonucleotide.
  • an extension composition comprises one or more terminating nucleotides (e.g. ddNTPs).
  • an extension composition comprises one or more terminating nucleotides and one or more non-terminating nucleotides (e.g. dNTPs).
  • an extension composition comprises only terminating nucleotides that correspond to a specific variant (e.g. a first variant or a less abundant variant) and therefore only allow extension of that specific variant.
  • a terminating nucleotide that would allow extension of a second variant can be excluded from an extension composition thereby preventing extension of the second variant.
  • an extension composition comprises only terminating nucleotides that correspond to a first and third variant and therefore only allow extension of those specific variants.
  • an extension composition comprises only terminating nucleotides that correspond to a first, third and fourth variant and therefore only allow extension of the first, third and fourth variants.
  • an extension composition consists essentially of terminating nucleotides that correspond to a first variant.
  • a method comprises contacting hybridized oligonucleotide species with an extension composition comprising one or more terminating nucleotides under extension conditions where (i) at least one of the one or more terminating nucleotides comprises a capture agent, and (ii) the hybridized oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the first variant (e.g. a less abundant variant, (e.g., less abundant SNP variant)) are extended by a terminating nucleotide and the hybridized oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the second variant (e.g. wild type or more abundant variant) are not extended by a terminating nucleotide, thereby generating extended oligonucleotide species.
  • an extended oligonucleotide species of a second variant is not detected.
  • signal to noise ratio refers to the quantitative measurement of the quality of a signal by quantifying the ratio of intensity of a signal relative to noise when using a detection process (e.g. mass spectrometry).
  • a detection process e.g. mass spectrometry
  • an intensive peak on one spectrum has a greater signal to noise ratio than a low intensity peak generated by the same analyte (e.g. an extended oligonucleotide species) on another spectrum.
  • noise is generated by extended oligonucleotide species derived from abundant variants (e.g. wild type alleles, second variants, wild type variants).
  • the signal generated from an extended oligonucleotide species derived from a less abundant variant e.g.
  • a first variant, third variant, fourth variant, mutant variant, mutant allele, SNP is obscured by the noise generated by a more abundant extended oligonucleotide species (e.g. a second variant, wild type variant, wild type allele) when using mass spectrometry.
  • the term “signal” as used in the phrase “signal to noise ratio” herein refers to the intensity of a signal peak of an extended oligonucleotide species.
  • the term “signal” as used in the phrase “signal to noise ratio” herein generally refers to the intensity of a signal peak of an extended oligonucleotide species derived from a less abundant variant (e.g. a first variant, mutant variant, mutant allele, SNP).
  • a terminating nucleotide that would allow extension of a second variant is excluded from an extension composition thereby preventing extension of the second variant and increasing the signal to noise ratio for a less abundant variant (e.g. a first variant, mutant variant, mutant allele, SNP).
  • a method comprises contacting hybridized oligonucleotide species with an extension composition comprising one or more terminating nucleotides under extension conditions where (i) at least one of the one or more terminating nucleotides comprises a capture agent, and (ii) the hybridized oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the first variant (e.g.
  • a less abundant variant (e.g., less abundant SNP variant)) are extended by a terminating nucleotide and the hybridized oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the second variant (e.g. wild type or more abundant variant) are not extended by a terminating nucleotide, thereby generating extended oligonucleotide species and increasing the signal to noise ratio compared to a condition where both the first and second variants are extended.
  • the detecting in (f) is with a signal to noise ratio greater than a signal to noise ratio for detecting after releasing without competition with a competitor.
  • the detecting in (f) comprises an increase in a signal to noise ratio when the releasing step (e) comprises competition with a competitor as compared to a releasing step that does not comprise competition with a competitor.
  • a signal to noise ratio for extending only a mutant allele is greater than a signal to noise ratio for extending a wild type and a mutant allele.
  • sensitivity refers to an amount of analyte that can be detected at a given signal-to-noise ratio when using a detection process (e.g. mass spectrometry). In some embodiments, sensitivity can be improved by decreasing the background or noise level. In some embodiments, noise is generated by extended oligonucleotide species derived from abundant variants (e.g. wild type alleles, second variants, wild type variants). In some embodiments, sensitivity is increased when the signal generated from an extended oligonucleotide species derived from a more abundant extended oligonucleotide species (e.g. a second variant, wild type variant, wild type allele) is reduced or eliminated.
  • a detection process e.g. mass spectrometry
  • a terminating nucleotide that would allow extension of a second variant is excluded from an extension composition thereby preventing extension of the second variant and increasing the sensitivity for detection of a less abundant variant (e.g. a first variant, mutant variant, mutant allele, SNP).
  • a method comprises contacting hybridized oligonucleotide species with an extension composition comprising one or more terminating nucleotides under extension conditions where (i) at least one of the one or more terminating nucleotides comprises a capture agent, and (ii) the hybridized oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the first variant (e.g.
  • a less abundant variant (e.g., less abundant SNP variant)) are extended by a terminating nucleotide and the hybridized oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the second variant (e.g. wild type or more abundant variant) are not extended by a terminating nucleotide, thereby generating extended oligonucleotide species and increasing the sensitivity for detection of the first variant compared to a condition where both the first and second variants are extended.
  • the sensitivity of detecting a mutant allele in (f) is greater for extending only a mutant allele than for extending a wild type and a mutant allele.
  • nucleotides can be incorporated into an amplification product or an extension product.
  • Nucleotides may be naturally occurring nucleotides, terminating nucleotides, or non-naturally occurring nucleotides (e.g., nucleotide analog or derivative), in some embodiments.
  • Certain nucleotides can comprise a detectable label and/or a member of a binding pair (e.g., the other member of the binding pair may be linked to a solid phase), in some embodiments.
  • a solution containing amplicons produced by an amplification process, or a solution containing extension products produced by an extension process can be subjected to further processing.
  • a solution can be contacted with an agent that removes phosphate moieties from free nucleotides that have not been incorporated into an amplicon or extension product.
  • an agent that removes phosphate moieties from free nucleotides that have not been incorporated into an amplicon or extension product.
  • An example of such an agent is a phosphatase (e.g., alkaline phosphatase).
  • Amplicons and extension products also may be associated with a solid phase, may be washed, may be contacted with an agent that removes a terminal phosphate (e.g., exposure to a phosphatase), may be contacted with an agent that removes a terminal nucleotide (e.g., exonuclease), may be contacted with an agent that cleaves (e.g., endonuclease, ribonuclease), and the like.
  • an agent that removes a terminal phosphate e.g., exposure to a phosphatase
  • an agent that removes a terminal nucleotide e.g., exonuclease
  • cleaves e.g., endonuclease, ribonuclease
  • oligonucleotide refers to two or more nucleotides or nucleotide analogs linked by a covalent bond.
  • An oligonucleotide is of any convenient length, and in some embodiments is about 5 to about 200 nucleotides in length, about 5 to about 150 nucleotides in length, about 5 to about 100 nucleotides in length, about 5 to about 75 nucleotides in length or about 5 to about 50 nucleotides in length, and sometimes is about 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175, or 200 nucleotides in length.
  • Oligonucleotides may include deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA), ribonucleic acid (RNA), naturally occurring and/or non-naturally occurring nucleotides or combinations thereof and any chemical or enzymatic modification thereof (e.g. methylated DNA, DNA of modified nucleotides).
  • the length of an oligonucleotide sometimes is shorter than the length of an amplicon or target nucleic acid, but not necessarily shorter than a primer or polynucleotide used for amplification.
  • An oligonucleotide often comprises a nucleotide subsequence or a hybridization sequence that is complementary, or substantially complementary, to an amplicon, target nucleic acid or complement thereof (e.g., about 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or greater than 99% identical to the amplicon or target nucleic acid complement when aligned).
  • An oligonucleotide may contain a nucleotide subsequence not complementary to, or not substantially complementary to, an amplicon, target nucleic acid or complement thereof (e.g., at the 3′ or 5′ end of the nucleotide subsequence in the primer complementary to or substantially complementary to the amplicon).
  • An oligonucleotide in certain embodiments may contain a detectable molecule (e.g., a tag, fluorophore, radioisotope, colormetric agent, particle, enzyme and the like) and/or a member of a binding pair, in certain embodiments (e.g., biotin/avidin, biotin/streptavidin).
  • a detectable molecule e.g., a tag, fluorophore, radioisotope, colormetric agent, particle, enzyme and the like
  • a member of a binding pair e.g., biotin/avidin, biotin/streptavidin.
  • in solution refers to a liquid, such as a liquid containing one or more nucleic acids, for example. Nucleic acids and other components in solution may be dispersed throughout, and a solution often comprises water (e.g., aqueous solution).
  • a solution may contain any convenient number of oligonucleotide species, and there often are at least the same number of oligonucleotide species as there are amplicon species or target nucleic acid species to be detected.
  • hybridization sequence refers to a nucleotide sequence in an oligonucleotide capable of specifically hybridizing to an amplicon, target nucleic acid or complement thereof.
  • the hybridization sequence is readily designed and selected and can be of a length suitable for hybridizing to an amplicon, target sequence or complement thereof in solution as described herein.
  • the hybridization sequence in each oligonucleotide is about 5 to about 200 nucleotides in length (e.g., about 5 to 10, about 10 to 15, about 15 to 20, about 20 to 25, about 25 to 30, about 30 to 35, about 35 to 40, about 40 to 45, or about 45 to 50, about 50 to 70, about 80 to 90, about 90 to 110, about 100 to 120, about 110 to 130, about 120 to 140, about 130 to 150, about 140 to 160, about 150 to 170, about 160 to 180, about 170 to 190, about 180 to 200 nucleotides in length).
  • hybridization conditions refers to conditions under which two nucleic acids having complementary nucleotide sequences can interact with one another.
  • Hybridization conditions can be high stringency, medium stringency or low stringency, and conditions for these varying degrees of stringency are known.
  • Hybridization conditions often are selected that allow for amplification and/or extension depending on the application of interest.
  • hybridizing to one amplicon or target nucleic acid refers to hybridizing substantially to one amplicon species or target nucleic acid species and not substantially hybridizing to other amplicon species or target nucleic acid species in the solution.
  • Specific hybridization rules out mismatches so that, for example, an oligonucleotide may be designed to hybridize specifically to a certain allele and only to that allele.
  • An oligonucleotide that is homogenously matched or complementary to an allele will specifically hybridize to that allele, whereas if there is one or more base mismatches then no hybridization may occur.
  • hybridization location refers to a specific location on an amplicon or target nucleic acid to which another nucleic acid hybridizes.
  • the terminus of an oligonucleotide is adjacent to or substantially adjacent to a site on an amplicon species or target nucleic acid species that has a different sequence than another amplicon species or target nucleic acid species.
  • the terminus of an oligonucleotide is “adjacent” to a site when there are no nucleotides between the site and the oligonucleotide terminus.
  • terminus of an oligonucleotide is “substantially adjacent” to a site when there are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 nucleotides between the site and the oligonucleotide terminus, in certain embodiments.
  • One or more capture agents may be utilized for the methods described herein.
  • binding pairs include, without limitation, (a) non-covalent binding pairs (e.g., antibody/antigen, antibody/antibody, antibody/antibody fragment, antibody/antibody receptor, antibody/protein A or protein G, hapten/anti-hapten, biotin/avidin, biotin/streptavidin, folic acid/folate binding protein, receptor/ligand or binding portion thereof, and vitamin B12/intrinsic factor); and (b) covalent attachment pairs (e.g., sulfhydryl/maleimide, sulfhydryl/haloacetyl derivative, amine/isotriocyanate, amine/succinimidyl ester, and amine/sulfonyl halides), and the like.
  • non-covalent binding pairs e.g., antibody/antigen, antibody/antibody, antibody/antibody fragment, antibody/antibody receptor, antibody/protein A or protein G,
  • one member of a binding pair is in association with an extended oligonucleotide or amplification product and another member in association with a solid phase.
  • association with refers to an interaction between at least two units, where the two units are bound or linked to one another, for example.
  • competitive refers to any molecule that competes with the capture agent for interaction with (e.g., binding to) the solid phase.
  • competitors include free capture agent (e.g., one or the other member of a binding pair, free biotin, free avidin/streptavidin), a competing fragment of a capture agent (e.g., a competing fragment of biotin or avidin/streptavidin), a competing multimer of the capture agent (e.g., a biotin multimer), another competing molecule or fragment or multimer thereof, a molecule that competes specifically for binding to the solid phase, elevated salt conditions, elevated temperature conditions, or combinations thereof.
  • free capture agent e.g., one or the other member of a binding pair, free biotin, free avidin/streptavidin
  • competing fragment of a capture agent e.g., a competing fragment of biotin or avidin/streptavidin
  • a competing multimer of the capture agent e.g., a
  • a multimer of a capture agent comprises between about 2 and about 50 monomers. In some embodiments, a multimer of a capture agent comprises between about 2 and about 10 monomers. In some embodiments, a multimer of a capture agent comprises about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20 monomers. In some embodiments, a capture agent comprising a multimer of capture agents comprises monomers that are covalently bound to each other. In some embodiments, a capture agent comprising a multimer of capture agents comprises monomers that are not covalently bound to each other.
  • the term “free capture agent” as used herein refers to a capture agent that is not in association with a solid phase or extended oligonucleotide.
  • a free capture agent can be biotin or a competing portion or fragment thereof.
  • a free capture agent can be avidin, streptavidin, or a competing portion or fragment thereof.
  • the term “competing portion or fragment” refers to capture agent that is less than full size, yet still retains the functionality of the intact capture agent (e.g., the same, less or more of the capture agent interaction activity with the solid support) with respect to interaction with the other member of a binding pair (e.g., a fragment or portion of biotin that still can bind to avidin or streptavidin, a fragment or portion of avidin or streptavidin that still can bind to biotin).
  • a fragment of a free capture agent is any size that still retains the functionality of the intact capture agent.
  • a free capture agent e.g. a fragment of biotin
  • a free capture agent is any size that still retains some of the functionality of the intact capture agent.
  • a free capture agent e.g. a fragment of biotin
  • a free capture agent e.g. a fragment of biotin
  • free capture agent e.g. free biotin
  • free capture agent is added at a concentration from about 0.1 to about 5000 ug/ml. In some embodiments, free capture agent (e.g. free biotin) is added at a concentration of about 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2.5, 5, 10, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200, 400, 800, 1000, 2000, 4000, 5000 ug/ml or higher. In some embodiments, free capture agent (e.g. free biotin) is added at a concentration from about 10 to about 100 ug/ml. In some embodiments, free capture agent (e.g.
  • free biotin is added at a concentration of about 10, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30 ug/ml.
  • free capture agent e.g. free biotin
  • a composition comprising an extended oligonucleotides species at a concentration of about 25 ug/ml.
  • solid support or “solid phase” as used herein refers to an insoluble material with which nucleic acid can be associated.
  • solid supports for use with processes described herein include, without limitation, arrays, beads (e.g., paramagnetic beads, magnetic beads, microbeads, nanobeads) and particles (e.g., microparticles, nanoparticles).
  • Particles or beads having a nominal, average or mean diameter of about 1 nanometer to about 500 micrometers can be utilized, such as those having a nominal, mean or average diameter, for example, of about 10 nanometers to about 100 micrometers; about 100 nanometers to about 100 micrometers; about 1 micrometer to about 100 micrometers; about 10 micrometers to about 50 micrometers; about 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 or 900 nanometers; or about 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500 micrometers.
  • paramagnetic refers to magnetism that generally occurs only in the presence of an externally applied magnetic field.
  • a paramagnetic bead can be attracted to an externally applied magnetic source, but typically does not exert its own magnetic field in the absence of an externally applied magnetic field.
  • Magnetic beads comprising a ferrous core generally exert their own magnetic field.
  • a solid support can comprise virtually any insoluble or solid material, and often a solid support composition is selected that is insoluble in water.
  • a solid support can comprise or consist essentially of silica gel, glass (e.g. controlled-pore glass (CPG)), nylon, Sephadex®, Sepharose®, cellulose, a metal surface (e.g. steel, gold, silver, aluminum, silicon and copper), a magnetic material, a plastic material (e.g., polyethylene, polypropylene, polyamide, polyester, polyvinylidenedifluoride (PVDF)) and the like.
  • Beads or particles may be swellable (e.g., polymeric beads such as Wang resin) or non-swellable (e.g., CPG).
  • a solid phase (e.g. a bead) can comprise a member of a binding pair (e.g. avidin, streptavidin or derivative thereof).
  • a solid phase is substantially hydrophilic.
  • a solid phase (e.g. a bead) is substantially hydrophobic.
  • a solid phase comprises a member of a binding pair (e.g. avidin, streptavidin or derivative thereof) and is substantially hydrophobic or substantially hydrophilic.
  • a solid phase comprises a member of a binding pair (e.g.
  • the binding capacity of solid phase comprising a member of a binding pair is greater than 800, 900, 1000, 1100, 1200, 1250, 1300, 1350, 1400, 1450, 1500, 1600, 1800, 2000 pmoles of free capture agent per mg solid support.
  • a solid support may be provided in a collection of solid supports.
  • a solid support collection comprises two or more different solid support species.
  • the term “solid support species” as used herein refers to a solid support in association with one particular solid phase nucleic acid species or a particular combination of different solid phase nucleic acid species.
  • a solid support collection comprises 2 to 10,000 solid support species, 10 to 1,000 solid support species or about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000 or 10000 unique solid support species.
  • the solid supports (e.g., beads) in the collection of solid supports may be homogeneous (e.g., all are Wang resin beads) or heterogeneous (e.g., some are Wang resin beads and some are magnetic beads).
  • Each solid support species in a collection of solid supports sometimes is labeled with a specific identification tag.
  • An identification tag for a particular solid support species sometimes is a nucleic acid (e.g., “solid phase nucleic acid”) having a unique sequence in certain embodiments.
  • An identification tag can be any molecule that is detectable and distinguishable from identification tags on other solid support species.
  • Solid phase nucleic acid often is single-stranded and is of any type suitable for hybridizing nucleic acid (e.g., DNA, RNA, analogs thereof (e.g., peptide nucleic acid (PNA)), chimeras thereof (e.g., a single strand comprises RNA bases and DNA bases) and the like).
  • Solid phase nucleic acid is associated with the solid support in any manner known by the person of ordinary skill and suitable for hybridization of solid phase nucleic acid to nucleic acid.
  • Solid phase nucleic acid may be in association with a solid support by a covalent linkage or a non-covalent interaction.
  • Non-limiting examples of non-covalent interactions include hydrophobic interactions (e.g., C18 coated solid support and tritylated nucleic acid), polar interactions, and the like.
  • Solid phase nucleic acid may be associated with a solid support by different methodology known to the person of ordinary skill, which include without limitation (i) sequentially synthesizing nucleic acid directly on a solid support, and (ii) synthesizing nucleic acid, providing the nucleic acid in solution phase and linking the nucleic acid to a solid support.
  • Solid phase nucleic acid may be linked covalently at various sites in the nucleic acid to the solid support, such as (i) at a 1′, 2′, 3′, 4′ or 5′ position of a sugar moiety or (ii) a pyrimidine or purine base moiety, of a terminal or non-terminal nucleotide of the nucleic acid, for example.
  • the 5′ terminal nucleotide of the solid phase nucleic acid is linked to the solid support in certain embodiments.
  • a solid phase is washed after extended oligonucleotide species are captured. In some embodiments, a solid phase is washed after extended oligonucleotide species are captured and prior to releasing the extended oligonucleotide species. In some embodiments, washing a solid phase removes salts. In some embodiments, washing a solid phase removes salts that produce interfering adducts in mass spectrometry.
  • washing a solid phase removes salts that interfere with mass spectrometry.
  • extended oligonucleotide species are contacted with an anion exchange resin after washing the solid phase.
  • extended oligonucleotide species are not contacted with an anion exchange resin after washing the solid phase.
  • extended oligonucleotide species are captured on a solid phase, washed one or more times, released from the solid phase and are not contacted with an anion exchange resin. Extended oligonucleotides may be treated by one or more procedures prior to detection.
  • extended oligonucleotides may be conditioned prior to detection (e.g., homogenizing the type of cation and/or anion associated with captured nucleic acid by ion exchange). Extended oligonucleotides may be released from a solid phase prior to detection in certain embodiments.
  • an extended oligonucleotide (e.g. an extended oligonucleotide species) is in association with a capture agent comprising one member of a binding pair (e.g., biotin or avidin/streptavidin).
  • a capture agent comprising one member of a binding pair (e.g., biotin or avidin/streptavidin).
  • an extended oligonucleotide comprising a capture agent is captured by contacting a binding pair member with a solid phase comprising the other member of the binding pair (e.g., avidin/streptavidin or biotin).
  • an extended oligonucleotide is biotinylated, and the biotin moiety with extended oligonucleotide product is captured by contacting the biotin moiety with an avidin or streptavidin coated solid phase.
  • an extended oligonucleotide comprises a mass distinguishable tag, and in certain embodiments, detecting the mass distinguishable tag comprises detecting the presence or absence of an extended oligonucleotide.
  • the extended oligonucleotide is extended by one, two, three, or more nucleotides.
  • an extended oligonucleotide bound to a solid phase is released from the solid phase by competition with a competitor and the extended oligonucleotide is detected. In some embodiments, an extended oligonucleotide bound to a solid phase is released from the solid phase by competition with a competitor and a distinguishable label in, or associated with, the extended oligonucleotide is detected. In some embodiments, an extended oligonucleotide bound to a solid phase is released from the solid phase by competition with a competitor, a distinguishable label is released from the extended oligonucleotide, and the released distinguishable label is detected.
  • distinguishable labels and “distinguishable tags” refer to types of labels or tags that can be distinguished from one another and used to identify the nucleic acid to which the tag is attached.
  • a variety of types of labels and tags may be selected and used for multiplex methods provided herein. For example, oligonucleotides, amino acids, small organic molecules, light-emitting molecules, light-absorbing molecules, light-scattering molecules, luminescent molecules, isotopes, enzymes and the like may be used as distinguishable labels or tags.
  • oligonucleotides, amino acids, and/or small molecule organic molecules of varying lengths, varying mass-to-charge ratios, varying electrophoretic mobility (e.g., capillary electrophoresis mobility) and/or varying mass also can be used as distinguishable labels or tags.
  • a fluorophore, radioisotope, colormetric agent, light emitting agent, chemiluminescent agent, light scattering agent, and the like may be used as a label.
  • the choice of label may depend on the sensitivity required, ease of conjugation with a nucleic acid, stability requirements, and available instrumentation.
  • distinguishable feature refers to any feature of one label or tag that can be distinguished from another label or tag (e.g., mass and others described herein).
  • label composition of the distinguishable labels and tags can be selected and/or designed to result in optimal flight behavior in a mass spectrometer and to allow labels and tags to be distinguished at high multiplexing levels.
  • a particular target nucleic acid species, amplicon species and/or extended oligonucleotide species often is paired with a distinguishable detectable label species, such that the detection of a particular label or tag species directly identifies the presence of a particular target nucleic acid species, amplicon species and/or extended oligonucleotide species in a particular composition.
  • one distinguishable feature of a label species can be used, for example, to identify one target nucleic acid species in a composition, as that particular distinguishable feature corresponds to the particular target nucleic acid.
  • Labels and tags may be attached to a nucleic acid (e.g., oligonucleotide) by any known methods and in any location (e.g., at the 5′ of an oligonucleotide).
  • a nucleic acid e.g., oligonucleotide
  • each particular label species as “specifically corresponding” to each particular target nucleic acid species, as used herein, refers to one label species being paired with one target species. When the presence of a label species is detected, then the presence of the target nucleic acid species associated with that label species thereby is detected, in certain embodiments.
  • label refers to one label that is detectably distinguishable from another label.
  • the number of label species includes, but is not limited to, about 2 to about 10000 label species, about 2 to about 500,000 label species, about 2 to about 100,000, about 2 to about 50000, about 2 to about 10000, and about 2 to about 500 label species, or sometimes about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 325, 350, 375, 400, 425, 450, 475, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000, 10000, 20000, 30000, 40000, 50000, 60000
  • mass distinguishable label refers to a label that is distinguished by mass as a feature.
  • a variety of mass distinguishable labels can be selected and used, such as for example a compomer, amino acid and/or a concatemer.
  • Different lengths and/or compositions of nucleotide strings e.g., nucleic acids; compomers
  • amino acid strings e.g., peptides; polypeptides; compomers
  • concatemers can be distinguished by mass and be used as labels. Any number of units can be utilized in a mass distinguishable label, and upper and lower limits of such units depends in part on the mass window and resolution of the system used to detect and distinguish such labels.
  • the length and composition of mass distinguishable labels can be selected based in part on the mass window and resolution of the detector used to detect and distinguish the labels.
  • the term “compomer” as used herein refers to the composition of a set of monomeric units and not the particular sequence of the monomeric units.
  • the term “compomer” refers to the base composition of the nucleic acid with the monomeric units being bases.
  • the number of each type of base can be denoted by B n (i.e.: A a C c G g T t , with A 0 C 0 G 0 T 0 representing an “empty” compomer or a compomer containing no bases).
  • a natural compomer is a compomer for which all component monomeric units (e.g., bases for nucleic acids and amino acids for polypeptides) are greater than or equal to zero.
  • At least one of a, c, g or t equals 1 or more (e.g., A 0 C 0 G 1 T 0 , A 1 C 0 G 1 T 0 , A 2 C 1 G 1 T 2 , A 3 C 2 G 1 T 5 ).
  • “unnatural” compomers containing negative numbers of monomeric units can be generated by an algorithm utilized to process data.
  • a compomer refers to the amino acid composition of a polypeptide fragment, with the number of each type of amino acid similarly denoted.
  • a compomer species can correspond to multiple sequences.
  • the compomer A 2 G 3 corresponds to the sequences AGGAG, GGGAA, AAGGG, GGAGA and others.
  • one compomer species is paired with (e.g., corresponds to) one target nucleic acid species, amplicon species and/or oligonucleotide species.
  • Different compomer species have different base compositions, and distinguishable masses, in embodiments herein (e.g., A 0 C 0 G 5 T 0 and A 0 C 5 G 0 T 0 are different and mass-distinguishable compomer species).
  • a set of compomer species differ by base composition and have the same length.
  • a set of compomer species differ by base compositions and length.
  • a nucleotide compomer used as a mass distinguishable label can be of any length for which all compomer species can be detectably distinguished, for example about 1 to 15, 5 to 20, 1 to 30, 5 to 35, 10 to 30, 15 to 30, 20 to 35, 25 to 35, 30 to 40, 35 to 45, 40 to 50, or 25 to 50, or sometimes about 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 85 or 100, nucleotides in length.
  • a peptide or polypeptide compomer used as a mass distinguishable label can be of any length for which all compomer species can be detectably distinguished, for example about 1 to 20, 10 to 30, 20 to 40, 30 to 50, 40 to 60, 50 to 70, 60 to 80, 70 to 90, or 80 to 100 amino acids in length.
  • the limit to the number of units in a compomer often is limited by the mass window and resolution of the detection method used to distinguish the compomer species.
  • concatemer and “concatemer” are used herein synonymously (collectively “concatemer”), and refer to a molecule that contains two or more units linked to one another (e.g., often linked in series; sometimes branched in certain embodiments).
  • a concatemer sometimes is a nucleic acid and/or an artificial polymer in some embodiments.
  • a concatemer can include the same type of units (e.g., a homoconcatemer) in some embodiments, and sometimes a concatemer can contain different types of units (e.g., a heteroconcatemer).
  • a concatemer can contain any type of unit(s), including nucleotide units, amino acid units, small organic molecule units (e.g., trityl), particular nucleotide sequence units, particular amino acid sequence units, and the like.
  • a homoconcatemer of three particular sequence units ABC is ABCABCABC, in an embodiment.
  • a concatemer can contain any number of units so long as each concatemer species can be detectably distinguished from other species.
  • a trityl concatemer species can contain about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 325, 350, 375, 400, 425, 450, 475, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 or 1000 trityl units, in some embodiments.
  • a distinguishable label can be released from a nucleic acid product (e.g., an extended oligonucleotide) in certain embodiments.
  • the linkage between the distinguishable label and a nucleic acid can be of any type that can be transcribed and cleaved, cleaved and allow for detection of the released label or labels (e.g., U.S. patent application publication no. US20050287533A1, entitled “Target-Specific Compomers and Methods of Use,” naming Ehrich et al.).
  • Such linkages and methods for cleaving the linkages (“cleaving conditions”) are known.
  • a label can be separated from other portions of a molecule to which it is attached.
  • a label (e.g., a compomer) is cleaved from a larger string of nucleotides (e.g., extended oligonucleotides).
  • linkages include linkages that can be cleaved by a nuclease (e.g., ribonuclease, endonuclease); linkages that can be cleaved by a chemical; linkages that can be cleaved by physical treatment; and photocleavable linkers that can be cleaved by light (e.g., o-nitrobenzyl, 6-nitroveratryloxycarbonyl, 2-nitrobenzyl group).
  • Photocleavable linkers provide an advantage when using a detection system that emits light (e.g., matrix-assisted laser desorption ionization (MALDI) mass spectrometry involves the laser emission of light), as cleavage and detection are combined and occur in a single step.
  • a detection system that emits light
  • MALDI matrix-assisted laser desorption ionization
  • a label can be part of a larger unit, and can be separated from that unit prior to detection.
  • a label is a set of contiguous nucleotides in a larger nucleotide sequence, and the label is cleaved from the larger nucleotide sequence.
  • the label often is located at one terminus of the nucleotide sequence or the nucleic acid in which it resides.
  • the label, or a precursor thereof resides in a transcription cassette that includes a promoter sequence operatively linked with the precursor sequence that encodes the label.
  • the promoter sometimes is a RNA polymerase-recruiting promoter that generates an RNA that includes or consists of the label.
  • An RNA that includes a label can be cleaved to release the label prior to detection (e.g., with an RNase).
  • a distinguishable label or tag is not cleaved from an extended oligonucleotide, and in some embodiments, the distinguishable label or tag comprises a capture agent.
  • detecting a distinguishable feature includes detecting the presence or absence of an extended oligonucleotide, and in some embodiments an extended oligonucleotide includes a capture agent.
  • an extended oligonucleotide is released from a solid phase by competition with a competitor, and in certain embodiments competition with a competitor comprises contacting a solid phase with a competitor. In some embodiments, releasing an extended oligonucleotide from a solid phase is carried out under elevated temperature conditions.
  • the elevated temperature conditions are between about 80 degrees Celsius and about 100 degrees Celsius. In some embodiments, releasing the extend oligonucleotides from the capture agent occurs under elevated temperature conditions for between about 1 minute and about 10 minutes. In certain embodiments, releasing an extended oligonucleotides from a solid phase includes treatment with a competitor (e.g., free capture agent, competing fragment of free capture agent, multimer of free capture agent, any molecule that specifically competes for binding to the solid phase, the like and combinations thereof) for about 5 minutes at about 90 degrees Celsius. In some embodiments, a competitor is biotin and a solid phase comprises avidin/streptavidin, and in certain embodiments a competitor is avidin/streptavidin and a solid phase comprises biotin.
  • a competitor is biotin and a solid phase comprises avidin/streptavidin
  • a competitor is avidin/streptavidin and a solid phase comprises biotin.
  • a multiplex assay includes some oligonucleotides that are extended and some oligonucleotides that are not extended after extension.
  • oligonucleotides that are not extended often do not bind to a solid phase, and in some embodiments, oligonucleotides that are not extended can interact with a solid phase.
  • the ratio of competitor to capture agent attached to a nucleotide or nucleic acid can be 1:1.
  • a competitor may be used in excess of capture agent associated with an oligonucleotide, and in some embodiments, capture agent associated with an oligonucleotide may be in excess of competitor. In such embodiments, the excess sometimes is about a 5-fold excess to about a 50,000-fold excess (e.g., about a 10-fold excess, about a 100-fold excess, about a 1,000-fold excess, or about a 10,000-fold excess).
  • detection of a label refers to identification of a label species. Any suitable detection device can be used to distinguish label species in a sample. Detection devices suitable for detecting mass distinguishable labels, include, without limitation, certain mass spectrometers and gel electrophoresis devices. Examples of mass spectrometry formats include, without limitation, Matrix-Assisted Laser Desorption/Ionization Time-of-Flight (MALDI-TOF) Mass Spectrometry (MS), MALDI orthogonal TOF MS (OTOF MS; two dimensional), Laser Desorption Mass Spectrometry (LDMS), Electrospray (ES) MS, Ion Cyclotron Resonance (ICR) MS, and Fourier Transform MS.
  • MALDI-TOF Mass Spectrometry
  • MS Mass Spectrometry
  • MALDI orthogonal TOF MS OTOF MS; two dimensional
  • LDMS Laser Desorption Mass Spectrometry
  • ES Electrospray
  • ICR Ion Cyclotron Resonance
  • ionization MS e.g., MALDI-TOF MS, LDMS, ESMS, linear TOF, OTOF.
  • ionization MS e.g., MALDI-TOF MS, LDMS, ESMS, linear TOF, OTOF.
  • Orthogonal ion extraction MALDI-TOF and axial MALDI-TOF can give rise to relatively high resolution, and thereby, relatively high levels of multiplexing.
  • Detection devices suitable for detecting light-emitting, light absorbing and/or light-scattering labels include, without limitation, certain light detectors and photodetectors (e.g., for fluorescence, chemiluminescence, absorbtion, and/or light scattering labels).
  • Multiplexing refers to the simultaneous detection of more than one target nucleic acid species.
  • General methods for performing multiplexed reactions in conjunction with mass spectrometry are known (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,043,031, 5,547,835 and International PCT application No. WO 97/37041).
  • Multiplexing provides an advantage that a plurality of target nucleic acid species (e.g., some having different sequence variations) can be identified in as few as a single mass spectrum, as compared to having to perform a separate mass spectrometry analysis for each individual target nucleic acid species.
  • methods herein lend themselves to high-throughput, highly-automated processes for analyzing sequence variations with high speed and accuracy, in some embodiments.
  • methods herein may be multiplexed at high levels in a single reaction. Multiplexing is applicable when the genotype at a polymorphic locus is not known, and in some embodiments, the genotype at a locus is known.
  • the number of target nucleic acid species multiplexed include, without limitation, about 2 to 1,000 species, and sometimes about 1-3, 3-5, 5-7, 7-9, 9-11, 11-13, 13-15, 15-17, 17-19, 19-21, 21-23, 23-25, 25-27, 27-29, 29-31, 31-33, 33-35, 35-37, 37-39, 39-41, 41-43, 43-45, 45-47, 47-49, 49-51, 51-53, 53-55, 55-57, 57-59, 59-61, 61-63, 63-65, 65-67, 67-69, 69-71, 71-73, 73-75, 75-77, 77-79, 79-81, 81-83, 83-85, 85-87, 87-89, 89-91, 91-93, 93-95, 95-97, 97-101, 101-103, 103-105, 105-107, 107-109, 109
  • Design methods for achieving resolved mass spectra with multiplexed assays can include primer and oligonucleotide design methods and reaction design methods.
  • primer and oligonucleotide design in multiplexed assays the same general guidelines for primer design applies for uniplexed reactions, such as avoiding false priming and primer dimers, only more primers are involved for multiplex reactions.
  • analyte peaks in the mass spectra for one assay are sufficiently resolved from a product of any assay with which that assay is multiplexed, including pausing peaks and any other by-product peaks.
  • analyte peaks optimally fall within a user-specified mass window, for example, within a range of 5,000-8,500 Da.
  • Extension oligonucleotides can be designed with respect to target sequences of a given SNP strand, in some embodiments.
  • the length often is between limits that can be, for example, user-specified (e.g., 17 to 24 bases or 17-26 bases) and often do not contain bases that are uncertain in the target sequence.
  • Hybridization strength sometimes is gauged by calculating the sequence-dependent melting (or hybridization/dissociation) temperature, T m .
  • a particular primer choice may be disallowed, or penalized relative to other choices of primers, because of its hairpin potential, false priming potential, primer-dimer potential, low complexity regions, and problematic subsequences such as GGGG.
  • Methods and software for designing extension oligonucleotides are known, and include, for example, SpectroDESIGNER (Sequenom).
  • call rate refers to the number of calls (e.g., genotypes determined) obtained relative to the number of calls attempted to be obtained. In other words, for a 12-plex reaction, if 10 genotypes are ultimately determined from conducting methods provided herein, then 10 calls have been obtained with a call rate of 10/12. Different events can lead to failure of a particular attempted assay, and lead to a call rate lower than 100%.
  • Multiplex assay accuracy may be determined by assessing the number of calls obtained (e.g., correctly or accurately assessed) and/or the number of false positive and/or false negative events in one or more assays. Accuracy also may be assessed by comparison with the accuracy of corresponding uniplex assays for each of the targets assessed in the multiplex assay.
  • one or more methods may be used to determine a call rate. For example, a manual method may be utilized in conjunction with an automated or computer method for making calls, and in some embodiments, the rates for each method may be summed to calculate an overall call rate.
  • accuracy or call rates when multiplexing two or more target nucleic acids (e.g., fifty or more target nucleic acids), can be about 99% or greater, 98%, 97%, 96%, 95%, 94%, 93%, 92%, 91%, 90%, 89%, 87-88%, 85-86%, 83-84%, 81-82%, 80%, 78-79% or 76-77%, for example.
  • a call rate for each target species in a multiplex assay that includes about 2 to 200 target species is greater than or equal to 80% or more (e.g., 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or greater).
  • the error rate may be determined based on the call rate or rate of accuracy.
  • the error rate may be the number of calls made in error. In some embodiments, for example, the error rate may be 100% less the call rate or rate of accuracy.
  • the error rate may also be referred to as the “fail rate.” Identification of false positives and/or false negatives can readjust both the call and error rates. In certain embodiments running more assays can also help in identifying false positives and/or false negatives, thereby adjusting the call and/or error rates.
  • error rates when multiplexing two or more target nucleic acids (e.g., fifty or more target nucleic acids), can be about 1% or less, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24% or 25%, for example.
  • sequence variation (e.g. genetic variant) candidates that can be identified by the methods provided herein include sequences containing sequence variations that are polymorphisms.
  • Polymorphisms include both naturally occurring, somatic sequence variations and those arising from mutation. Polymorphisms include but are not limited to: sequence microvariants where one or more nucleotides in a localized region vary from individual to individual, insertions and deletions which can vary in size from one nucleotides to millions of bases, and microsatellite or nucleotide repeats which vary by numbers of repeats.
  • Nucleotide repeats include homogeneous repeats such as dinucleotide, trinucleotide, tetranucleotide or larger repeats, where the same sequence in repeated multiple times, and also heteronucleotide repeats where sequence motifs are found to repeat. For a given locus the number of nucleotide repeats can vary depending on the individual.
  • a polymorphic marker or site is the locus at which divergence occurs. Such a site can be as small as one base pair (an SNP).
  • Polymorphic markers include, but are not limited to, restriction fragment length polymorphisms (RFLPs), variable number of tandem repeats (VNTR's), hypervariable regions, minisatellites, dinucleotide repeats, trinucleotide repeats, tetranucleotide repeats and other repeating patterns, simple sequence repeats and insertional elements, such as Alu.
  • RFLPs restriction fragment length polymorphisms
  • VNTR's variable number of tandem repeats
  • minisatellites dinucleotide repeats, trinucleotide repeats, tetranucleotide repeats and other repeating patterns, simple sequence repeats and insertional elements, such as Alu.
  • Polymorphic forms also are manifested as different Mendelian alleles for a gene. Polymorphisms can be observed
  • allelic variants of polymorphic regions have polymorphic regions. Since individuals have any one of several allelic variants of a polymorphic region, individuals can be identified based on the type of allelic variants of polymorphic regions of genes. This can be used, for example, for forensic purposes. In other situations, it is crucial to know the identity of allelic variants that an individual has. For example, allelic differences in certain genes, for example, major histocompatibility complex (MHC) genes, are involved in graft rejection or graft versus host disease in bone marrow transportation. Accordingly, it is highly desirable to develop rapid, sensitive, and accurate methods for determining the identity of allelic variants of polymorphic regions of genes or genetic lesions.
  • MHC major histocompatibility complex
  • a method or a kit as provided herein can be used to genotype a subject by determining the identity of one or more allelic variants of one or more polymorphic regions in one or more genes or chromosomes of the subject. Genotyping a subject using a method as provided herein can be used for forensic or identity testing purposes and the polymorphic regions can be present in mitochondrial genes or can be short tandem repeats.
  • Single nucleotide polymorphisms are generally biallelic systems, that is, there are two alleles that an individual can have for any particular marker. This means that the information content per SNP marker is relatively low when compared to microsatellite markers, which can have upwards of 10 alleles. SNPs also tend to be very population-specific; a marker that is polymorphic in one population can not be very polymorphic in another. SNPs, found approximately every kilobase (see Wang et al.
  • Sensitive detection of somatic mutations is especially valuable to the cancer research community whose interest is the identification of genetic determinants for the initiation and proliferation of tumors.
  • the information gained from a sensitive approach can also be used for profiling mutations to predict patient outcomes and inform a relevant treatment option.
  • a sensitive detection method that can detect a genetic variant that represents less than or equal to 5% of its counterpart wild type sequence, is needed.
  • a detection method that can detect less than or equal to 1% of wild type is implemented.
  • a detection method that can detect less than or equal to 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.8%, 0.75%, 0.5%, 0.1%, 0.05%, or 0.01% of wild type is implemented. Additionally, within pre-natal diagnostics, this type of method could elucidate paternally derived mutations in utero.
  • allelic analysis can be performed by generating extended oligonucleotides from nucleic acid targets carrying one or more somatic mutations (e.g., SNPs, disease markers, the like and combinations thereof) of interest. Detecting the presence or absence of a released, extended oligonucleotide representing an allele carrying a somatic mutation can be utilized as a rapid method of screening for the presence or absence of a particular mutation in a target population, in some embodiments. In certain embodiments involving generating an extended oligonucleotide from a mutant allele, the extended oligonucleotide can be detected as the appropriate mutant allele gives rise to an extended oligonucleotide product.
  • somatic mutations e.g., SNPs, disease markers, the like and combinations thereof
  • telomeres can be used to diagnose or determine the prognosis of a disease.
  • Diseases characterized by genetic markers can include, but are not limited to, atherosclerosis, obesity, diabetes, autoimmune disorders, and cancer. Diseases in all organisms have a genetic component, whether inherited or resulting from the body's response to environmental stresses, such as viruses and toxins. The ultimate goal of ongoing genomic research is to use this information to develop new ways to identify, treat and potentially cure these diseases.
  • the first step has been to screen disease tissue and identify genomic changes at the level of individual samples. The identification of these “disease” markers is dependent on the ability to detect changes in genomic markers in order to identify errant genes or sequence variants.
  • Genomic markers can be used for the identification of all organisms, including humans. These markers provide a way to not only identify populations but also allow stratification of populations according to their response to disease, drug treatment, resistance to environmental agents, and other factors.
  • a disease marker sometimes is a mutation, and can be a relatively rare allele such as, for example, a somatic mutation against the background of a wild type allele (e.g., cancer tissue versus normal tissue, mutant viral type versus normal viral type (e.g. HIV)), in some embodiments.
  • the rare allele or mutation represents less than 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.8%, 0.75%, 0.5%, 0.1%, 0.05%, or 0.01% of the wild type. In some embodiment, the rare allele or mutation can represent less than 1% of the wild type.
  • microorganisms and viruses are selected from a variety of organisms including, but not limited to, bacteria, fungi, protozoa, ciliates, and viruses.
  • the microorganisms are not limited to a particular genus, species, strain, subtype or serotype or any other classification.
  • the microorganisms and viruses can be identified by determining sequence variations in a target microorganism sequence relative to one or more reference sequences or samples.
  • the reference sequence(s) can be obtained from, for example, other microorganisms from the same or different genus, species strain or serotype or any other classification, or from a host prokaryotic or eukaryotic organism or any mixed population.
  • pathogens e.g., bacterial or viral
  • Identification and typing of pathogens is critical in the clinical management of infectious diseases. Precise identity of a microbe is used not only to differentiate a disease state from a healthy state, but is also fundamental to determining the source of the infection and its spread and whether and which antibiotics or other antimicrobial therapies are most suitable for treatment. In addition treatment can be monitored.
  • Traditional methods of pathogen typing have used a variety of phenotypic features, including growth characteristics, color, cell or colony morphology, antibiotic susceptibility, staining, smell, serotyping, biochemical typing and reactivity with specific antibodies to identify microbes (e.g., bacteria).
  • the pathogens are present in minor amounts and/or are very similar to the organisms that make up the normal flora, and can be indistinguishable from the innocuous strains by the methods cited above. In these cases, determination of the presence of the pathogenic strain can require the higher resolution afforded by the molecular typing methods provided herein.
  • the methods provided herein can be used to determine the presence of viral or bacterial nucleic acid sequences indicative of an infection by identifying sequence variations that are present in the viral or bacterial nucleic acid sequences relative to one or more reference sequences.
  • the reference sequence(s) can include, but are not limited to, sequences obtained from an infectious organism, related non-infectious organisms, or sequences from host organisms. Viruses, bacteria, fungi and other infectious organisms contain distinct nucleic acid sequences, including sequence variants, which are different from the sequences contained in the host cell.
  • a target DNA sequence can be part of a foreign genetic sequence such as the genome of an invading microorganism, including, for example, bacteria and their phages, viruses, fungi, protozoa, and the like.
  • the processes provided herein are particularly applicable for distinguishing between different variants or strains of a microorganism (e.g., pathogenic, less pathogenic, resistant versus non-resistant and the like) in order, for example, to choose an appropriate therapeutic intervention.
  • Retroviridae e.g., human immunodeficiency viruses such as HIV-1 (also referred to as HTLV-III, LAV or HTLV-III/LAV; Ratner et al., Nature, 313:227-284 (1985); Wain Hobson et al., Cell, 40:9-17 (1985), HIV-2 (Guyader et al., Nature, 328:662-669 (1987); European Patent Publication No. 0 269 520; Chakrabarti et al., Nature, 328:543-547 (1987); European Patent Application No.
  • Retroviridae e.g., human immunodeficiency viruses such as HIV-1 (also referred to as HTLV-III, LAV or HTLV-III/LAV; Ratner et al., Nature, 313:227-284 (1985); Wain Hobson et al., Cell, 40:9-17 (1985), HIV-2 (Guyader et al., Nature,
  • HIV-LP International Publication No. WO 94/00562
  • Picornaviridae e.g., polioviruses, hepatitis A virus, (Gust et al., Intervirology, 20:1-7 (1983)); enteroviruses, human coxsackie viruses, rhinoviruses, echoviruses
  • Calcivirdae e.g.
  • Togaviridae e.g., equine encephalitis viruses, rubella viruses
  • Flaviridae e.g., dengue viruses, encephalitis viruses, yellow fever viruses
  • Coronaviridae e.g., coronaviruses
  • Rhabdoviridae e.g., vesicular stomatitis viruses, rabies viruses
  • Filoviridae e.g., ebola viruses
  • Paramyxoviridae e.g., parainfluenza viruses, mumps virus, measles virus, respiratory syncytial virus
  • Orthomyxoviridae e.g., influenza viruses
  • Bungaviridae e.g., Hantaan viruses, bunga viruses, phleboviruses and Nairo viruses
  • Arenaviridae hemorrhagic fever viruses
  • Reoviridae e.g., reoviruses, orb
  • infectious bacteria examples include but are not limited to Helicobacter pyloris, Borelia burgdorferi, Legionella pneumophilia, Mycobacteria sp. (e.g. M. tuberculosis, M. avium, M. intracellulare, M. kansaii, M. gordonae ), Salmonella, Staphylococcus aureus, Neisseria gonorrheae, Neisseria meningitidis, Listeria monocytogenes, Streptococcus pyogenes (Group A Streptococcus ), Streptococcus agalactiae (Group B Streptococcus ), Streptococcus sp.
  • M. tuberculosis e.g. M. tuberculosis, M. avium, M. intracellulare, M. kansaii, M. gordonae
  • Salmonella Staphylococcus aureus
  • infectious fungi examples include but are not limited to Cryptococcus neoformans, Histoplasma capsulatum, Coccidioides immitis, Blastomyces dermatitidis, Chlamydia trachomatis, Candida albicans .
  • Other infectious organisms include protists such as Plasmodium falciparum and Toxoplasma gondii.
  • Methods provided herein can improve the speed and accuracy of detection of nucleotide changes involved in drug resistance, including antibiotic resistance.
  • Genetic loci involved in resistance to isoniazid, rifampin, streptomycin, fluoroquinolones, and ethionamide have been identified [Heym et al., Lancet 344:293 (1994) and Morris et al., J. Infect. Dis. 171:954 (1995)].
  • a combination of isoniazid (inh) and rifampin (rif) along with pyrazinamide and ethambutol or streptomycin, is routinely used as the first line of attack against confirmed cases of M.
  • haplotypes In any diploid cell, there are two haplotypes at any gene or other chromosomal segment that contain at least one distinguishing variance. In many well-studied genetic systems, haplotypes are more powerfully correlated with phenotypes than single nucleotide variations. Thus, the determination of haplotypes is valuable for understanding the genetic basis of a variety of phenotypes including disease predisposition or susceptibility, response to therapeutic interventions, and other phenotypes of interest in medicine, animal husbandry, and agriculture.
  • Haplotyping procedures as provided herein permit the selection of a portion of sequence from one of an individual's two homologous chromosomes and to genotype linked SNPs on that portion of sequence.
  • the direct resolution of haplotypes can yield increased information content, improving the diagnosis of any linked disease genes or identifying linkages associated with those diseases.
  • Microsatellites (sometimes referred to as variable number of tandem repeats or VNTRs) are short tandemly repeated nucleotide units of one to seven or more bases, the most prominent among them being di-, tri-, and tetranucleotide repeats. Microsatellites are present every 100,000 bp in genomic DNA (J. L. Weber and P. E. Can, Am. J. Hum. Genet. 44, 388 (1989); J. Weissenbach et al., Nature 359, 794 (1992)).
  • CA dinucleotide repeats for example, make up about 0.5% of the human extra-mitochondrial genome; CT and AG repeats together make up about 0.2%.
  • CG repeats are rare, most probably due to the regulatory function of CpG islands.
  • Microsatellites are highly polymorphic with respect to length and widely distributed over the whole genome with a main abundance in non-coding sequences, and their function within the genome is unknown. Microsatellites can be important in forensic applications, as a population will maintain a variety of microsatellites characteristic for that population and distinct from other populations which do not interbreed.
  • microsatellites can be silent, but some can lead to significant alterations in gene products or expression levels. For example, trinucleotide repeats found in the coding regions of genes are affected in some tumors (C. T. Caskey et al., Science 256, 784 (1992) and alteration of the microsatellites can result in a genetic instability that results in a predisposition to cancer (P. J. McKinnen, Hum. Genet. 175, 197 (1987); J. German et al., Clin. Genet. 35, 57 (1989)).
  • STR regions are polymorphic regions that are not related to any disease or condition.
  • Many loci in the human genome contain a polymorphic short tandem repeat (STR) region.
  • STR loci contain short, repetitive sequence elements of 3 to 7 base pairs in length. It is estimated that there are 200,000 expected trimeric and tetrameric STRs, which are present as frequently as once every 15 kb in the human genome (see, e.g., International PCT application No. WO 9213969 A1, Edwards et al., Nucl. Acids Res.
  • VNTR variable nucleotide tandem repeat
  • VNTR typing is a very established tool in microbial typing e.g. M. tuberculosis (MIRU typing).
  • STR loci examples include, but are not limited to, pentanucleotide repeats in the human CD4 locus (Edwards et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 19:4791 (1991)); tetranucleotide repeats in the human aromatase cytochrome P-450 gene (CYP19; Polymeropoulos et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 19:195 (1991)); tetranucleotide repeats in the human coagulation factor XIII A subunit gene (F13A1; Polymeropoulos et al., Nucl. Acids Res.
  • Polymorphic STR loci and other polymorphic regions of genes are sequence variations that are extremely useful markers for human identification, paternity and maternity testing, genetic mapping, immigration and inheritance disputes, zygosity testing in twins, tests for inbreeding in humans, quality control of human cultured cells, identification of human remains, and testing of semen samples, blood stains, microbes and other material in forensic medicine.
  • loci also are useful markers in commercial animal breeding and pedigree analysis and in commercial plant breeding. Traits of economic importance in plant crops and animals can be identified through linkage analysis using polymorphic DNA markers. Efficient and accurate methods for determining the identity of such loci are provided herein.
  • the methods provided herein allow for high-throughput, fast and accurate detection of allelic variants.
  • Studies of allelic variation involve not only detection of a specific sequence in a complex background, but also the discrimination between sequences with few, or single, nucleotide differences.
  • One method for the detection of allele-specific variants by PCR is based upon the fact that it is difficult for Taq polymerase to synthesize a DNA strand when there is a mismatch between the template strand and the 3′ end of the primer.
  • An allele-specific variant can be detected by the use of a primer that is perfectly matched with only one of the possible alleles; the mismatch to the other allele acts to prevent the extension of the primer, thereby preventing the amplification of that sequence.
  • the methods herein also are applicable to association studies, copy number variations, detection of disease marker and SNP sets for typing and the like.
  • the methods herein described are valuable for identifying one or more genetic markers whose frequency changes within the population as a function of age, ethnic group, sex or some other criteria.
  • age-dependent distribution of ApoE genotypes is known in the art (see, e.g., Schechter et al. (1994) Nature Genetics 6:29-32).
  • the frequencies of sequence variations known to be associated at some level with disease can also be used to detect or monitor progression of a disease state.
  • N291 S polymorphism (N291 S) of the Lipoprotein Lipase gene which results in a substitution of a serine for an asparagine at amino acid codon 291, leads to reduced levels of high density lipoprotein cholesterol (HDL-C) that is associated with an increased risk of males for arteriosclerosis and in particular myocardial infarction (see, Reymer et al. (1995) Nature Genetics 10:28-34).
  • HDL-C high density lipoprotein cholesterol
  • determining changes in allelic frequency can allow the identification of previously unknown sequence variations and ultimately a gene or pathway involved in the onset and progression of disease.
  • the methods provided herein can be used to study variations in a target nucleic acid or protein relative to a reference nucleic acid or protein that are not based on sequence, e.g., the identity of bases or amino acids that are the naturally occurring monomeric units of the nucleic acid or protein.
  • methods provided herein can be used to recognize differences in sequence-independent features such as methylation patterns, the presence of modified bases or amino acids, or differences in higher order structure between the target molecule and the reference molecule, to generate fragments that are cleaved at sequence-independent sites.
  • Epigenetics is the study of the inheritance of information based on differences in gene expression rather than differences in gene sequence.
  • Epigenetic changes refer to mitotically and/or meiotically heritable changes in gene function or changes in higher order nucleic acid structure that cannot be explained by changes in nucleic acid sequence.
  • features that are subject to epigenetic variation or change include, but are not limited to, DNA methylation patterns in animals, histone modification and the Polycomb-trithorax group (Pc-G/tx) protein complexes (see, e.g., Bird, A., Genes Dev., 16:6-21 (2002)).
  • the ability of the Pc-G/trx group of proteins to target and bind to a genome affects only the level of expression of the genes contained in the genome, and not the properties of the gene products.
  • the methods provided herein can be used with specific cleavage reagents or specific extension reactions that identify variations in a target sequence relative to a reference sequence that are based on sequence-independent changes, such as epigenetic changes.
  • the methods provided herein can be used to detect sequence variations that are epigenetic changes in the target sequence, such as a change in methylation patterns in the target sequence.
  • Analysis of cellular methylation is an emerging research discipline.
  • the covalent addition of methyl groups to cytosine is primarily present at CpG dinucleotides (microsatellites).
  • CpG islands in promoter regions are of special interest because their methylation status regulates the transcription and expression of the associated gene.
  • Methylation of promoter regions leads to silencing of gene expression. This silencing is permanent and continues through the process of mitosis.
  • DNA methylation Due to its significant role in gene expression, DNA methylation has an impact on developmental processes, imprinting and X-chromosome inactivation as well as tumor genesis, aging, and also suppression of parasitic DNA. Methylation is thought to be involved in the cancerogenesis of many widespread tumors, such as lung, breast, and colon cancer, and in leukemia. There is also a relation between methylation and protein dysfunctions (long Q-T syndrome) or metabolic diseases (transient neonatal diabetes, type 2 diabetes). Bisulfite treatment of genomic DNA can be utilized to analyze positions of methylated cytosine residues within the DNA.
  • Treating nucleic acids with bisulfite deaminates cytosine residues to uracil residues, while methylated cytosine remains unmodified.
  • the degree of methylation in a nucleic acid as well as the positions where cytosine is methylated can be deduced.
  • Methylation analysis via restriction endonuclease reaction is made possible by using restriction enzymes which have methylation-specific recognition sites, such as HpaII and MSPI.
  • restriction enzymes which have methylation-specific recognition sites, such as HpaII and MSPI.
  • the basic principle is that certain enzymes are blocked by methylated cytosine in the recognition sequence. Once this differentiation is accomplished, subsequent analysis of the resulting fragments can be performed using the methods as provided herein.
  • DNA based typing by high-throughput technologies enable a rapid sample throughput in a comparatively short time, as required in an outbreak situation (e.g. monitoring in the hospital environment, early warning systems).
  • Monitoring is dependent of the microbial marker region used, but can facilitate monitoring to the genus, species, strain or subtype specific level.
  • Such approaches can be useful in biodefense, in clinical and pharmaceutical monitoring and metagenomics applications (e.g. analysis of gut flora).
  • Such monitoring of treatment progress or failure is described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,255,992, U.S. Pat. No. 7,217,510, U.S. Pat. No. 7,226,739 and U.S. Pat. No. 7,108,974 which are incorporated by reference herein.
  • Methods provided herein can be used to control the identity of recombinant production clones (not limited to vaccines), which can be vaccines or e.g. insulin or any other production clone or biological or medical product.
  • Methods provided herein can be used to control the quality of pharmacological products by, for example, detecting the presence or absence of certain microorganism target nucleic acids in such products.
  • kits for carrying out methods described herein often comprise one or more containers that contain one or more components described herein.
  • a kit comprises one or more components in any number of separate containers, packets, tubes, vials, multiwell plates and the like, or components may be combined in various combinations in such containers.
  • One or more of the following components, for example, may be included in a kit: (i) one or more nucleotides (e.g. terminating nucleotides and/or non-terminating nucleotides); (ii) one or more nucleotides comprising a capture agent; (iii) one or more oligonucleotides (e.g.
  • oligonucleotide primers one or more extension oligonucleotides, oligonucleotides comprising a tag, oligonucleotides comprising a capture agent); (iv) free capture agent (e.g. free biotin); (v) a solid phase (e.g. a bead) comprising a member of a binding pair (viii); (ix) one or more enzymes (e.g. a polymerase, endonuclease, restriction enzyme, etc.); (x) controls components (e.g. control genomic DNA, primers, synthetic templates, target nucleic acids, etc.) (xi) one or more buffers and (xii) printed matter (e.g. directions, labels, etc).
  • free capture agent e.g. free biotin
  • a solid phase e.g. a bead
  • enzymes e.g. a polymerase, endonuclease, restriction enzyme, etc.
  • controls components
  • a kit sometimes is utilized in conjunction with a process, and can include instructions for performing one or more processes and/or a description of one or more compositions.
  • a kit may be utilized to carry out a process (e.g., using a solid phase) described herein. Instructions and/or descriptions may be in tangible form (e.g., paper and the like) or electronic form (e.g., computer readable file on a tangle medium (e.g., compact disc) and the like) and may be included in a kit insert.
  • a kit also may include a written description of an internet location that provides such instructions or descriptions.
  • the presented process provides an alternative biochemistry to the regular PCR, which usually has two gene specific primers amplifying the same target.
  • the process is suited for the amplification of target regions e.g. containing a SNP.
  • the gene specific extend primer has a 5′ universal PCRTag1R. It is extended on the genomic DNA.
  • the DNA or the PCR Tag1R gene specific extend primer may be biotinylated, to facilitate clean up of the reaction.
  • the extended strand is then ligated to a universal phosphorylated oligonucleotide, which has sequence which is reverse complement of Tag2F (universal PCR primer).
  • the phosphorylated oligonucleotide has exonuclease resistant nucleotides at its 3′ end.
  • FIG. 2 shows the use of a biotinylated PCRTag3R gene specific primer as an extension primer.
  • the phosphorylated oligonucleotide has a gene specific sequence and binds around 40 bases away from the primer extension site, to the same strand of DNA.
  • Stoffel DNA polymerase extends the strand, until it reaches the phosphorylated oligonucleotide.
  • Amp ligase (Epicentre) ligates the gene specific sequence of the phosphorylated oligonucleotide to the extended strand.
  • the 3′ end of Phospho oligonucleotide has PCRTag4(RC)F as its universal tag.
  • biotinylated extended strands are then bound to streptavidin beads. This facilitates clean up of the reaction. Genomic DNA and the gene specific phosphorylated oligonucleotides will get washed away. A universal PCR is then performed using Tag3R and Tag4F as primers, to amplify different genes of interest. An overview of concept-2 is as shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the universal PCR products from both the Approach 1 and 2 can be identified using the post-PCR reaction, as shown in FIG. 3 .
  • SAP was used to clean up the PCR reaction.
  • Post-PCR reactions were performed using gene specific oligonucleotides binding just before the SNP and the single base extended products were spotted on a chip array and analyzed on mass spectrometry. Alternatively the methods provided herein can be used for post-PCR read-out.
  • Ligation 5 ul of extended product was ligated with 500 pmols of a phospho oligonucleotide (reverse complement of the Tag2F primer) which is exonuclease resistant at its 3′ end.
  • the extension product and phospho-oligonucleotide were denatured at 65° C./10 minutes, cooled before volume made to 50 ul with 50 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.8, 10 mM MgCl 2 , 10 mM DTT, 1 mM ATP and 50 U T4 RNA Ligase1. Incubation was carried out at 37° C./4 hours, 65° C./20 minutes.
  • Exonuclease treatment 10 ul of the ligated product was denatured at 95° C./5 minutes, cooled and diluted with 0.5 ⁇ exonuclease III buffer containing 20U exonuclease 1 and 100U exonuclease III in a total volume of 20 ul. The reaction was incubated at 37° C./4 hours, 80° C./20 minutes.
  • Universal Tag2 (RC) F (SEQ ID NO: 2) 5′ P -CATGTCGTTTTACAACGTCG*T*G*ddC 3′ (The * represents exonuclease resistant linkages between the nucleotides)
  • Tag1R (M13R) (SEQ ID NO: 3) 5′ GGAAACAGCTATGACCATG 3′
  • Results from Approach 1 can be seen in FIG. 4 .
  • the primers and Tag sequences used were:
  • Tag3R (SEQ ID NO: 8) 5′ GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAAC 3′
  • Tag4F (SEQ ID NO: 9) 5′ CCATGTCATACACCGCCTTCAGAGC 3′
  • Approach 2 gene specific extend primers, phospho oligonucleotides and post-PCR reaction extension primers are listed in Tables 1, 2 and 3 respectively. For Table 1, the PCR tag region is underlined.
  • Approach 2 5′-Biotinylated and PCR-tagged gene specific-primer is extended on genomic DNA by Stoffel DNA polymerase and simultaneously ligated to a downstream gene specific PCR-tagged phospho oligonucleotide bound on the same strand, by Amp Ligase (Epicentre). Results from Approach 2 are shown in FIG. 5A-5 .
  • SAP/Post-PCR Reaction 5 ul Univ PCR was dispensed in a 384 well plate and 2 ul SAP reaction containing 0.6U SAP (shrimp alkaline phosphatase) were added with incubation at 37° C. for 40 minutes and finally inactivation of the enzyme at 85° C. for 5 minutes. Extension reagents were added in 2 ul amounts containing 0.9 mM acyclic terminators and 1.353U post-PCR enzyme.
  • the extension oligonucleotide mixture differed in concentration according to its mass: 0.5 uM of low mass: 4000-5870 daltons, 1.0 uM of medium mass: 6000-7350 daltons and 1.5 uM of high mass: 7400-8700 daltons were added in a final volume of 9 ul.
  • the cycling conditions used for post-PCR reaction were 94° C./30 sec and 40 cycles of an 11 temperature cycle (94° C./5 secs and 5 internal cycles of (52° C./5 sec and 80° C./5 sec) and final extension at 72° C./3 minutes.
  • MALDI-TOF MS The extension reaction was diluted with 16 ul water and 6 mg CLEAN Resin (Sequenom) was added to desalt the reaction. It was rotated for 2 hours at room temperature. 15 nl of the post-PCR reaction were dispensed robotically onto silicon chips preloaded with matrix (SpectroCHIP®, Sequenom). Mass spectra were acquired using a Mass ARRAY Compact Analyzer (MALDI-TOF mass spectrometer, Sequenom).
  • the presented process provides a concept for an alternative goldPLEX primer extension post-PCR format to increase multiplexing and flexibility of SNP genotyping. It utilizes allele specific extension primers, with two extension primers per SNP designed to hybridize on the SNP site. Each primer contains a gene and allele specific 3′ nucleotide for specific hybridization to the SNP site of interest and a varied defined 5′ nucleotide sequence which corresponds to a mass tag. The specificity of the assay is determined by the match of the 3′ end of the primer to the template, which will only be extended by DNA polymerase if corresponding to the specific SNP. An overview of the process is outlined in FIG. 6 .
  • the extension primers are extended by dNTP incorporation and terminated by a ddNTP or alternatively terminated by ddNTP incorporation without dNTP extension.
  • One or more dNTP and/or ddNTP used during the extension reaction are labeled with a moiety allowing immobilization to a solid support, such as biotin.
  • extension product is subsequently immobilized on a solid support, such as streptavidin coated beads, where only extended/terminated products will bind. Unextended primers and unwanted reaction components do not bind and are washed away.
  • the 5′ nucleotide sequence or an alternative group which corresponds to a mass tag is cleaved from the extension product, leaving the 3′ section of the extension product bound to the solid support.
  • the cleavage can be achieved with a variety of methods including enzymatic, chemical and physical treatments.
  • the possibility outlined in this example utilizes Endonuclease V to cleave a deoxyinosine within the primer.
  • the reaction cleaves the second phosphodiester bonds 3′ to deoxyinosine releasing an oligonucleotide mass tag.
  • the 5′ nucleotide sequence (mass tag) is then transferred to a chip array and analyzed by mass spectrometry (e.g. MALDI-TOF MS).
  • mass spectrometry e.g. MALDI-TOF MS.
  • the presence of a mass signal matching the tag's mass indicates an allele specific primer was extended and therefore the presence of that specific allele.
  • a 35 plex PCR was carried out in a 5 ⁇ l reaction volume using the following reagents; 5 ng DNA, 1 ⁇ PCR buffer, 500 ⁇ M each dNTP, 100 nM each PCR primer (as listed in Table 4), 3 mM MgCl 2 , and 0.15 U Taq (Sequenom). Thermocycling was carried out using the following conditions: 7 minutes at 95° C.; followed by 45 cycles of 20 seconds at 95° C., 30 seconds at 56° C. and 1 minute at 72° C.; and concludes with 3 minutes at 72° C.
  • the PCR reaction was treated with SAP (shrimp alkaline phosphatase) to dephosphorylate unincorporated dNTPs.
  • SAP shrimp alkaline phosphatase
  • a 2 ⁇ l mixture containing 0.6 U SAP was added to the PCR product and then subjected to 40 minutes at 37° C. and 5 minutes at 85° C.
  • Extension reaction reagents were combined in a 3 ⁇ l volume, which was added to the SAP treated PCR product.
  • the total extension reaction contained the following reagents; 1 ⁇ goldPLEX buffer, 17 ⁇ M each biotin ddNTP, 0.8 ⁇ M each extension primer (listed in Table 5) and 1 ⁇ post-goldPLEX enzyme.
  • Thermocycling was carried out using a 200 cycle program consisting of 2 minutes at 94° C.; followed by 40 cycles of 5 seconds at 94° C., followed by 5 cycles of 5 seconds at 52° C., and 5 seconds at 72° C.; and concludes with 3 minutes at 72° C.
  • Extension primer sequences containing the mass tags and resulting masses of the cleaved products corresponding to specific alleles are listed in Table 5.
  • Solulink magnetic streptavidin beads were conditioned by washing three times with 50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5, 1M NaCl, 0.5 mM EDTA, pH 7.5. The extension reaction was then combined with 300 ⁇ g conditioned beads. Beads were incubated at room temperature for 30 minutes with gentle agitation and then pelleted using a magnetic rack. The supernatant was removed. Subsequently the beads were washed 3 times with 50 mM Tris-HCl, 1M NaCl, 0.5 mM EDTA, pH 7.5 and 3 times with water. For each wash step the beads were pelleted and the supernatant removed.
  • the mass tags were cleaved from the extension product by addition of a solution containing 30 U Endonuclease V and 0.4 ⁇ buffer 4(NEB) and incubation at 37° C. for 1 hour. After incubation the magnetic beads were pelleted using a magnetic rack and the supernatant containing the mass tag products was removed.
  • a 2-plex PCR was carried out in a 5 ⁇ l reaction volume using the following reagents; 2 ng DNA, 1.25 ⁇ HotStar Taq buffer, 500 ⁇ M each dNTP, 100 nM each PCR primer (as listed in Table 1), 3.5 mM MgCl 2 , and 0.15 U HotStar Taq (Qiagen). Thermocycling was carried out using the following conditions: 15 minutes at 95° C.; followed by 45 cycles of 20 seconds at 95° C., 30 seconds at 56° C. and 1 minute at 72° C.; and concludes with 3 minutes at 72° C. The PCR reaction was treated with SAP (shrimp alkaline phosphatase) to dephosphorylate unincorporated dNTPs. A 2 ⁇ l mixture containing 0.3 U SAP was added to the PCR product and then subjected to 40 minutes at 37° C. and 5 minutes at 85° C.
  • SAP shrimp alkaline phosphatase
  • Extension reaction reagents were combined in a 2 ⁇ l volume, which was added to the SAP treated PCR product.
  • the extension reaction contained the following reagents; 21 ⁇ M each biotin ddNTP, 1 ⁇ M each extension primer including a ribonucleotide for subsequent RNase A cleavage (listed in Table 7) and 1.25 U Thermo Sequenase.
  • Thermocycling was carried out using the following cycling conditions: 2 minutes at 94° C.; followed by 100 cycles of 5 seconds at 94° C., 5 seconds at 52° C., and 5 seconds at 72° C.; and concludes with 3 minutes at 72° C. Removal of unbound nucleotides was carried out using the QIAquick Nucleotide Removal Kit (Qiagen) as recommended by the manufacturer.
  • the eluted extension reaction was then combined with 30 pg prepared Dynabeads M-280 Streptavidin beads (Dynal) (washed three times with 5 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5, 1M NaCl, 0.5 mM EDTA). Beads were incubated at room temperature for 15 minutes with gentle agitation and then pelleted using a magnetic rack. The supernatant was removed. Subsequently the beads were washed 6 times with 5 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5, 1 M NaCl, 0.5 mM EDTA. For each wash step the beads were pelleted and the supernatant removed.
  • the mass tags were cleaved from the extension product by addition of RNase A and incubation at 37° C. for 1 hour. After incubation the magnetic beads were pelleted using a magnetic rack and the supernatant containing the mass tag products was removed. Desalting was achieved by the addition of 6 mg CLEAN Resin (Sequenom).
  • Extension primer sequences containing the mass tags and resulting masses of the cleaved products corresponding to specific alleles are listed in Table 7.
  • Example spectra are shown in FIG. 8 .
  • Mass Tags were designed to be at least 16 Daltons apart to avoid any overlap with potential salt adducts, and so a double charge of any mass signal would not interfere with a mass tag signal.
  • the calculation of the mass tags must take into account the deoxyinosine and the nucleotide 3′ to the deoxyinosine.
  • Nucleotide mass tags MALDI-TOF flight behavior was examined for oligonucleotides which correspond to the mass tags used in a 70 plex ( FIGS. 9 and 10 ) and 100 plex assay ( FIGS. 11A and B).
  • oligonucleotides corresponding to a 70 plex assay were called by the standard Sequenom Typer 3.4 software using the three parameters; area, peak height and signal-to-noise ratio at a comparable level ( FIG. 9 ).
  • area value of each peak correlates to the sequence composition of that oligonucleotide.
  • the higher percentage of guanidine and cytosine nucleotides results in larger area values; whereas the percentage of adenosine corresponds with lower area values ( FIG. 10 ).
  • oligonucleotides representing a 100 plex assay we examined the effects of oligonucleotide concentration (10, 5, 2.5 and 1 ⁇ mol final concentration per oligonucleotide) on signal-to-noise ratio ( FIG. 11B ).
  • the lower oligonucleotide concentrations of 2.5 and 1 ⁇ mol gave consistently higher signal-to-noise ratio values than oligonucleotides concentrations of 10 and 5 ⁇ mol. This observation was confirmed by manual observation of the peaks seen in Typer 3.4. However, the four oligonucleotides concentrations gave comparable area values (data not shown).
  • Extension primers were designed using Sequenom's Assay Design software utilizing the following parameters SBE Mass Extend/goldPLEX extension, primer lengths between 20 and 35 bases (and corresponding mass window), and a minimum peak separation of 10 Daltons for analytes (the minimum possible) and 0 Daltons for mass extend primers.
  • Extension oligonucleotide and ddNTP role in extension reaction To investigate the effects of extension oligonucleotide (with/without deoxyinosine nucleotide) and ddNTP composition (with/without biotin moiety) upon primer extension, we investigated extension rates of a 5 plex ( FIG. 12 ). Assays generally show the best extension rates using unmodified extension oligonucleotides and ddNTPs. Extension oligonucleotides containing a deoxyinosine showed no significant reduction in extension rate. However, when using a ddNTP including a biotin moiety a reduction in extension rate was seen in all assays, when using either type of extension oligonucleotide.
  • Biotinylated dNTP/ddNTP extension To compare the effects of extending by a single biotinylated ddNTP or a biotinylated dNTP and terminated by an unmodified ddNTP, we compared extension rates in a 7 plex and 5 plex.
  • the 7 plex was extended by a biotinylated ddCTP or biotinylated dCTP and a ddATP, ddUTP, or ddGTP.
  • the 5 plex was extended by a biotinylated ddUTP or biotinylated dUTP and a ddATP, ddCTP, or ddGTP.
  • the experiment also compared two concentrations of biotinylated dNTP or ddNTP, either 210 or 420 pmol.
  • extension rates when extended by a biotinylated dNTP and terminated by an unmodified ddNTP were significantly decreased when compared to extending by a single biotinylated ddNTPs ( FIG. 13 ).
  • PCR was carried out in a 5 ⁇ l reaction volume using the following reagents; 5 ng DNA, 1 ⁇ PCR buffer, 500 ⁇ M each dNTP, 100 nM each PCR primer, 3 mM MgCl 2 , and 0.15 U Taq (Sequenom).
  • Thermocycling was carried out using the following conditions: 7 minutes at 95° C.; followed by 45 cycles of 20 seconds at 95° C., 30 seconds at 56° C. and 1 minute at 72° C.; and concludes with 3 minutes at 72° C.
  • the PCR reaction was treated with SAP (shrimp alkaline phosphatase) to dephosphorylate unincorporated dNTPs.
  • SAP shrimp alkaline phosphatase
  • a 2 ⁇ l mixture containing 0.6 U SAP was added to the PCR product and then subjected to 40 minutes at 37° C. and 5 minutes at 85° C. in a Thermocycler.
  • Extension reaction reagents were combined in a 3 ⁇ l volume, which was added to the SAP treated PCR product.
  • the total extension reaction contained the following reagents; 1 ⁇ goldPLEX buffer, 0.2 ⁇ l of 250 ⁇ M stock each biotinylated ddNTP (50 ⁇ mol final), 0.8 ⁇ l of 2.5 ⁇ M solution each extension primer (2 ⁇ mol final) (IDT), and 0.05 ⁇ l goldPLEX enzyme (Sequenom).
  • Thermocycling was carried out using a 300 cycle program consisting of: 2 minutes at 94° C.; followed by 60 cycles of; 5 seconds at 94° C. followed by 5 cycles of 5 seconds at 52° C. and 5 seconds at 80° C.; and concludes with 3 minutes at 72° C.
  • Magnetic streptavidin beads were washed two times with 100 ⁇ l of 50 mM Tris-HCl, 1M NaCl, 0.5 mM EDTA, pH 7.5.
  • the extension reaction was combined with 50 pg (5 ⁇ l) conditioned beads. Beads were incubated at room temperature for 1 hour with gentle agitation and then pelleted using a magnetic rack. The supernatant was removed. Subsequently the beads were washed 3 times with 100 ⁇ l of 50 mM Tris-HCl, 1 M NaCl, 0.5 mM EDTA, pH 7.5 and 3 times with 100 ⁇ l of water. For each wash step the beads were pelleted and the supernatant removed.
  • the amount of post-PCR enzyme used in the extension reaction was examined.
  • the standard PCR, extension, and immobilization/cleavage conditions (as outlined in the protocol in Example 8) were used except for the enzyme.
  • the amount of enzyme used resulted in no difference in either manual calls or signal-to-noise ratio values for individual assays ( FIG. 14 ).
  • the amount of goldPLEX buffer used in the extension reaction was examined.
  • the standard PCR, extension, and immobilization/cleavage conditions (as outlined in the protocol in example 8) were used except for adjusting the amount of buffer.
  • the amount of buffer used resulted in no difference in either manual calls or signal-to-noise ratio values for individual assays ( FIG. 15 ).
  • the amount of oligonucleotide used in the extension reaction was examined.
  • the standard PCR, extension, and immobilization/cleavage conditions (as outlined in the protocol section) were used except for adjusting the amount of oligonucleotide.
  • the amount of biotinylated ddNTP used in the extension reaction was examined.
  • the standard PCR, extension, and immobilization/cleavage conditions (as outlined in the protocol in Example 8) were used except for adjusting the amount of biotinylated ddNTP.
  • Binding capacity of magnetic streptavidin beads Comparison of Solulink and Dynabeads MyOne C1 magnetic streptavidin beads to capture biotinylated oligonucleotide followed the capture protocol as described in Example 8.
  • the experiment uses two oligonucleotides which correspond to extension products for the two possible alleles for an assay designed for SNP rs1000586.
  • the oligonucleotides contain a deoxyinosine nucleotide and 3′ biotinylated nucleotide.
  • the oligonucleotides are bound to the magnetic streptavidin in the presence of either water or varying quantities of biotinylated dNTPs, and are cleaved by treatment with endonuclease V.
  • Dynabeads MyOne C1 magnetic streptavidin beads show no reduction in area in the presence of 10 or 100 pmol biotinylated ddNTP. However, a large decrease in signal is seen with the addition of 500 pmol of biotinylated ddNTP.
  • Solulink magnetic beads show no reduction in signal in the presence of up to and including 500 pmol of biotinylated dNTP. This indicates that unincorporated biotinylated ddNTP from an extension reaction would not cause a decrease in final signal if it does not total greater than 500 pmol.
  • the mass tags were cleaved from the extension product by addition of a solution containing 12 U Endonuclease V (NEB) and 10 mM Magnesium Acetate (Sigma) and incubation at 37° C. for 4 hours in a Thermomixer R (Eppendorf) shaking at 1500 rpm. After incubation the magnetic beads were pelleted using a magnetic rack and the supernatant was removed.
  • NEB U Endonuclease V
  • Eppendorf Thermomixer R
  • This experiment was designed to analyze the ability of endonuclease V to cleave an extension product containing a deoxyinosine nucleotide in different locations.
  • Four oligonucleotides were designed to simulate an extension product (contained a 3′ biotin and a deoxyinosine nucleotide), which only differed in the location of the deoxyinosine nucleotide.
  • the deoxyinosine was placed 10, 15, 20 and 25 base pairs from the 3′ nucleotide containing the biotin moiety.
  • the mass tag signal seen after cleavage of the supernatant from the binding step indicates a similar quantity of oligonucleotide was bound onto the magnetic streptavidin beads for all oligonucleotides.
  • a clear pattern is seen after cleaving the oligonucleotides bound to the magnetic streptavidin beads .
  • the linker contains a 10-atom spacer arm which can be cleaved with exposure to UV light in the 300-350 nm spectral range.
  • oligonucleotides containing a methylphosphonate modification were examined.
  • the oligonucleotides contain a modification of the phosphate backbone at a single position, where oxygen is substituted with a methyl group. This results in a neutrally charged backbone which can be cleaved by Sodium hydroxide (NaOH), or potassium hydroxide (KOH) and heat.
  • NaOH sodium hydroxide
  • KOH potassium hydroxide
  • a phosphorothioate modification replaces a bridging oxygen with a sulphur. This enables the backbone to be cleaved with treatment with either 30/50 mM aqueous sliver nitrate solution (with/without dithiothreitol) or 50 mM iodine in aqueous acetone.
  • a phosphoramidite modification replaces a bridging oxygen with a amide group. The resulting P—N bond can be cleaved with treatment with 80% CH 3 COOH or during the MALDI-TOF procedure.
  • a method for purifying biotinylated extension products and releasing the products from streptavidin coated magnetic beads using free biotin is described herein, and illustrated in FIG. 27A-G .
  • the method is utilized to purify and isolate and analyze single base extension reactions for polymorphism identification
  • a genomic region of interest (e.g., a region having genetic variation) can be targeted using PCR based methods (see FIG. 27A ).
  • the reaction products were treated with shrimp alkaline phosphatase (SAP) to dephosphorylate unincorporated nucleotide triphosphates.
  • SAP shrimp alkaline phosphatase
  • the region of interest, including a polymorphism of interest can be targeted by nucleotide probes using single base extension (SBE) reactions that correspond to the nucleotide residue of interest (e.g., polymorphism; see FIG. 27B ).
  • SBE reactions utilize biotin labeled dideoxynucleotide triphosphate terminators.
  • Biotinylated extension products were subsequently captured (see FIG. 27C ), washed and purified away from (see FIG. 27D ) unused reaction components utilizing streptavidin coated magnetic beads and magnetic separation.
  • the purified extension products were subsequently eluted from the streptavidin coated magnetic beads by competition with free biotin under elevated temperature conditions (see FIG. 27E ).
  • the eluant containing the biotinylated extension products from the region of interest are dispensed (see FIG. 27F ) onto a SpectroCHIP® (Sequenom), and analyzed using MALDI-TOF mass spectrometry (see FIG. 27G ). Reaction components and conditions are described herein.
  • Reaction components use in PCR amplification reactions.
  • Binding and wash solutions used isolate and purify biotinylated extension products.
  • biotinylated extension products were eluted from the streptavidin coated magnetic beads using competition with free biotin at elevated temperatures.
  • the reaction conditions are given in the table below.
  • preparation for further analysis includes dispensing or spotting onto a solid support suitable for use in MALDI-TOF mass spectrometry.
  • the solid support is a SpectroCHIP® (Sequenom) solid support.
  • the biotinylated extension products sometimes are analyzed by MALDI-TOF mass spectrometry, which uses differences in mass of the extension products to elucidate the genotype of the sample at the region of interest (e.g., at the site of the polymorphism). A representative spectrum tracing is shown in FIG. 28 .
  • FIG. 28 illustrates the mass differences in single base reaction products analyzed by MALDI-TOF mass spectrometry.
  • Unextended primer is shown on the spectrum tracing at a mass of approximately 5997 Daltons.
  • Two extension reaction products also are shown in FIG. 28 , a ddU reaction product representing about 10% of the input template and having a mass of approximately 6665 Daltons, and a ddA reaction product representing about 90% of the input template and having a mass of approximately 6687 Daltons.
  • the additional dotted lines at mass 6510 and 6579 are the expected mass for alleles of the BRAF — 2_WT and BRAF — 2_R marker single base extension products.
  • a typical multiplex (i.e. iPLEX) was followed up to the extension step (e.g. Example 8).
  • PCR amplification of the region of interest was performed followed by SAP dephosphorylation of the unincorporated nucleotides.
  • the single base extension utilized biotinylated dideoxynucleotides. This extension was performed by either including only the nucleotides corresponding to the minor species or all four nucleotides. Biotinylated oligonucleotides were captured using streptavidin beads from different manufacturers.
  • the inosine cleavage method was compared to using free-biotin to compete off bound biotinylated oligonucleotides. Other components of this reaction were similar to assays previously described (e.g. Example 8). Conditions used for the PCR amplification, SAP dephosphorylation and extension are shown in Table 8 below.
  • reaction was introduced to streptavidin coated magnetic beads.
  • the extended products were allowed to capture for a short duration.
  • Subsequent wash steps were conducted to remove reaction components except the captured extension products (Table 9). This procedure removed salts that produce interfering adducts in MALDI-TOF mass spectrometry, which allowed for the removal of the anion exchange resin procedure now employed with current iPLEX workflow.
  • FIGS. 29A-G depict a flow chart of this procedure.
  • Capture Resupend beads in 2x Binding Buffer as follows: Reagent Vol per Reaction 2x Binding Buffer 25 Add an equal volume the 2x Binding Buffer with Beads to each well of PCR reaction. 25 ul Beads in 2x Binding Buffer 25 ul PCR product 50 ul Rotate plate to mix for 15-30 min at room temp. Place plate on magnetic separator, remove supernatant. Bead Wash Add 1x WASH Buffer as follows: Reagent Vol per Reaction 1x WASH Buffer 50 Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture beads; remove supernatant.
  • inosine cleavage of mass tags from the captured extension products was performed. This method deviated from the biotin competition approach for extension oligonucleotide design. This approach required a non-templated sequence on the 5′ end of the extension primer to correspond to the extension product.
  • this oligonucleotide was synthesized with an inosine residue that separates the complementary sequence of the target and the mass tag sequence identifier. Through this inosine residue, the mass tag was cleaved from the capture agent by endonuclease V activity. The cleavage portion of this process is illustrated in FIGS. 30A and 30B .
  • streptavidin bead products Five streptavidin bead products were selected for evaluation. The selection was based on surface characteristics and binding capacity of free biotin. These characteristics are listed in Table 10.
  • the performance of the beads was evaluated using oligonucleotides synthesized with 3′ biotin. Two oligonucleotides were designed with an identical “sequence specific” region; one had no 5′ modification while the other contained a 5′ mass tag with an inosine residue. To evaluate efficiency of capture and elution strategy, a comparative measure within each spectrum was employed. Additional oligonucleotides were designed so their respective size was within an acceptable mass range of the eluted products for comparison.
  • the testing procedure included capturing the 3′ biotinylated oligonucleotides, performing a set of washes, and subsequent elution (biotin competition vs. inosine cleavage). This strategy alleviates variability that may have been introduced during the PCR and extension steps. Beads and elution strategies were evaluated by response to limiting the capturable oligonucleotide. This evaluation was performed by serially diluting the 3′ biotinylated oligonucleotide from 2 uM to 0.031 uM. For each concentration tested, an equal amount of quantification oligonucleotide was added to the eluent to measure bead capture and elution efficiency.
  • the ratio of capture oligonucleotide to quantification oligonucleotide heights was measured at each concentration for each bead evaluated.
  • This initial experiment showed the biotin competition method to outperform the elution method. Both elution methods exhibited a captured product at the lowest starting input, but the biotin capture clearly showed more captured and eluted product, as displayed by the ratio. This outcome was evident regardless of bead used and the biotin competition was chosen as the elution strategy.
  • the data also showed underperformance of DynalM280 and DynalT1. The data reflecting this experiment can be seen in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32 .
  • the next approach was to analyze capture beads for further development.
  • This experimentation utilized all steps of the proposed ultra-sensitive detection workflow to evaluate bead performance from an extended product off a PCR template.
  • competitor oligonucleotides were used as template material.
  • PCR, SAP, extension and capture were performed as outlined previously.
  • the template complement, Biotin-ddUTP was the sole nucleotide used in the extension reaction.
  • Competitor oligonucleotide template concentration was serial diluted from approx. 60,000 molecules to approx. 30 molecules. Each dilution was replicated six times. For all reactions 1 ul of a 1 uM solution of extension oligonucleotides was used.
  • the beads evaluated were Dynal M270, Dynal C1, and Solulink. To elucidate binding performance of each bead using the same strategy as employed in the previous study, 1 ul of a 1 uM quantification oligonucleotide solution was added to the eluent post biotin capture.
  • Genomic Variants i.e. Genomic Mix Model
  • Sample HTB-26D genomic DNA of a cell line derived from breast adenomcarcinoma
  • BRAF serine/threonine-protein kinase B-Raf
  • Sample HTB-38D (genomic DNA of cell line derived from colorectal adenocarcinoma) also carries a mutation in the BRAF region. This sample has previously shown a mutation in BRAF-15 (Wild type—T; Mutant—A). This sample was characterized as 15% mutant. HTB-26D is wild type for BRAF-15 and HTB-38D is wild type for BRAF-2.
  • Biotin-ddCTP and biotin-ddTTP are only separated by 1 Da in mass. Although this mass difference is within the resolution of the MALDI-TOF instruments, a larger mass difference between products was evaluated. Subsequently, a different vendor was found to offer biotin-ddUTP with a 16 carbon linker (vs. the 11 carbon linker of the original set). Replacement of the 11 carbon linker with the 16 carbon linker in this assay alleviated any potential design issues.
  • the two samples were mixed to further dilute each corresponding somatic mutation.
  • the two samples were mixed at different ratios, titrating the somatic mutation in BRAF-2 for sample 26D from 30% to 1.5% and titrating the BRAF-15 variant from 15% to 0.75% for sample 38D.
  • Each titration point was run in duplicate and recombined after SAP.
  • the mixed analyte was redistributed to two different reactions.
  • One of the reactions was subject to all four biotin-ddNTP's while the other used just biotin-ddUTP (for BRAF-2) and biotin-ddATP (for BRAF-15). Capture and elution were performed with the Dynal-C1 beads and free-biotin competition.
  • FIG. 35 shows the results for these four scenarios.
  • the BRAF-2 mutant showed a slight signal in the reaction run with all 4 biotin-ddNTP's (top left panel, FIG. 35 ). Ordinarily this sort of signal would not be considered significant above baseline noise. With just biotin-ddUTP (for BRAF-2 reaction, bottom left of FIG. 35 ) a very clear and distinct signal was observed for the mutant. This same observation held true for the 0.75% mutant in the BRAF-15 assay for sample 38D. A very clear and distinct signal was observed for the BRAF-15 mutant when just biotin-ddATP (bottom right of FIG. 35 ) was included in the extension composition.
  • the amount of molecules of a target mutant variant (e.g. low abundant variant) present in an assay where the wild type (e.g. high abundance species) extension product is not generated is determined by the use of a synthetic template included in the extension reaction.
  • the initial goal of this evaluation was to assess the ability to reliably detect the minor contribution (i.e. of a low abundance mutant) in a mixture at sensitive levels.
  • the post-PCR enrichment strategy summarized here defines this ability is possible by effectively removing the wild type (e.g. high abundance species) extension product. It is possible to determine the amount (e.g. copy number, concentration, percentage) of target mutant molecules present (i.e. mutant extension products) in an assay (e.g. extension reaction), if the input quantity of template is known.
  • the amount of target (e.g. copy number, concentration, percentage) mutant variant (i.e. mutant extension products) and/or percentage of target mutant variant in the sample is quantified by including a known amount of synthetic template in the extension reaction.
  • the synthetic template can hybridize to an oligonucleotide species and contain a base substitution at the mutant position located just 3′ of the oligonucleotide species to be extended.
  • the base substitution is different than the wild type or target mutant variant (e.g. first variant, low abundant variant, SNP).
  • the base substitution present in the synthetic template is not present in the sample prior to introduction of the synthetic template.
  • a ddNTP that is complementary to the base substitution in the synthetic template is also introduced into the reaction.
  • Oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the target mutant variant are co-amplified (e.g. co-extended) with oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the synthetic template.
  • the amount and/or percentage of the target mutant variant can be ascertained.
  • the amount and/or percentage of the target mutant variant is determined by the amount of synthetic template that yields equal extension product as the target mutant variant.
  • Mutant quantification was carried out on a genomic mix model. With constant mutant percentages of 5, 1, 0.5 and 0.1, synthetic template titrations were applied targeting a theoretical number of molecules given a total input DNA of 20 ng. The result showed an accurate count of mutant molecules for the 5 and 1% samples. The process was not as accurate at lower levels, presumably due to PCR sampling bias with limited template.
  • FIG. 36 shows the titration profile for the 1% mutant.
  • Elimination of the wild type extension product can increase sensitivity of the multiplex assay disclosed herein.
  • assays of the same plex have the same wild type genotype, or have the same mutant genotype.
  • synthetic templates or plasmid constructs with designed “mutations” against a genomic DNA of a healthy population i.e. HAPMAP consortium samples
  • This strategy can alleviate design concerns and can have the distinct advantage of artificially creating different mutant percentages in different assays for the same plex (competitor only).
  • synthetic templates e.g. plasmids or oligonucleotide templates
  • synthetic templates are included in kits.
  • designs are tailored toward the wild type (i.e more abundant) nucleotide. In this way all assays in one plex share the same nucleotide for wild type and the extension mix used leaves out this nucleotide. In some embodiments, designs can be tailored toward the mutant. In some embodiments, all assays in a plex have the same mutant base in common. In certain embodiments, the extension mix only contains the mutant base. In some embodiments, there is a risk of non-specific interaction with the overwhelming background wild type DNA. In some embodiments there should be at least one control plex representing each wild type base removed, or each mutant base left in depending on the design style chosen.
  • a hindrance to a more sensitive detection has been the presence of the wild type peak scaling the intensity to a point where low level mutants are no longer visible above baseline. Removing the wild type peak from detection has improved sensitivity and signal to noise ratio. Assays designed within a single plex have the same wild type peak in common with corresponding wild type base removed from the extension reaction, or designed to have the same mutant peak in common with only that specific base included in the extension reaction (Table 11). In terms of material cost, the strategy of choosing a plex directed toward the mutant allele with only one base used in the extension reaction is used for a model system.
  • Multiplex (i.e. Plex) designs are divided into three classes of assays.
  • the three classes represent each of the other 3 nucleotides as the wild type.
  • Four multiplex assays i.e. plexes
  • This assay design strategy allows the exploration of all possible wild type/mutant combinations.
  • the design incorporates six regions from a Lung Panel. Each designed “mutant” is interrogated in the forward and reverse direction to facilitate the requirement of all possible wild type/mutant combinations.
  • the design avoids overlap from extension oligonucleotide and PCR primer so as to avoid any potential exonuclease derived additional signals.
  • the mutation designed into the model represents actual somatic mutations used in the Lung Panel.
  • the design with multiplex is outlined in Table 12. The four multiplexes are designed so they can also be multiplexed together in one plex using acyclic extension mix.
  • the design incorporates an EcoRI site separating the regions from each other ( FIG. 37 ). Prior to using the model, the plasmid is cleaved through EcoRI restriction digest to separate the regions and more adequately reflect a genomic context.
  • a 5′ biotinylated oligonucleotide with 3′ inverted dTTP is spiked into all assays as a control for capture and elution.
  • the absence of this signal coinciding with an absence of any analyte informs the user of a failed capture and/or elution.
  • the molarity of this particular control should not overwhelm the reaction to avoid masking any low level mutant in detection.
  • Captured and washed products are eluted into 15 ul of high molar biotin solution.
  • New hardware which pellets beads at the appropriate height for 15 ul elution is optimized for the process using Matrix PlateMate 2 ⁇ 2 and/or the Epimotion 5075.
  • a titration experiment is used to evaluate the performance of the new plate. As a test of the process, this evaluation is done in triplicate for each dilution of capture control.
  • the capture control is spiked into an iPLEX simulant solution.
  • the test solution undergoes the typical post-extension process using the hardware.
  • the titration encompasses twelve steps of a serial dilution bringing input capture oligonucleotide from 2500 molecules to approximately 1 molecule.
  • the method with new hardware is optimized for the ability to maintain a pellet during the washes without loss of beads.
  • the performance is judged by the sensitivity as demonstrated by detection of capture oligonucleotide.
  • the four multiplexes are initially run with the typical iPLEX process using an acyclic extension mix on plasmid alone. This is performed as a quality measure of plasmid manufacturing. Restriction digest is also optimized and visualized in an agarose gel to ensure complete digestion into constituent fragments.
  • This concentration is used as input for one replicate and doubling concentrations for the other three replicates.
  • Performance of the capture control is evaluated by how mutant assay detection is effected by the presence of a capture control peak.
  • the peak should not obscure low level mutant by being too prevalent in the spectra. However, the capture control peak must be clearly detected at low level mutant concentrations.
  • the findings of this experiment are the basis for capture control concentration in subsequent sensitivity, specificity and concordance assays.
  • the 3′ inverted dT is not necessary for these reactions, as the oligonucleotide is not involved in the extension reaction. However, the control is designed this way as to allow incorporation of the control in the extension reaction itself.
  • Sensitivity thresholds are determined when no mutant analyte is detectable or to a point were a single copy of the variant is used for the minority template.
  • Various dilutions of the mixture are used.
  • the number of template mutant molecules is 15000, 3750, 938, 235, 59, 15, 4 and 0.
  • the respective number of wild type copies is 15000, 26250, 29062, 29765, 29941, 29985, 29996 and 30000. Combined, these eight mixtures represent a 50%, 12.5%, 3.13%, 0.78%, 0.2%, 0.05%, 0.01% and 0% mutant concentration, respectively.
  • Total template is 90 ng/rz ⁇ n, or 30,000 genomic copies. Every dilution of each plex is run with 48 replicates. An extra two plates running 48 non-templated reactions for each multiplex is run as a control to assess the extent of non-specific interactions. Additionally, a “golden standard” plate of 48 samples run in duplicate using the 50% mutant and 12.5% mutant establishes proper ratios are being employed. In total, the sensitivity and specificity trial requires nineteen 96 well plates. PCR and SAP is implemented according to current iPLEX protocol. Post-SAP reactions are subject to an extension reaction containing biotin-ddNTP's as the alternative terminating nucleotide substrate (except the “golden standard plate”). All other reaction components will remain the same. Table 13 shows the model system dilution setup in terms of molecules number and weight of each constituent DNA. Table 14 and Table 15 lists the entire process from PCR to extension in concentrations for each component on a per reaction basis.
  • Initial analysis considers at what point no signal is observed to establish a statistically significant sensitivity threshold. This analysis considers the overall data encompassing all multiplexes, and also takes into account variability that may occur when extending a specific base as well as what impact, if any, the wild type background genotype has on successful extension. This analysis evaluates how the sensitivity has effect on specificity.
  • Horizon Diagnostics provides genetically defined gDNA and FFPE cell reference standards. Evaluation considers no more than 23 samples that are FFPE prepared. Eight to fifteen mutations are selected from a list prepared by Horizon. To explore the power of the detection system, mutants selected are purchased with the corresponding wild type version, or mixed with in house healthy population samples. The samples provided by Horizon are in 50% mutant state and a dilution is required to evaluate sensitive detection in this context. The dilution series is the same as utilized in the sensitivity and specificity evaluation. In addition, a non-templated control is run to bring total sample number to 24. All samples are run in quadruplicate for a total of eight 96 well plate. This experimental design will include an iPLEX “golden standard” using the Horizon Diagnostic samples without dilution. This evaluation not only further assesses concordance to traditional iPLEX, but also gives information on performance of actual FFPE samples.
  • Pre-enrichment processing All reactions are carried out according to iPLEX SOP up to the extension step. These processes are detailed in Table 14 and Table 15. All reagents used are controlled so that the same lot of reagents is used across the studies.
  • Sample DNA DNA derived from three sources is used for all studies. The first is plasmid DNA containing the model system. Secondly is HapMap samples from Utah residents of European ancestry. Lastly is DNA provided by Horizon Diagnostics.
  • Pre and Post-PCR instrumentation include either the PlateMate 2 ⁇ 2 and/or the Hamilton Micro Lab 4000. Nanodispensing is performed on the Sequenom Nanodispenser RS1000 with analyte detection using the MassARRAY Analyzer 4. All instrumentation serial numbers are cataloged.
  • Control variables have potential impact on several parameters.
  • the ability of the process to deliver a reliable and desirable result is evaluated. Any bearing on response variable that can be reliably ascertained by control variables is accounted for.
  • Capture Resupend beads in 2x Binding Buffer as follows: Reagent Vol per Reaction 2x Binding Buffer 25 Add an equal volume the 2x Binding Buffer with Beads to each well of PCR reaction: 25 ul Beads in 2x Binding Buffer 25 ul PCR product 50 ul Rotate plate to mix for 15-30 min at room temp. Place plate on magnetic separator, remove supernatant. Bead Wash Add 1x WASH Buffer as follows: Reagent Vol per Reaction 1x WASH Buffer 50 Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture beads; remove supernatant.
  • Beads are conditioned in 2 ⁇ binding buffer and a final volume of 25 ul conditioned beads are added to the 9 ul extension reaction. Water is added to bring the total volume to 50 ul. Bead capture is executed in a 96 well plate to accommodate the volume. Capture of extension products is performed on the hematology rotator at room temperature for 30 minutes. After capture, the beads are washed of reaction components in a 1 ⁇ Tris buffer solution. This wash is repeated for a total of two washes. The beads are then washed with water. The water wash is also repeated for a total of two more washes. Each wash step utilizes 100 ul total volume. A 96 well plate magnet is used to pellet beads. The wash steps can be done manually or through the use of automation.
  • Washed beads are re-suspended in 15 ul of concentrated free biotin solution (25 ng/ul; resin treated). Free biotin is allowed to out compete the biotinylated extension products at 90° C. for 5 min. Of the 15 ul re-suspension, 10 ul is aspirated while beads are pelleted under magnet. This 10 ul clean eluent is dispensed into a 384 well plate for dispensing. Bead conditioning and washing parameters are shown in Table 16.
  • Dispensing parameters require some alterations to typical dispensing protocols given volume height and analyte characteristics. Aspiration offset is set to 8 mm and dispense speed is changed to approximately 150 mm/sec or other higher dispense speed to account for viscosity difference in this analyte from typical iPLEX biochemistry.
  • a method for determining the presence or absence of a plurality of target nucleic acids in a composition which comprises:
  • a method for determining the presence or absence of a plurality of target nucleic acids in a composition which comprises:
  • nucleotide that comprises the capture agent is a capture agent conjugated to a nucleotide triphosphate.
  • nucleotide triphosphate is a dideoxynucleotide triphosphate.
  • A6 The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A5, wherein the capture agent comprises a member of a binding pair.
  • A7 The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A6, wherein the capture agent comprises biotin.
  • A20 The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A19, wherein the hybridization sequence is about 5 to about 200 nucleotides in length.
  • A23 The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A22, wherein the mass spectrometry is matrix-assisted laser desorption ionization (MALDI) mass spectrometry.
  • MALDI matrix-assisted laser desorption ionization
  • A24 The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A23, wherein the mass spectrometry is electrospray (ES) mass spectrometry.
  • ES electrospray
  • A25 The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A24, wherein the presence or absence of about 1 to about 50 or more target nucleic acids is detected.
  • A27 The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A26, wherein the mass distinguishable tag is a nucleotide compomer.
  • nucleotide compomer is about 5 nucleotides to about 150 nucleotides in length.
  • A29 The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A28, wherein the target nucleic acids are genomic DNA.
  • A30 The method of embodiment A29, wherein the genomic DNA is human genomic DNA.
  • a method for detecting the presence, absence or amount of a plurality of genetic variants in a composition comprising:
  • each oligonucleotide species comprises a mass distinguishable tag located 5′ of the hybridization sequence
  • extension composition comprises a non-terminating nucleotide.
  • extension composition comprises one or more extension nucleotides, which extension nucleotides comprise no capture agent.
  • B25 The embodiment of B24 wherein the washing removes salts that produce interfering adducts in mass spectrometry analysis.
  • B26 The embodiment of B25 wherein extended oligonucleotides are not contacted with an ion exchange resin.
  • B32 The embodiment of B31, wherein the free biotin or biotin analogue is added at a concentration of about 25 ug/ml.
  • composition comprises a synthetic template and the amount and/or percentage of a first variant in the composition is determined wherein the synthetic template comprises a variant different than in the first variant and second variant and hybridizes to the same oligonucleotides species.
  • a or “an” can refer to one of or a plurality of the elements it modifies (e.g., “a reagent” can mean one or more reagents) unless it is contextually clear either one of the elements or more than one of the elements is described.
  • the term “about” as used herein refers to a value within 10% of the underlying parameter (i.e., plus or minus 10%), and use of the term “about” at the beginning of a string of values modifies each of the values (i.e., “about 1, 2 and 3” is about 1, about 2 and about 3). For example, a weight of “about 100 grams” can include weights between 90 grams and 110 grams.

Abstract

Provided herein are products and processes for detecting the presence or absence of multiple target nucleic acids. Certain methods include amplifying the target nucleic acids, or portion thereof; extending oligonucleotides that specifically hybridize to the amplicons, where the extended oligonucleotides include a capture agent; capturing the extended oligonucleotides to a solid phase via the capture agent; releasing the extended oligonucleotide by competition with a competitor; detecting the extended oligonucleotide, and thereby determining the presence or absence of each target nucleic acid by the presence or absence of the extended oligonucleotide.

Description

    RELATED PATENT APPLICATIONS
  • This patent application is a continuation application of international patent application no. PCT/US2012/038710 filed on May 18, 2012, entitled PRODUCTS AND PROCESSES FOR MULTIPLEX NUCLEIC ACID IDENTIFICATION, naming Christiane Honisch, Dirk Johannes Van Den Boom, Michael Mosko, and Anders Nygren as inventors and designated by Attorney Docket No. SEQ-6020-PC2, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 61/488,082 filed on May 19, 2011, entitled PRODUCTS AND PROCESSES FOR MULTIPLEX NUCLEIC ACID IDENTIFICATION, naming Christiane Honisch, Dirk Johannes Van Den Boom, and Michael Mosko as inventors, and designated by Attorney Docket No. SEQ-6020-PV2, and this patent application is related to U.S. patent application Ser. No. 13/126,684 filed on Oct. 27, 2009, entitled PRODUCTS AND PROCESSES FOR MULTIPLEX NUCLEIC ACID IDENTIFICATION, naming Dirk Johannes Van Den Boom, Christiane Honisch, Andrew Timms and Smita Chitnis as inventors, and designated by Attorney Docket No. SEQ-6020-US, which is a national phase application of international patent application number PCT/US2009/062239, filed on Oct. 27, 2009, entitled PRODUCTS AND PROCESSES FOR MULTIPLEX NUCLEIC ACID IDENTIFICATION, naming Dirk Johannes Van Den Boom, Christiane Honisch, Andrew Timms and Smita Chitnis as applicants and inventors, and designated by Attorney Docket No. SEQ-6020-PC, which claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application No. 61/109,885 filed on Oct. 30, 2008, entitled PRODUCTS AND PROCESSES FOR MULTIPLEX NUCLEIC ACID IDENTIFICATION, naming Dirk Johannes Van Den Boom, Christiane Honisch, Andrew Timms and Smita Chitnis as inventors, and designated by Attorney Docket No. SEQ-6020-PV. The entire content of the foregoing patent applications hereby is incorporated by reference, including all text, tables and drawings.
  • SEQUENCE LISTING
  • The instant application contains a Sequence Listing which has been submitted in ASCII format via EFS-Web and is hereby incorporated by reference in its entirety. Said ASCII copy, created on Jul. 16, 2012, is named SEQ62CT2.txt and is 88,792 bytes in size.
  • FIELD
  • The technology relates in part to nucleic acid identification procedures in which multiple target nucleic acids can be detected in one procedure. The technology also in part relates to identification of nucleic acid modifications.
  • BACKGROUND
  • The detection of specific nucleic acids is an important tool for diagnostic medicine and molecular biology research. Nucleic acid assays currently play roles in identifying infectious organisms such as bacteria and viruses, in probing the expression of normal genes and identifying mutant genes such as oncogenes, in typing tissue for compatibility preceding tissue transplantation, in matching tissue or blood samples for forensic medicine, and for exploring homology among genes from different species, for example.
  • SUMMARY
  • Provided in some embodiments is a method for determining the presence or absence of a plurality of target nucleic acids in a composition, which includes: (a) preparing amplicons of the target nucleic acids by amplifying the target nucleic acids, or portions thereof, under amplification conditions; (b) contacting the amplicons in solution with a set of oligonucleotides under hybridization conditions, where each oligonucleotide in the set includes a hybridization sequence capable of specifically hybridizing to one amplicon under the hybridization conditions when the amplicon is present in the solution; (c) generating extended oligonucleotides that include a capture agent by extending oligonucleotides hybridized to the amplicons by one or more nucleotides, wherein one of the one of more nucleotides is a terminating nucleotide and one or more of the nucleotides added to the oligonucleotides includes the capture agent; (d) contacting the extended oligonucleotides with a solid phase under conditions in which the capture agent interacts with the solid phase; (e) releasing the extended oligonucleotides that have interacted with the solid phase by competition with a competitor; and (f) detecting the extended oligonucleotides released in (e); whereby the presence or absence of each target nucleic acid is determined by the presence or absence of the corresponding extended oligonucleotide. In certain embodiments, (i) the mass of one oligonucleotide species detectably differs from the masses of the other oligonucleotide species in the set; and (ii) each oligonucleotide species specifically corresponds to a specific amplicon and thereby specifically corresponds to a specific target nucleic acid. In some embodiments, (i) each oligonucleotide in the set includes a mass distinguishable tag located 5′ of the hybridization sequence, (ii) the mass of the mass distinguishable tag of one oligonucleotide detectably differs from the masses of mass distinguishable tags of the other oligonucleotides in the set; and (iii) each mass distinguishable tag specifically corresponds to a specific amplicon and thereby specifically corresponds to a specific target nucleic acid, the mass of the mass distinguishable tag is detected by mass spectrometry, and the presence or absence of each target nucleic acid is determined by the presence or absence of the corresponding mass distinguishable tag. In some embodiments, detecting the mass distinguishable tag detects the extended oligonucleotide. In certain embodiments, the extended oligonucleotides released in (e), or the mass distinguishable tags associated or cleaved from the released extended oligonucleotides, are detected by mass spectrometry.
  • Provided also in certain embodiments is a method for determining the presence or absence of a plurality of target nucleic acids in a composition, which includes: (a) preparing amplicons of the target nucleic acids by amplifying the target nucleic acids, or portions thereof, under amplification conditions; (b) contacting the amplicons in solution with a set of oligonucleotides under hybridization conditions, where: (i) each oligonucleotide in the set includes a hybridization sequence capable of specifically hybridizing to one amplicon under the hybridization conditions when the amplicon is present in the solution, (ii) each oligonucleotide in the set includes a mass distinguishable tag located 5′ of the hybridization sequence, (iii) the mass of the mass distinguishable tag of one oligonucleotide detectably differs from the masses of mass distinguishable tags of the other oligonucleotides in the set; and (iv) each mass distinguishable tag specifically corresponds to a specific amplicon and thereby specifically corresponds to a specific target nucleic acid; (c) generating extended oligonucleotides that include a capture agent by extending oligonucleotides hybridized to the amplicons by one or more nucleotides, wherein one of the one of more nucleotides is a terminating nucleotide and one or more of the nucleotides added to the oligonucleotides includes the capture agent; (d) contacting the extended oligonucleotides with a solid phase under conditions in which the capture agent interacts with the solid phase; (e) releasing the extended oligonucleotides that have interacted with the solid phase by competition with a competitor; and (f) detecting the mass distinguishable tags released in (e); whereby the presence or absence of each target nucleic acid is determined by the presence or absence of the corresponding mass distinguishable tag. In certain embodiments, the extended oligonucleotides released in (e), or the mass distinguishable tags associated or cleaved from the released extended oligonucleotides, are detected by mass spectrometry.
  • In some embodiments, the mass distinguishable tag is not cleaved and released from the extended oligonucleotide, and in certain embodiments, the mass distinguishable tag is cleaved and released from the extended oligonucleotide. In some embodiments, the mass distinguishable tag is the extended oligonucleotide. In certain embodiments, the extension in (c) is performed once yielding one extended oligonucleotide. In some embodiments, the extension in (c) is performed multiple times (e.g., under amplification conditions) yielding multiple copies of the extended oligonucleotide. In certain embodiments, a solution containing amplicons (e.g., amplicons produced in (a)) is treated with an agent that removes terminal phosphates from any nucleotides not incorporated into the amplicons. The terminal phosphate sometimes is removed by contacting the amplicons with a phosphatase, and in certain embodiments the phosphatase is alkaline phosphatase (e.g., shrimp alkaline phosphatase).
  • Also provided in some embodiments is a method for determining the presence or absence of a plurality of target nucleic acids in a composition, which comprises (a) contacting target nucleic acids in solution with a set of oligonucleotides under hybridization conditions, where (i) each oligonucleotide in the set comprises a hybridization sequence capable of specifically hybridizing to one target nucleic acid species under the hybridization conditions when the target nucleic acid species is present in the solution; (b) generating extended oligonucleotides that comprise a capture agent by extending oligonucleotides hybridized to the amplicons by one or more nucleotides under amplification conditions, wherein one of the one of more nucleotides is a terminating nucleotide and one or more of the nucleotides added to the oligonucleotides comprises the capture agent; (c) contacting the extended oligonucleotides with a solid phase under conditions in which the capture agent interacts with the solid phase; (d) releasing the extended oligonucleotides that have interacted with the solid phase by competition with a competitor; and (e) detecting the extended oligonucleotides released in (d); whereby the presence or absence of each target nucleic acid is determined by the presence or absence of the corresponding extended oligonucleotide. In certain embodiments, (i) the mass of one oligonucleotide species detectably differs from the masses of the other oligonucleotide species in the set; and (ii) each oligonucleotide species specifically corresponds to a specific amplicon and thereby specifically corresponds to a specific target nucleic acid. In some embodiments, (i) each oligonucleotide in the set includes a mass distinguishable tag located 5′ of the hybridization sequence, (ii) the mass of the mass distinguishable tag of one oligonucleotide detectably differs from the masses of mass distinguishable tags of the other oligonucleotides in the set; and (iii) each mass distinguishable tag specifically corresponds to a specific amplicon and thereby specifically corresponds to a specific target nucleic acid, the mass of the mass distinguishable tag is detected by mass spectrometry, and the presence or absence of each target nucleic acid is determined by the presence or absence of the corresponding mass distinguishable tag. In some embodiments, detecting the mass distinguishable tag detects the extended oligonucleotide. In some embodiments, detecting the mass distinguishable tag detects the extended oligonucleotide. In certain embodiments, the extended oligonucleotides released in (d), or the mass distinguishable tags associated or cleaved from the released extended oligonucleotides, are detected by mass spectrometry.
  • Any suitable amplification procedure can be utilized in multiplex detection assays described herein, and sometimes the following procedure is utilized in some embodiments, which comprises: (a) contacting the target nucleic acids with a set of first polynucleotides, where each first polynucleotide comprises (1) a first complementary sequence that hybridizes to the target nucleic acid and (2) a first tag located 5′ of the complementary sequence; (b) preparing extended first polynucleotides by extending the first polynucleotide; (c) joining a second polynucleotide to the 3′ end of the extended first polynucleotides, where the second polynucleotide comprises a second tag; (d) contacting the product of (c) with a primer and extending the primer, where the primer hybridizes to the first tag or second tag; and (e) amplifying the product of (c) with a set of primers under amplification conditions, where one primer in the set hybridizes to one of the tags and another primer in the set hybridizes to the complement of the other tag. In certain embodiments linear amplification is performed with one set of primers. In some embodiments, the second polynucleotide comprises a nucleotide sequence that hybridizes to the target nucleic acid. The nucleotide sequence of the first tag and the nucleotide sequence of the second tag are different in some embodiments, and are identical, or are complementary to one another, in other embodiments. In certain embodiments, the first tag and the second tag are included in each of the amplification products produced in (e). Such an amplification process can further comprise (f) contacting the amplicons in solution with a set of oligonucleotides under hybridization conditions, where each oligonucleotide in the set comprises a hybridization sequence capable of specifically hybridizing to one amplicon under the hybridization conditions when the amplicon is present in the solution; (g) generating extended oligonucleotides that comprise a capture agent by extending oligonucleotides hybridized to the amplicons by one or more nucleotides, where one of the one of more nucleotides is a terminating nucleotide and one or more of the nucleotides added to the oligonucleotides comprises the capture agent; (h) contacting the extended oligonucleotides with a solid phase under conditions in which the capture agent interacts with the solid phase; (i) releasing the extended oligonucleotides that have interacted with the solid phase by competition with a competitor; and (j) detecting the released extended oligonucleotides in (i); whereby the presence or absence of each target nucleic acid is determined by the presence or absence of the extended oligonucleotide. In certain embodiments, the extension in (g) is performed once yielding one extended oligonucleotide. In some embodiments, the extension in (g) is performed multiple times (e.g., under amplification conditions) yielding multiple copies of the extended oligonucleotide. In certain embodiments, (i) the mass of one oligonucleotide species detectably differs from the masses of the other oligonucleotide species in the set; and (ii) each oligonucleotide species specifically corresponds to a specific amplicon and thereby specifically corresponds to a specific target nucleic acid. In some embodiments, (i) each oligonucleotide in the set includes a mass distinguishable tag located 5′ of the hybridization sequence, (ii) the mass of the mass distinguishable tag of one oligonucleotide detectably differs from the masses of mass distinguishable tags of the other oligonucleotides in the set; and (iii) each mass distinguishable tag specifically corresponds to a specific amplicon and thereby specifically corresponds to a specific target nucleic acid, the mass of the mass distinguishable tag is detected by mass spectrometry, and the presence or absence of each target nucleic acid is determined by the presence or absence of the corresponding mass distinguishable tag. In some embodiments, detecting the mass distinguishable tag detects the extended oligonucleotide. In some embodiments, detecting the mass distinguishable tag detects the extended oligonucleotide.
  • In some embodiments, competition with a competitor includes contacting the solid phase with a competitor. In certain embodiments, the nucleotide that includes the capture agent is a capture agent conjugated to a nucleotide triphosphate. In some embodiments, the nucleotide triphosphate is a dideoxynucleotide triphosphate.
  • In certain embodiments, the capture agent includes a member of a binding pair. In some embodiments, the capture agent includes biotin or a biotin analogue, and on certain embodiments, the solid phase includes avidin or streptavidin. In some embodiments, the capture agent includes avidin or streptavidin, and in certain embodiments, the solid phase includes biotin. In some embodiments, releasing the mass distinguishable tags by competition with a competitor is carried out under elevated temperature conditions. In certain embodiments, the elevated temperature conditions include treatment for between about 1 minute to about 10 minutes (e.g., about 1 minute, about 2 minutes about 3 minutes, about 4 minutes, about 5 minutes, about 6 minutes, about 7 minutes, about 8 minutes, about 9 minutes or about 10 minutes) at a temperature of between about 80 degrees Celsius to about 100 degrees Celsius (e.g., about 80 degrees Celsius (° C.), about 81° C., about 82° C., about 83° C., about 84° C., about 85° C., about 86° C., about 87° C., about 88° C., about 89° C., about 90° C., about 91° C., about 92° C., about 93° C., about 94° C., about 95° C., about 96° C., about 97° C., about 98° C., about 99° C., or 100° C.). In some embodiments, the elevated temperature conditions comprise treatment for about 5 minutes at about 90 degrees Celsius. In certain embodiments, (c) (e.g., generating extended oligonucleotides that include a capture agent by extending oligonucleotides hybridized to the amplicons by one or more nucleotides, wherein one of the one of more nucleotides is a terminating nucleotide and one or more of the nucleotides added to the oligonucleotides includes the capture agent) is carried out in one container and the method further comprises transferring the released mass distinguishable tags to another container between (e) and (f).
  • In some embodiments, the solution containing amplicons produced in (a) is treated with an agent that removes terminal phosphates from any nucleotides not incorporated into the amplicons. In certain embodiments, the terminal phosphate is removed by contacting the solution with a phosphatase. In some embodiments, the phosphatase is alkaline phosphatase, and in certain embodiments, the alkaline phosphatase is shrimp alkaline phosphatase.
  • In some embodiments, the terminal nucleotides in the extended oligonucleotides comprise the capture agent. In certain embodiments, one or more non-terminal nucleotides in the extended oligonucleotides comprise the capture agent. In some embodiments, the hybridization sequence is about 5 to about 200 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, the hybridization sequence in each oligonucleotide is about 5 to about 50 nucleotides in length. In certain embodiments, terminal nucleotides in the extended oligonucleotides comprise the capture agent, and sometimes one or more non-terminal nucleotides in the extended oligonucleotides comprise the capture agent. In some embodiments, the capture agent comprises biotin, or alternatively avidin or streptavidin, in which case the solid phase comprises avidin or streptavidin, or biotin, respectively.
  • The distinguishable tag is distinguished in part by mass in certain embodiments (i.e., a mass distinguishable tag where a distinguishing feature is mass). The distinguishable tag in some embodiments consists of nucleotides, and sometimes the tag is about 5 nucleotides to about 50 nucleotides in length. The distinguishable tag in certain embodiments is a nucleotide compomer, which sometimes is about 5 nucleotides to about 35 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, the distinguishable tag is a peptide, which sometimes is about 5 amino acids to about 100 amino acids in length. The distinguishable tag in certain embodiments is a concatemer of organic molecule units. In some embodiments, the tag is a trityl molecule concatemer.
  • In certain embodiments, the solid phase is selected from a flat surface, a silicon chip, a bead, sphere or combination of the foregoing. A solid phase sometimes is paramagnetic. In some embodiments, the solid phase is a paramagnetic bead, and in certain embodiments, the solid phase includes a capture agent.
  • In certain embodiments, the presence or absence of about 50 or more target nucleic acid species is detected by a method described herein. In some embodiments, about 100 or more, 150 or more, 200 or more, 250 or more, 300 or more, 325 or more, 350 or more, 375 or more, 400, or more, 425 or more, 450 or more, 475 or more or 500 or more target nucleic acids is detected. In some embodiments, the presence, absence or amount of about 2 to 500 target nucleic acid species is detected by a method described herein (e.g., about 5, 10, 25, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 target nucleic acid species). The target nucleic acids in certain embodiments are genomic DNA (e.g., human, microbial, viral, fungal or plant genomic DNA; any eukaryotic or prokaryotic nucleic acid (RNA and DNA)). In some embodiments, the oligonucleotides are RNA or DNA.
  • In some embodiments, the mass spectrometry is matrix-assisted laser desorption ionization (MALDI) mass spectrometry. In certain embodiments, the mass spectrometry is electrospray (ES) mass spectrometry. In some embodiments, the presence or absence of about 1 to about 50 or more target nucleic acids is detected. In certain embodiments, the mass distinguishable tag consists of nucleotides. In some embodiments, the mass distinguishable tag is a nucleotide compomer. In certain embodiments, the nucleotide compomer is about 5 nucleotides to about 150 nucleotides in length. In some embodiments, the target nucleic acids are genomic DNA, and in certain embodiments, the genomic DNA is human genomic DNA.
  • In some embodiments, detecting comprises an increased signal to noise ratio when releasing comprises competition with a competitor as compared to releasing that does not comprise competition with a competitor. In some embodiments, the detecting is with a signal to noise ratio greater than a signal to noise ratio for detecting after releasing without competition with a competitor. In some embodiments, a signal to noise ratio for extending only a mutant is greater than a signal to noise ratio for extending a wild type and a mutant allele. In some embodiments, the sensitivity of detecting a mutant allele is greater for extending only a mutant allele than for extending a wild type allele and a mutant allele. In some embodiments, the detecting comprises a signal to noise ratio greater than the signal to noise ratio for a method in which releasing does not comprise competition with a competitor.
  • In some embodiments provided is a method for detecting the presence, absence or amount of a plurality of genetic variants in a composition, comprising: (a) preparing a plurality of amplicons derived from a plurality of target nucleic acid species, or portions thereof, where each target nucleic acid species comprises a first variant and a second variant; (b) hybridizing the amplicons to oligonucleotide species, where each oligonucleotide species hybridizes to an amplicon derived from a target nucleic acid species, thereby generating hybridized oligonucleotide species; and (c) contacting the hybridized oligonucleotide species with an extension composition comprising one or more terminating nucleotides under extension conditions; where (i) at least one of the one or more terminating nucleotides comprises a capture agent, and (ii) the hybridized oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the first variant are extended by a terminating nucleotide and the hybridized oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the second variant are not extended by a terminating nucleotide, thereby generating extended oligonucleotide species; (d) capturing the extended oligonucleotide species to a solid phase that captures the capture agent; (e) releasing the extended oligonucleotide species bound to the solid phase in (d) from the solid phase; and (f) detecting the mass of each extended oligonucleotide species released from the solid phase in (e) by mass spectrometry; whereby the presence, absence or amount of the genetic variants is detected. In some embodiments, the extended oligonucleotide species of the second variant is not detected. In some embodiments, each oligonucleotide species comprises a mass distinguishable tag located 5′ of the hybridization sequence. In some embodiments a method comprises a first variant and a second variant where the first variant is a lower abundance variation and the second variant is a higher abundance variation. In some embodiments the genetic variants are single nucleotide polymorphism (SNP) variants, the first variant is a lower abundance allele and the second variant is a higher abundance allele. In some embodiments the one or more terminating nucleotides consist of one terminating nucleotide. In some embodiments the one or more terminating nucleotides consist of two terminating nucleotides. In some embodiments the one or more terminating nucleotides consist of three terminating nucleotides. In some embodiments the one or more terminating nucleotides independently are selected from ddATP, ddGTP, ddCTP, ddTTP and ddUTP. In some embodiments the extension composition comprises a non-terminating nucleotide. In some embodiments the extension composition comprises one or more extension nucleotides, which extension nucleotides comprise no capture agent. In some embodiments releasing the extended oligonucleotide species comprises contacting the solid phase with a releasing agent. In some embodiments the capture agent comprises biotin or a biotin analogue, the solid phase comprises streptavidin and the releasing agent comprises free biotin or a biotin analogue. In some embodiments, free biotin or a biotin analogue is the releasing agent. In some embodiments, free biotin or a biotin analogue is added at a concentration of about 10 to about 100 ug/ml. In some embodiments, free biotin or a biotin analogue is added at a concentration of about 25 ug/ml. In some embodiments the releasing agent has a higher affinity for the solid phase than the capture agent. In some embodiments releasing the extended oligonucleotide species comprises heating from about 30° C. to about 100° C. In some embodiments releasing the extended oligonucleotide species comprises heating from about 60° C. to about 100° C. In some embodiments releasing the extended oligonucleotide species comprises heating from 89° C. to about 100° C. In some embodiments releasing the extended oligonucleotide species comprises heating to about 90° C. In some embodiments, the solid phase is washed after an extended oligonucleotide is captured. In some embodiments, the washing removes salts that produce interfering adducts in mass spectrometry analysis. In some embodiments, an extended oligonucleotide is not contacted with a resin (e.g. an ion exchange resin).
  • In some embodiments a plurality of target nucleic acid species is 20 or more target nucleic acid species. In some embodiments a plurality of target nucleic acid species is 200 or more target nucleic acid species. In some embodiments a plurality of target nucleic acid species is 200 to 300 target nucleic acid species.
  • In some embodiments the extension conditions comprise cycling 20 to 300 times. In some embodiments the extension conditions comprise cycling 200 to 300 times.
  • In some embodiments, a composition comprising a plurality of genetic variants comprises a synthetic template. In some embodiments, a composition comprising a plurality of genetic variants comprises a synthetic template and the amount and/or percentage of a first variant in the composition is determined wherein the synthetic template comprises a variant different than in the first variant and second variant and hybridizes to the same oligonucleotides species. In some embodiments, a plurality of amplicons comprise a synthetic template and the amount and/or percentage of a first variant in a composition is determined wherein the synthetic template comprises a variant different than in the first variant and second variant and hybridizes to the same oligonucleotides species.
  • Certain embodiments are described further in the following description, claims and drawings.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • The drawings illustrate certain non-limiting embodiments of the technology and not necessarily drawn to scale.
  • FIG. 1 shows amplification of a gene of interest using extension of a gene specific primer with a universal PCR tag and a subsequent single strand ligation to a second universal tag followed by exonuclease clean-up and amplification utilizing tag 1 and 2 (Approach 1).
  • FIG. 2 shows amplification of a gene of interest using a gene specific biotinylated primer with a universal tag 3 that is extended on a template then ligated downstream to a gene specific phosphorylated oligonucleotide tag 4 on the same strand. This product is subsequently amplified utilizing tag 3 and 4 (Concept2).
  • FIG. 3 shows the universal PCR products from both Approach 1 and 2 procedures from FIGS. 1 and 2, which can be identified using a post-PCR reaction (iPLEX Gold, Sequenom).
  • FIG. 4 shows MALDI-TOF MS spectra for genotyping of a single nucleotide polymorphism (dbSNP# rs10063237) using a Approach 1 protocol.
  • FIG. 5A shows MALDI-TOF MS spectra for genotyping of rs1015731 using a Approach 2 protocol.
  • FIG. 5B shows MALDI-TOF MS spectra for genotyping 12 targets (e.g., a 12 plex reaction) using a Approach 2 protocol.
  • FIG. 5C shows MALDI-TOF MS spectra for genotyping a 19 plex reaction using a Approach 2 protocol.
  • FIG. 5D shows MALDI-TOF MS spectra for genotyping a 35 plex reaction using a Approach 2 protocol.
  • FIG. 5E shows the genotypes acquired from MALDI-TOF MS spectra from FIG. 5C (19 plex) and FIG. 5D (35 plex).
  • FIG. 6 shows PCR amplification and post-PCR primer extension with allele-specific extension primers containing allele-specific mass tags.
  • FIG. 7 shows MALDI-TOF MS spectra for 35 plex genotyping using post-PCR primer extension with allele-specific extension primers containing allele-specific mass tags as a readout.
  • FIG. 8 shows MALDI-TOF MS spectra for genotyping of rs1000586 and rs10131894.
  • FIG. 9 shows oligonucleotides mass tags corresponding to a 70 plex assay. All oligonucleotides were diluted to a final total concentration of 10 μmol and spotted on a 384 well chip. Values for area, peak height and signal-to-noise ratio were collected from Typer 3.4 (Sequenom).
  • FIG. 10 shows peak areas for oligonucleotides mass tags corresponding to 70 plex assay sorted by nucleotide composition. All oligonucleotides were diluted to a final total concentration of 10 μmol and spotted on a 384 well chip. Area values were collected from Typer 3.4 (Sequenom).
  • FIG. 11A shows a MALDI-TOF MS spectrum (zoomed views) of oligonucleotide tags corresponding to a 100 plex assay. FIG. 11B shows signal to noise ratios of oligonucleotide tags corresponding to a 100 plex assay. All oligonucleotides were diluted to a final total concentration of 10, 5, 2.5 or 1 μmol, with 8 replicates spotted on a 384 well chip. Values for signal-to-noise ratio were collected from Typer 3.4 (Sequenom). FIG. 11C shows a MALDI-TOF MS spectrum (zoomed views) of a 100 plex assay after PCR amplification and post-PCR primer extension with allele-specific extension primers containing allele-specific mass tags.
  • FIG. 12 shows extension rates for a 5 plex reaction. Comparing extension oligonucleotides with or without a deoxyinosine, and either standard ddNTPs or nucleotides containing a biotin moiety. Extension rates were calculated by dividing the area of extended product by the total area of the peak (extended product and unextended oligonucleotide) in Typer 3.4 (Sequenom). All experiments compare six DNAs.
  • FIG. 13 shows extension rates for 7 plex and 5 plex reactions over two DNAs. Results compare extension by a single biotinylated ddNTP or a biotinylated dNTP and terminated by an unmodified ddNTP, and final amounts of biotinylated dNTP or ddNTP of 210 or 420 μmol added to the reaction. Extension rates were calculated by dividing the area of extended product by the total area (extended product and unextended oligonucleotide) in Typer 3.4. All experiments include two replicates of two Centre de'Etude du Polymorphisme Humain (CEPH) DNAs, NA07019 and NA11036.
  • FIG. 14 shows a comparison of iPLEX Gold enzyme concentrations in an extension reaction using a 70 plex assay. All assays followed the same protocol except for the amount of iPLEX Gold enzyme used. All experiments include four replicates of the two CEPH DNAs NA06991 and NA07019. The results compare the signal-to-noise ratios of the extension products from Typer 3.4 (Sequenom).
  • FIG. 15 shows a comparison of iPLEX Gold buffer concentration in extension reactions using a 70 plex assay. All assays followed the same protocol except for the amount of goldPLEX buffer used. All experiments include four replicates of the two CEPH DNAs NA06991 and NA07019. The results compare the signal-to-noise ratios of the extension products from Typer 3.4 (Sequenom).
  • FIGS. 16, 17, 18 and 19 show a comparison of extension oligonucleotide concentration in extension reactions using a 70 plex assay. All assays followed the same protocol except for the amount of extension oligonucleotide used. All experiments include four replicates of the two CEPH DNAs NA06991 and NA07019. The results compare the signal-to-noise ratios of the extension products from Typer 3.4 (Sequenom).
  • FIGS. 20 and 21 show a comparison of biotinylated ddNTP concentration in extension reactions using a 70 plex assay. All assays followed the same protocol except for the amount of biotinylated ddNTP used (value indicates final amount of each biotinylated nucleotide). All experiments include four replicates of the two CEPH DNAs NA06991 and NA07019. The results compare the signal-to-noise ratios of the extension products from Typer 3.4 (Sequenom).
  • FIG. 22 shows a comparison of Solulink and Dynabeads MyOne C1 magnetic streptavidin beads for capturing the extend products. A total amount of 10 μmol of each oligonucleotide corresponding to the two possible alleles for assay rs1000586 were bound to the magnetic streptavidin beads, in the presence of either water or varying quantities of biotinylated dNTPs (total 10, 100 or 500 μmol). The mass tags were then cleaved from the bound oligonucleotide with 10 U of endonuclease V.
  • The results compare the area of the mass tag peaks from Typer 3.4 (Sequenom) and are listed in comparison with 10 μmol of an oligonucleotide which has a similar mass.
  • FIG. 23 shows analysis of the ability of endonuclease V to cleave an extension product containing a deoxyinosine nucleotide in different locations. The oligonucleotides were identical aside from the deoxyinosine being 10, 15, 20 or 25 bases from the 3′ end of the oligonucleotide. After binding the oligonucleotide to the magnetic streptavidin beads, the supernatant was collected, cleaned by a nucleotide removal kit (Qiagen) and then cleaved by treatment with endonuclease V (termed unbound oligonucleotide). The beads were washed, and cleaved with endonuclease V, as outlined in protocol section (termed captured/cleaved). The results compare the area of the peaks from Typer 3.4 (Sequenom), and are listed as a percentage of oligonucleotide cleaved by endonuclease V without being bound to magnetic streptavidin beads.
  • FIG. 24 shows a comparison of magnetic streptavidin beads and endonuclease V concentration using a 70 plex assay. All assays were conducted using the same conditions except for the amount of magnetic streptavidin beads and endonuclease V. All experiments include four replicates of the CEPH DNA NA11036. The results compare the signal-to-noise ratio from Typer 3.4.
  • FIGS. 25 and 26 show a comparison of magnetic streptavidin beads and endonuclease V concentration using a 70 plex assay. All assays followed the same protocol except for the amount of magnetic streptavidin beads and endonuclease V. All experiments include four replicates of the two CEPH DNAs NA06991 and NA07019. The results compare the signal-to-noise ratio from Typer 3.4.
  • FIGS. 27A-G show a schematic representation of a biotin competition method for releasing a biotinylated amplification product of interest from a streptavidin coated magnetic or paramagnetic bead. In panel A, a region of interest is PCR amplified (e.g., using uniplex or multiplex methods) with subsequent dephosphorylation of the amplified products with shrimp alkaline phosphatase (not shown in diagram). Panel B illustrates single base extension of biotinylated dideoxynucleotides over the residue of interest in the product amplified in panel A. Panel C illustrates the capture of the biotinylated extension products by streptavidin coated magnetic beads. Panel D illustrates a washing step to remove unused reaction components followed by a capture step, to capture the streptavidin coated magnetic beads to which the biotinylated extension products are bound. Panel E illustrates release of the biotinylated extension products from the streptavidin coated magnetic bead by competition with free biotin. Panel F illustrates the purified biotinylated extension products, which can be further analyzed using a variety of methods, including matrix assisted laser desorption/time of flight (MALDI-TOF) mass spectrometry (MS). For use in MALDI-TOF mass spectrometry, the isolated extension products can be dispensed onto a SpectroCHIP® (Sequenom), for example. Panel G illustrates a representative mass spectrum from MALDI-TOF MS analysis of a biotinylated extension product generated as described herein. See Example 12 for experimental details and results.
  • FIG. 28 is a representative mass spectrum of the mass difference of various allelic variants (e.g., polymorphism) as measured by MALDI-TOF MS analysis of single base extension products generated using biotinylated dideoxynucleotide terminators and released from the solid surface by biotin competition as described herein and illustrated in FIG. 27A-G. See Example 12 for experimental details and results. FIG. 28 discloses SEQ ID NOS 337-339, respectively, in order of appearance.
  • FIGS. 29A-G illustrate a flow chart showing a mechanism of a biotin competition releasing step.
  • FIG. 30A illustrates a flow chart showing a mechanism of an inosine cleavage releasing step. Steps are the same as for a biotin capture method through the wash step with the exception that the extension oligonucleotides have a 5′ mass tag separated by an inosine residue. The mass tags are cleaved from captured products through endonuclease V cleavage specific to inosine residues.
  • FIG. 30B illustrates a detection of cleaved mass tags on the MALDI. The mass represents a genetic variant.
  • FIG. 31 shows comparative results of biotin competition vs. inosine cleavage using different concentrations of 3′-biotinylated oligonucleotide and different capture beads.
  • FIG. 32 shows comparative results of biotin competition vs. inosine cleavage using Dynal Cl beads. The mass spectra peak representing detected capture oligonucleotide and detected quantification oligonucleotide are indicated by down arrows. FIG. 32A shows the results of a biotin competition using Dynal C1 streptavidin beads for capture and free-biotin for the competition. The concentration of the biotinylated oligonucleotide and reference oligonucleotide (i.e. quantification oligonucleotide) tested was 0.031 uM. FIG. 32B shows the results of an inosine cleavage release using Dynal C1 streptavidin beads for capture and endonuclease V for the release. The concentration of the biotinylated oligonucleotide and reference oligonucleotide (i.e. quantification oligonucleotide) tested was 0.031 uM.
  • FIG. 33 shows an evaluation of different capture beads using a competitor template.
  • FIG. 34 shows mass spectrometry results from an assay using a very low competitor template (about 30 molecules) for each bead type tested. The mass spectra peak representing the detected capture oligonucleotide and detected quantification oligonucleotide are indicated by down arrows.
  • FIG. 34A shows results using Dynal C1 beads. FIG. 34B shows results using Solulink Beads. FIG. 34C shows results using Dynal M270 beads.
  • FIG. 35 shows the detection of BRAF-2 and BRAF-15 mutations using different extension compositions and demonstrates an increase in signal to noise ratio when ddNTPs corresponding to the wild type (e.g. more abundant variant) are excluded from the extension composition.
  • FIG. 36 shows results of a competition assay with a 1% rare allele.
  • FIG. 37 illustrates a model plasmid that can be cleaved through EcoRI restriction digest to separate the regions and more adequately reflect a genomic context.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION
  • Methods for determining the presence or absence of a plurality of target nucleic acids in a composition described herein find multiple uses by the person of ordinary skill in the art (hereafter referred to herein as the “person of ordinary skill”). Such methods can be utilized, for example, to: (a) rapidly determine whether a particular target sequence (e.g. a target sequence comprising a genetic variation) is present in a sample; (b) perform mixture analysis, e.g., identify a mixture and/or its composition or determine the frequency of a target sequence in a mixture (e.g., mixed communities, quasispecies); (c) detect sequence variations (e.g., mutations, single nucleotide polymorphisms) in a sample; (d) perform haplotyping determinations; (e) perform microorganism (e.g., pathogen) typing; (f) detect the presence or absence of a microorganism target sequence in a sample; (g) identify disease markers; (h) detect microsatellites; (i) identify short tandem repeats; (j) identify an organism or organisms; (k) detect allelic variations; (l) determine allelic frequency; (m) determine methylation patterns; (n) perform epigenetic determinations; (o) re-sequence a region of a biomolecule; (p) perform analyses in human clinical research and medicine (e.g. cancer marker detection, sequence variation detection; detection of sequence signatures favorable or unfavorable for a particular drug administration), (q) perform HLA typing; (r) perform forensics analyses; (s) perform vaccine quality control analyses; (t) monitor treatments; (u) perform vector identity analyses; (v) perform vaccine or production strain quality control and (w) test strain identity (x) plants. Such methods also may be utilized, for example, in a variety of fields, including, without limitation, in commercial, education, medical, agriculture, environmental, disease monitoring, military defense, and forensics fields.
  • Target Nucleic Acids
  • As used herein, the term “nucleic acid” refers to an oligonucleotide or polynucleotide, including, without limitation, natural nucleic acids (e.g., deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA), ribonucleic acid (RNA)), synthetic nucleic acids, non-natural nucleic acids (e.g., peptide nucleic acid (PNA)), unmodified nucleic acids, modified nucleic acids (e.g., methylated DNA or RNA, labeled DNA or RNA, DNA or RNA having one or more modified nucleotides). Reference to a nucleic acid as a “polynucleotide” refers to two or more nucleotides or nucleotide analogs linked by a covalent bond. Nucleic acids may be any type of nucleic acid suitable for use with processes described herein. A nucleic acid in certain embodiments can be DNA (e.g., complementary DNA (cDNA), genomic DNA (gDNA), plasmids and vector DNA and the like), RNA (e.g., viral RNA, message RNA (mRNA), short inhibitory RNA (siRNA), ribosomal RNA (rRNA), tRNA and the like), and/or DNA or RNA analogs (e.g., containing base analogs, sugar analogs and/or a non-native backbone and the like). A nucleic acid can be in any form useful for conducting processes herein (e.g., linear, circular, supercoiled, single-stranded, double-stranded and the like). A nucleic acid may be, or may be from, a plasmid, phage, autonomously replicating sequence (ARS), centromere, artificial chromosome, chromosome, a cell, a cell nucleus or cytoplasm of a cell in certain embodiments. A nucleic acid in some embodiments is from a single chromosome (e.g., a nucleic acid sample may be from one chromosome of a sample obtained from a diploid organism). In the case of fetal nucleic acid, the nucleic acid may be from the paternal allele, the maternal allele or the maternal and paternal allele.
  • The term “species,” as used herein with reference to a target nucleic acid, amplicon, primer, sequence tag, polynucleotide, or oligonucleotide, refers to one nucleic acid having a nucleotide sequence that differs by one or more nucleotides from the nucleotide sequence of another nucleic acid when the nucleotide sequences are aligned. Thus, a first nucleic acid species differs from a second nucleic acid species when the sequences of the two species, when aligned, differ by one or more nucleotides (e.g., about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100 or more than 100 nucleotide differences). In certain embodiments, the number of nucleic acid species, such as target nucleic acid species, amplicon species or extended oligonucleotide species, includes, but is not limited to about 2 to about 10000 nucleic acid species, about 2 to about 1000 nucleic acid species, about 2 to about 500 nucleic acid species, or sometimes about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 325, 350, 375, 400, 425, 450, 475, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000 or 10000 nucleic acid species.
  • In some embodiments an oligonucleotide species is hybridized to a nucleic acid template (e.g. an amplicon) thereby forming a double stranded nucleic acid and the oligonucleotide species that is hybridized to the template is referred to herein as a hybridized oligonucleotide species. In some embodiments a hybridized oligonucleotide species can comprise one or more nucleotides that are not hybridized to the template. For example, a hybridized oligonucleotide species can comprise one or more mismatched nucleotides (e.g. non-complementary nucleotides) and sometimes a 5′ and/or 3′ region of nucleotides that do not hybridize. In some embodiments a hybridized oligonucleotide species comprises a tag (e.g. a mass distinguishable tag, a sequence tag, a light emitting tag or a radioactive tag). In some embodiments a hybridized oligonucleotide species comprises a capture agent (e.g. biotin, or any member of binding pair). In some embodiments a hybridized oligonucleotide species comprises a terminating nucleotide.
  • As used herein, the term “nucleotides” refers to natural and non-natural nucleotides. Nucleotides include, but are not limited to, naturally occurring nucleoside mono-, di-, and triphosphates: deoxyadenosine mono-, di- and triphosphate; deoxyguanosine mono-, di- and triphosphate; deoxythymidine mono-, di- and triphosphate; deoxycytidine mono-, di- and triphosphate; deoxyuridine mono-, di- and triphosphate; and deoxyinosine mono-, di- and triphosphate (referred to herein as dA, dG, dT, dC, dU and dl, or A, G, T, C, U and I respectively). Nucleotides also include, but are not limited to, modified nucleotides and nucleotide analogs. Modified nucleotides and nucleotide analogs include, without limitation, deazapurine nucleotides, e.g., 7-deaza-deoxyguanosine (7-deaza-dG) and 7-deaza-deoxyadenosine (7-deaza-dA) mono-, di- and triphosphates, deutero-deoxythymidine (deutero-dT) mon-, di- and triphosphates, methylated nucleotides e.g., 5-methyldeoxycytidine triphosphate, 13C/15N labeled nucleotides and deoxyinosine mono-, di- and triphosphate. Modified nucleotides, isotopically enriched nucleotides, depleted nucleotides, tagged and labeled nucleotides and nucleotide analogs can be obtained using a variety of combinations of functionality and attachment positions.
  • The term “composition” as used herein with reference to nucleic acids refers to a tangible item that includes one or more nucleic acids. A composition sometimes is a sample extracted from a source, but also a composition of all samples at the source, and at times is the source of one or more nucleic acids. A composition can comprise nucleic acids. In some embodiments, a composition can comprise genomic DNA. In some embodiments, a composition can comprise maternal DNA, fetal DNA or a mixture of maternal and fetal DNA. In some embodiments, a composition can comprise fragments of genomic DNA. In some embodiments a composition can comprise nucleic acids derived from a virus, bacteria, yeast, fungus, mammal or mixture thereof.
  • A nucleic acid sample may be derived from one or more sources. A sample may be collected from an organism, mineral or geological site (e.g., soil, rock, mineral deposit, fossil), or forensic site (e.g., crime scene, contraband or suspected contraband), for example. Thus, a source may be environmental, such as geological, agricultural, combat theater or soil sources, for example. A source also may be from any type of organism such as any plant, fungus, protistan, moneran, virus or animal, including but not limited, human, non-human, mammal, reptile, cattle, cat, dog, goat, swine, pig, monkey, ape, gorilla, bull, cow, bear, horse, sheep, poultry, mouse, rat, fish, dolphin, whale, and shark, or any animal or organism that may have a detectable nucleic acids. Sources also can refer to different parts of an organism such as internal parts, external parts, living or non-living cells, tissue, fluid and the like. A sample therefore may be a “biological sample,” which refers to any material obtained from a living source or formerly-living source, for example, an animal such as a human or other mammal, a plant, a bacterium, a fungus, a protist or a virus. A source can be in any form, including, without limitation, a solid material such as a tissue, cells, a cell pellet, a cell extract, or a biopsy, or a biological fluid such as urine, blood, saliva, amniotic fluid, exudate from a region of infection or inflammation, or a mouth wash containing buccal cells, hair, cerebral spinal fluid and synovial fluid and organs. A sample also may be isolated at a different time point as compared to another sample, where each of the samples are from the same or a different source. A nucleic acid may be from a nucleic acid library, such as a cDNA or RNA library, for example. A nucleic acid may be a result of nucleic acid purification or isolation and/or amplification of nucleic acid molecules from the sample. Nucleic acid provided for sequence analysis processes described herein may contain nucleic acid from one sample or from two or more samples (e.g., from 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 50, 75, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 or 1000 or more samples).
  • Nucleic acids may be treated in a variety of manners. For example, a nucleic acid may be reduced in size (e.g., sheared, digested by nuclease or restriction enzyme, de-phosphorylated, de-methylated), increased in size (e.g., phosphorylated, reacted with a methylation-specific reagent, attached to a detectable label), treated with inhibitors of nucleic acid cleavage and the like.
  • Nucleic acids may be provided for conducting methods described herein without processing, in certain embodiments. In some embodiments, nucleic acid is provided for conducting methods described herein after processing. For example, a nucleic acid may be extracted, isolated, purified or amplified from a sample. The term “isolated” as used herein refers to nucleic acid removed from its original environment (e.g., the natural environment if it is naturally occurring, or a host cell if expressed exogenously), and thus is altered “by the hand of man” from its original environment. An isolated nucleic acid generally is provided with fewer non-nucleic acid components (e.g., protein, lipid) than the amount of components present in a source sample. A composition comprising isolated nucleic acid can be substantially isolated (e.g., about 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or greater than 99% free of non-nucleic acid components). The term “purified” as used herein refers to nucleic acid provided that contains fewer nucleic acid species than in the sample source from which the nucleic acid is derived. A composition comprising nucleic acid may be substantially purified (e.g., about 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or greater than 99% free of other nucleic acid species).
  • Nucleic acids may be processed by a method that generates nucleic acid fragments, in certain embodiments, before providing nucleic acid for a process described herein. In some embodiments, nucleic acid subjected to fragmentation or cleavage may have a nominal, average or mean length of about 5 to about 10,000 base pairs, about 100 to about 1,000 base pairs, about 100 to about 500 base pairs, or about 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000 or 10000 base pairs. Fragments can be generated by any suitable method known in the art, and the average, mean or nominal length of nucleic acid fragments can be controlled by selecting an appropriate fragment-generating procedure. In certain embodiments, nucleic acid of a relatively shorter length can be utilized to analyze sequences that contain little sequence variation and/or contain relatively large amounts of known nucleotide sequence information. In some embodiments, nucleic acid of a relatively longer length can be utilized to analyze sequences that contain greater sequence variation and/or contain relatively small amounts of unknown nucleotide sequence information.
  • As used herein, the term “target nucleic acid” or “target nucleic acid species” refers to any nucleic acid species of interest in a sample. A target nucleic acid includes, without limitation, (i) a particular allele amongst two or more possible alleles, and (ii) a nucleic acid having, or not having, a particular mutation, nucleotide substitution, sequence variation, repeat sequence, marker or distinguishing sequence. As used herein, the term “different target nucleic acids” refers to nucleic acid species that differ by one or more features. As used herein, the term “genetic variation” refers to nucleic acid species that differ by one or more features. As used herein, the term “variant” refers to nucleic acid species that differ by one or more features. Features include, without limitation, one or more methyl groups or a methylation state, one or more phosphates, one or more acetyl groups, and one or more deletions, additions or substitutions of one or more nucleotides. Examples of one or more deletions, additions or substitutions of one or more nucleotides include, without limitation, the presence or absence of a particular mutation, presence or absence of a nucleotide substitution (e.g., single nucleotide polymorphism (SNP)), presence or absence of a repeat sequence (e.g., di-, tri-, tetra-, penta-nucleotide repeat), presence or absence of a marker (e.g., microsatellite) and presence of absence of a distinguishing sequence (e.g., a sequence that distinguishes one organism from another (e.g., a sequence that distinguishes one viral strain from another viral strain)). Different target nucleic acids may be distinguished by any known method, for example, by mass, binding, distinguishable tags and the like, as described herein.
  • As used herein, the term “plurality of target nucleic acids” or “plurality of target nucleic acid species” refers to more than one target nucleic acid species. A plurality of target nucleic acids can be about 2 to about 10000 nucleic acid species, about 2 to about 1000 nucleic acid species, about 2 to about 500 nucleic acid species, or sometimes about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 325, 350, 375, 400, 425, 450, 475, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000 or 10000 nucleic acid species, in certain embodiments. Detection or identification of nucleic acids results in detection of the target and can indicate the presence or absence of a particular mutation, sequence variation (mutation or polymorphism) or genetic variation (e.g. sequence variation, sequence difference or polymorphism). Within the plurality of target nucleic acids, there may be detection of the same or different target nucleic acids. The plurality of target nucleic acids may also be identified quantitatively as well as qualitatively in terms of identification. Also refer to multiplexing below.
  • Amplification and Extension
  • A nucleic acid (e.g., a target nucleic acid) can be amplified in certain embodiments. As used herein, the term “amplifying,” and grammatical variants thereof, refers to a process of generating copies of a template nucleic acid. For example, nucleic acid template may be subjected to a process that linearly or exponentially generates two or more nucleic acid amplicons (copies) having the same or substantially the same nucleotide sequence as the nucleotide sequence of the template, or a portion of the template. Nucleic acid amplification often is specific (e.g., amplicons have the same or substantially the same sequence), and can be non-specific (e.g., amplicons have different sequences) in certain embodiments. Nucleic acid amplification sometimes is beneficial when the amount of target sequence present in a sample is low. By amplifying the target sequences and detecting the amplicon synthesized, sensitivity of an assay can be improved, since fewer target sequences are needed at the beginning of the assay for detection of a target nucleic acid. A target nucleic acid sometimes is not amplified prior to hybridizing an extension oligonucleotide, in certain embodiments.
  • Amplification conditions are known and can be selected for a particular nucleic acid that will be amplified. Amplification conditions include certain reagents some of which can include, without limitation, nucleotides (e.g., nucleotide triphosphates), modified nucleotides, oligonucleotides (e.g., primer oligonucleotides for polymerase-based amplification and oligonucleotide building blocks for ligase-based amplification), one or more salts (e.g., magnesium-containing salt), one or more buffers, one or more polymerizing agents (e.g., ligase enzyme, polymerase enzyme), one or more nicking enzymes (e.g., an enzyme that cleaves one strand of a double-stranded nucleic acid) and one or more nucleases (e.g., exonuclease, endonuclease, RNase). Any polymerase suitable for amplification may be utilized, such as a polymerase with or without exonuclease activity, DNA polymerase and RNA polymerase, mutant forms of these enzymes, for example. Any ligase suitable for joining the 5′ of one oligonucleotide to the 3′ end of another oligonucleotide can be utilized. Amplification conditions also can include certain reaction conditions, such as isothermal or temperature cycle conditions. Methods for cycling temperature in an amplification process are known, such as by using a thermocycle device. The term “cycling” refers to amplification (e.g. an amplification reaction or extension reaction) utilizing a single primer or multiple primers where temperature cycling is used. Amplification conditions also can, in some embodiments, include an emulsion agent (e.g., oil) that can be utilized to form multiple reaction compartments within which single nucleic acid molecule species can be amplified. Amplification is sometimes an exponential product generating process and sometimes is a linear product generating process.
  • A strand of a single-stranded nucleic acid target can be amplified and one or two strands of a double-stranded nucleic acid target can be amplified. An amplification product (amplicon), in some embodiments, is about 10 nucleotides to about 10,000 nucleotides in length, about 10 to about 1000 nucleotides in length, about 10 to about 500 nucleotides in length, 10 to about 100 nucleotides in length, and sometimes about 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 325, 350, 375, 400, 425, 450, 475, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 or 1000 nucleotides in length.
  • Any suitable amplification technique and amplification conditions can be selected for a particular nucleic acid for amplification. Known amplification processes include, without limitation, polymerase chain reaction (PCR), extension and ligation, ligation amplification (or ligase chain reaction (LCR)) and amplification methods based on the use of Q-beta replicase or template-dependent polymerase (see US Patent Publication Number US20050287592). Also useful are strand displacement amplification (SDA), thermophilic SDA, nucleic acid sequence based amplification (3SR or NASBA) and transcription-associated amplification (TAA). Reagents, apparatus and hardware for conducting amplification processes are commercially available, and amplification conditions are known and can be selected for the target nucleic acid at hand.
  • Polymerase-based amplification can be effected, in certain embodiments, by employing universal primers. In such processes, hybridization regions that hybridize to one or more universal primers are incorporated into a template nucleic acid. Such hybridization regions can be incorporated into (i) a primer that hybridizes to a target nucleic acid and is extended, and/or (ii) an oligonucleotide that is joined (e.g., ligated using a ligase enzyme) to a target nucleic acid or a product of (i), for example. Amplification processes that involve universal primers can provide an advantage of amplifying a plurality of target nucleic acids using only one or two amplification primers, for example.
  • FIG. 1 shows certain embodiments of amplification processes. In certain embodiments, only one primer is utilized for amplification (e.g., FIG. 1A). In certain embodiments, two primers are utilized. Under amplification conditions at least one primer has a complementary distinguishable tag. The gene specific extend primer has a 5′ universal PCRTag1R (e.g., FIG. 1A). It may be extended on any nucleic acid, for example genomic DNA. The DNA or the PCR Tag1R gene specific extend primer may be biotinylated, to facilitate clean up of the reaction. The extended strand then is ligated by a single strand ligase to a universal phosphorylated oligonucleotide, which has a sequence that is the reverse complement of Tag2F (universal PCR primer; FIG. 1B). To facilitate cleanup in the next step, the phosphorylated oligonucleotide can include exonuclease resistant nucleotides at its 3′ end. During the exonuclease treatment, all non-ligated extended strands are degraded, whereas ligated products are protected and remain in the reaction (e.g., FIG. 1C). A universal PCR then is performed, using Tag1R and the Tag2F primers, to amplify multiple targets (e.g., FIG. 1D).
  • FIG. 2 also shows certain embodiments of amplification processes. In some embodiments, a method involving primer extension and ligation takes place in the same reaction (e.g., FIG. 2A). Biotinylated PCRTag3R gene-specific primer is an extension primer. The phosphorylated oligonucleotide has a gene-specific sequence and binds about 40 bases (e.g., 4 to 100 or more) away from the primer extension site, to the same strand of DNA. Thus a DNA polymerase, such as Stoffel polymerase, extends the strand, until it reaches the phosphorylated oligonucleotide. A ligase enzyme ligates the gene specific sequence of the phosphorylated oligonucleotide to the extended strand. The 3′ end of phosphorylated oligonucleotide has PCRTag4(RC)F as its universal tag. The biotinylated extended strands then are bound to streptavidin beads. This approach facilitates cleanup of the reaction (e.g., FIG. 2B). DNA, such as genomic DNA, and the gene specific phosphorylated oligonucleotides are washed away. A universal PCR then is performed, using Tag3R and Tag4F as primers, to amplify different genes of interest (e.g., FIG. 2C).
  • Certain nucleic acids can be extended in certain embodiments. The term “extension,” and grammatical variants thereof, as used herein refers to elongating one strand of a nucleic acid. For example, an oligonucleotide that hybridizes to a target nucleic acid or an amplicon generated from a target nucleic acid can be extended in certain embodiments. An extension reaction is conducted under extension conditions, and a variety of such conditions are known and selected for a particular application. Extension conditions include certain reagents, including without limitation, one or more oligonucleotides, extension nucleotides (e.g., nucleotide triphosphates (dNTPs)), terminating nucleotides (e.g., one or more dideoxynucleotide triphosphates (ddNTPs)), one or more salts (e.g., magnesium-containing salt), one or more buffers (e.g., with beta-NAD, Triton X-100), and one or more polymerizing agents (e.g., DNA polymerase, RNA polymerase). Extension can be conducted under isothermal conditions or under non-isothermal conditions (e.g., thermocycled conditions), in certain embodiments. One or more nucleic acid species can be extended in an extension reaction, and one or more molecules of each nucleic acid species can be extended. A nucleic acid can be extended by one or more nucleotides, and in some embodiments, the extension product is about 10 nucleotides to about 10,000 nucleotides in length, about 10 to about 1000 nucleotides in length, about 10 to about 500 nucleotides in length, 10 to about 100 nucleotides in length, and sometimes about 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 325, 350, 375, 400, 425, 450, 475, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 or 1000 nucleotides in length. Incorporation of a terminating nucleotide (e.g., ddNTP), the hybridization location, or other factors, can determine the length to which the oligonucleotide is extended. In certain embodiments, amplification and extension processes are carried out in the same detection procedure.
  • In some embodiments an extension reaction includes multiple temperature cycles repeated to amplify the amount of extension product in the reaction. In some embodiments the extension reaction is cycled 2 or more times. In some embodiments the extension reaction is cycled 10 or more times. In some embodiments the extension reaction is cycled about 10, 15, 20, 50, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500 or 600 or more times. In some embodiments the extension reaction is cycled 20 to 50 times. In some embodiments the extension reaction is cycled 20 to 100 times. In some embodiments the extension reaction is cycled 20 to 300 times. In some embodiments the extension reaction is cycled 200 to 300 times.
  • In some embodiments a target nucleic acid (e.g. target nucleic acid species, oligonucleotide species, hybridized oligonucleotide species or amplicon) is extended in the presence of an extension composition where the target nucleic acid is extended by one nucleotide. An extension composition can comprise one or more buffers, salts, enzymes (e.g. polymerases, Klenow, etc.), water, templates (e.g. DNA, RNA, amplicons, etc.), primers (e.g. oligonucleotides), nucleotide triphosphates, glycerol, macromolecular exclusion molecules and any other additives used in the art. An extension composition can comprise terminating nucleotides (e.g. dideoxynucleotides (e.g. ddNTPs)), non-terminating or extension nucleotides (e.g. dNTPs) or a mixture of terminating nucleotides and non-terminating nucleotides. An extension composition consisting essentially of a particular terminating nucleotide or terminating nucleotides, can contain any other component of an extension composition (e.g. buffers, salts, templates, primers, etc.), but does not contain any other terminating nucleotide or nucleotide triphosphate (e.g. dNTP) except those specified. For example an extension composition consisting essentially of ddTTP and ddCTP does not contain ddATP, ddGTP or any other dNTP. In some embodiments the nucleotides in an extension composition are only terminating nucleotides and the target nucleic acid is extended by one nucleotide (i.e. sometimes there are no extension nucleotides in the extension composition). In some embodiments an extension composition consists essentially of terminating nucleotides (e.g. ddNTPs). In some embodiments, a terminating nucleotide comprises one or more (e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 20, or more) capture agents. In some embodiments, a terminating nucleotide comprises one or more (e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 20, or more) different capture agents. In some embodiments, a terminating nucleotide comprises (e.g. is covalently bound to) one or more (e.g. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 20, or more) capture agent molecules. In some embodiments, a terminating nucleotide comprises one capture agent molecule. In some embodiments, a first terminating nucleotide comprises a capture agent and a second terminating nucleotide comprises a different capture agent. In some embodiments, an extension composition comprises one or more terminating nucleotides where each terminating nucleotide comprises a different capture agent. In some embodiments, an extension composition comprises one or more terminating nucleotides where each terminating nucleotide comprises a capture agent and the capture agent is the same. In some embodiments, an extension composition comprises a terminating nucleotide and an extension nucleotide and one or more of the nucleotides (e.g. terminating nucleotides and/or extension nucleotides) include a capture agent. In some embodiments a terminating nucleotide comprises a capture agent and the capture agent is biotin or a biotin analogue. In some embodiments, the extension composition consists essentially of terminating nucleotides that are bound to one or more capture agents. In some embodiments the capture agent is biotin or a biotin analogue. A biotin analogue can be any modified biotin that effects the binding properties of biotin to avidin or streptavidin (e.g. 9-methylbiotin, biotin methyl ester (MEBio), desthiobiotin (DEBio), 2′-iminobiotin (IMBio), e-N-Biotinyl-L-lysine, diaminobiotin (DABio), including all biotin analogues disclosed in Lai-Qiang et. al. (Lai-Qiang Ying and Bruce P. Branchaud, Chemical Communications, 2011, 47, 8593-8595)). In some embodiments the capture agent is avidin, streptavidin or a modified form of avidin or streptavidin (e.g. nitroavidin, nitrostreptavidin, NeutrAvidin, CaptAvidin and derivatives thereof).
  • Any suitable extension reaction can be selected and utilized. An extension reaction can be utilized, for example, to discriminate SNP alleles by the incorporation of deoxynucleotides and/or dideoxynucleotides to an extension oligonucleotide that hybridizes to a region adjacent to the SNP site in a target nucleic acid. The primer often is extended with a polymerase. In some embodiments, the oligonucleotide is extended by only one deoxynucleotide or dideoxynucleotide complementary to the SNP site. In some embodiments, an oligonucleotide may be extended by dNTP incorporation and terminated by a ddNTP, or terminated by ddNTP incorporation without dNTP extension in certain embodiments. One or more dNTP and/or ddNTP used during the extension reaction are labeled with a moiety allowing immobilization to a solid support, such as biotin, in some embodiments. Extension may be carried out using unmodified extension oligonucleotides and unmodified dideoxynucleotides, unmodified extension oligonucleotides and biotinylated dideoxynucleotides, extension oligonucleotides containing a deoxyinosine and unmodified dideoxynucleotides, extension oligonucleotides containing a deoxyinosine and biotinylated dideoxynucleotides, extension by biotinylated dideoxynucleotides, or extension by biotinylated deoxynucleotide and/or unmodified dideoxynucleotides, in some embodiments.
  • In some embodiments an oligonucleotide species can hybridize, under hybridization conditions, to a template (e.g. a target nucleic acid species) adjacent to a genetic variation or variant (e.g. the 3′ end of the oligonucleotide species may be located 5′ of the genetic variation site and may be 0 to 10 nucleotides away from the 5′ end of the genetic variation site). Several variant may exist at a site of genetic variation in a target nucleic acid. A genetic variant sometimes is a single nucleotide polymorphism (SNP) or single nucleotide variant. Several single nucleotide variants may exist at a single base position on a template target located 3′ of a hybridized oligonucleotide. Several single nucleotide variants may differ by a single base located at a position on a template target that is 3′ of a hybridized oligonucleotide species. In some embodiments an oligonucleotide species is extended by one nucleotide at the variant position. The oligonucleotide can be extended by any one of five terminating nucleotides (e.g. ddATP, ddUTP, ddTTP, ddGTP, ddCTP), depending on the number of variants present, in some embodiments. A target nucleic acid species and its variants, or a corresponding amplicon, can act as the template and can, in part, determine which terminating nucleotide is added to the oligonucleotide in the extension reaction. A target nucleic acid species may have two or more variants. In some embodiments a target nucleic acid species comprises two variants. In some embodiments a target nucleic acid species comprises three variants. In some embodiments a target nucleic acid species comprises four variants. In some embodiments a target nucleic acid species comprises no variants.
  • In some embodiments the amount of molecules of a target mutant variant (e.g. low abundant variant) present in an assay where the wild type (e.g. high abundance species) extension product is not generated is determined by the use of a synthetic template included in the extension reaction. In some embodiments the amount of target (e.g. copy number, concentration, percentage) mutant variant (i.e. mutant extension products) and/or percentage of target mutant variant in the sample is quantified by including a known amount of synthetic template in the extension reaction. In some embodiments the synthetic template can hybridize to an oligonucleotide species and contain a base substitution at the mutant position located just 3′ of the oligonucleotide species to be extended. In some embodiments, the base substitution is different than the wild type or target mutant variant (e.g. first variant, low abundant variant, SNP). In some embodiments, the base substitution present in the template is not present in the sample prior to introduction of the template. In some embodiments a ddNTP (e.g. a biotin-ddNTP) that is complementary to the base substitution in the synthetic template is also introduced into the reaction. In some embodiments, oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the target mutant variant are co-amplified (e.g. co-extended) with oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the synthetic template. In some embodiments, multiple reactions, that include serial dilutions of a synthetic template, are performed to determine the amount and/or percentage of the target mutant variant. In some embodiments, the amount and/or percentage of the target mutant variant is determined by the amount of synthetic template that yields equal extension product as the target mutant variant.
  • In some embodiments, one variant can be in greater abundance than other variants. In some embodiments, the variant of greatest abundance is referred to as the wild type variant. In some embodiments a target nucleic acid species comprises a first and second variant where the second variant is represented in greater abundance (i.e. more template is present). In some embodiments a target nucleic acid species comprises a first, second and third variant where the second variant is represented in greater abundance over the first and third variant. In some embodiments a target nucleic acid species comprises a first, second, third and fourth variant where the second variant is represented in greater abundance over the first, third and fourth variant. A variant that is represented in a greater abundance generally is present at a higher concentration or is represented by a greater number of molecules (e.g. copies) when compared to another variant. A higher concentration can be 2-fold or more. In some embodiments, a higher concentration is 10-fold or more. In some embodiments, a higher concentration is a 100-fold, a 1000-fold or 10000-fold or more. In some embodiments, a second variant represents a wild type sequence and is present at a 100-fold or higher concentration than a first variant. In some embodiments, a first variant is represented at a significantly lower concentration than a second variant (e.g. a wild type) where the first variant represents less of the target nucleic acid species. In some embodiments a first variant represents less than 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 8%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.8%, 0.75%, 0.5%, 0.1%, 0.05%, 0.01% or less of the target nucleic acid species. In some embodiments a first variant represents between about 5% to about 0.75% of the target nucleic acid species. In some embodiments a first variant represents less than 30%, 20%, 15%, 10%, 8%, 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.8%, 0.75%, 0.5%, 0.1%, 0.05%, 0.01% or less of the total nucleic acid in a composition.
  • In some embodiments, a terminating nucleotide that is present (or, in some embodiments absent) in an extension composition determines which terminating nucleotide is added to an oligonucleotide. In some embodiments, an extension composition comprises one or more terminating nucleotides (e.g. ddNTPs). In some embodiments, an extension composition comprises one or more terminating nucleotides and one or more non-terminating nucleotides (e.g. dNTPs). In some embodiments, an extension composition comprises only terminating nucleotides that correspond to a specific variant (e.g. a first variant or a less abundant variant) and therefore only allow extension of that specific variant. In some embodiments, a terminating nucleotide that would allow extension of a second variant (e.g. a wild type or more abundant variant) can be excluded from an extension composition thereby preventing extension of the second variant. In some embodiments, an extension composition comprises only terminating nucleotides that correspond to a first and third variant and therefore only allow extension of those specific variants. In some embodiments, an extension composition comprises only terminating nucleotides that correspond to a first, third and fourth variant and therefore only allow extension of the first, third and fourth variants. In some embodiments, an extension composition consists essentially of terminating nucleotides that correspond to a first variant. In some embodiments, a method comprises contacting hybridized oligonucleotide species with an extension composition comprising one or more terminating nucleotides under extension conditions where (i) at least one of the one or more terminating nucleotides comprises a capture agent, and (ii) the hybridized oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the first variant (e.g. a less abundant variant, (e.g., less abundant SNP variant)) are extended by a terminating nucleotide and the hybridized oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the second variant (e.g. wild type or more abundant variant) are not extended by a terminating nucleotide, thereby generating extended oligonucleotide species. In some embodiments an extended oligonucleotide species of a second variant is not detected.
  • The term “signal to noise ratio” as used herein refers to the quantitative measurement of the quality of a signal by quantifying the ratio of intensity of a signal relative to noise when using a detection process (e.g. mass spectrometry). In some embodiments, an intensive peak on one spectrum has a greater signal to noise ratio than a low intensity peak generated by the same analyte (e.g. an extended oligonucleotide species) on another spectrum. In some embodiments, noise is generated by extended oligonucleotide species derived from abundant variants (e.g. wild type alleles, second variants, wild type variants). In some embodiments, the signal generated from an extended oligonucleotide species derived from a less abundant variant (e.g. a first variant, third variant, fourth variant, mutant variant, mutant allele, SNP) is obscured by the noise generated by a more abundant extended oligonucleotide species (e.g. a second variant, wild type variant, wild type allele) when using mass spectrometry. The term “signal” as used in the phrase “signal to noise ratio” herein refers to the intensity of a signal peak of an extended oligonucleotide species. In some embodiments, the term “signal” as used in the phrase “signal to noise ratio” herein generally refers to the intensity of a signal peak of an extended oligonucleotide species derived from a less abundant variant (e.g. a first variant, mutant variant, mutant allele, SNP). In some embodiments, a terminating nucleotide that would allow extension of a second variant (e.g. a wild type or more abundant variant) is excluded from an extension composition thereby preventing extension of the second variant and increasing the signal to noise ratio for a less abundant variant (e.g. a first variant, mutant variant, mutant allele, SNP). In some embodiments, a method comprises contacting hybridized oligonucleotide species with an extension composition comprising one or more terminating nucleotides under extension conditions where (i) at least one of the one or more terminating nucleotides comprises a capture agent, and (ii) the hybridized oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the first variant (e.g. a less abundant variant, (e.g., less abundant SNP variant)) are extended by a terminating nucleotide and the hybridized oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the second variant (e.g. wild type or more abundant variant) are not extended by a terminating nucleotide, thereby generating extended oligonucleotide species and increasing the signal to noise ratio compared to a condition where both the first and second variants are extended. In some embodiments the detecting in (f) is with a signal to noise ratio greater than a signal to noise ratio for detecting after releasing without competition with a competitor. In some embodiments the detecting in (f) comprises an increase in a signal to noise ratio when the releasing step (e) comprises competition with a competitor as compared to a releasing step that does not comprise competition with a competitor. In some embodiments a signal to noise ratio for extending only a mutant allele is greater than a signal to noise ratio for extending a wild type and a mutant allele.
  • The term “sensitivity” as used herein refers to an amount of analyte that can be detected at a given signal-to-noise ratio when using a detection process (e.g. mass spectrometry). In some embodiments, sensitivity can be improved by decreasing the background or noise level. In some embodiments, noise is generated by extended oligonucleotide species derived from abundant variants (e.g. wild type alleles, second variants, wild type variants). In some embodiments, sensitivity is increased when the signal generated from an extended oligonucleotide species derived from a more abundant extended oligonucleotide species (e.g. a second variant, wild type variant, wild type allele) is reduced or eliminated. In some embodiments, a terminating nucleotide that would allow extension of a second variant (e.g. a wild type or more abundant variant) is excluded from an extension composition thereby preventing extension of the second variant and increasing the sensitivity for detection of a less abundant variant (e.g. a first variant, mutant variant, mutant allele, SNP). In some embodiments, a method comprises contacting hybridized oligonucleotide species with an extension composition comprising one or more terminating nucleotides under extension conditions where (i) at least one of the one or more terminating nucleotides comprises a capture agent, and (ii) the hybridized oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the first variant (e.g. a less abundant variant, (e.g., less abundant SNP variant)) are extended by a terminating nucleotide and the hybridized oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the second variant (e.g. wild type or more abundant variant) are not extended by a terminating nucleotide, thereby generating extended oligonucleotide species and increasing the sensitivity for detection of the first variant compared to a condition where both the first and second variants are extended. In some embodiments the sensitivity of detecting a mutant allele in (f) is greater for extending only a mutant allele than for extending a wild type and a mutant allele.
  • Any suitable type of nucleotides can be incorporated into an amplification product or an extension product. Nucleotides may be naturally occurring nucleotides, terminating nucleotides, or non-naturally occurring nucleotides (e.g., nucleotide analog or derivative), in some embodiments. Certain nucleotides can comprise a detectable label and/or a member of a binding pair (e.g., the other member of the binding pair may be linked to a solid phase), in some embodiments. A solution containing amplicons produced by an amplification process, or a solution containing extension products produced by an extension process, can be subjected to further processing. For example, a solution can be contacted with an agent that removes phosphate moieties from free nucleotides that have not been incorporated into an amplicon or extension product. An example of such an agent is a phosphatase (e.g., alkaline phosphatase). Amplicons and extension products also may be associated with a solid phase, may be washed, may be contacted with an agent that removes a terminal phosphate (e.g., exposure to a phosphatase), may be contacted with an agent that removes a terminal nucleotide (e.g., exonuclease), may be contacted with an agent that cleaves (e.g., endonuclease, ribonuclease), and the like.
  • The term “oligonucleotide” as used herein refers to two or more nucleotides or nucleotide analogs linked by a covalent bond. An oligonucleotide is of any convenient length, and in some embodiments is about 5 to about 200 nucleotides in length, about 5 to about 150 nucleotides in length, about 5 to about 100 nucleotides in length, about 5 to about 75 nucleotides in length or about 5 to about 50 nucleotides in length, and sometimes is about 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175, or 200 nucleotides in length. Oligonucleotides may include deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA), ribonucleic acid (RNA), naturally occurring and/or non-naturally occurring nucleotides or combinations thereof and any chemical or enzymatic modification thereof (e.g. methylated DNA, DNA of modified nucleotides). The length of an oligonucleotide sometimes is shorter than the length of an amplicon or target nucleic acid, but not necessarily shorter than a primer or polynucleotide used for amplification. An oligonucleotide often comprises a nucleotide subsequence or a hybridization sequence that is complementary, or substantially complementary, to an amplicon, target nucleic acid or complement thereof (e.g., about 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or greater than 99% identical to the amplicon or target nucleic acid complement when aligned). An oligonucleotide may contain a nucleotide subsequence not complementary to, or not substantially complementary to, an amplicon, target nucleic acid or complement thereof (e.g., at the 3′ or 5′ end of the nucleotide subsequence in the primer complementary to or substantially complementary to the amplicon). An oligonucleotide in certain embodiments, may contain a detectable molecule (e.g., a tag, fluorophore, radioisotope, colormetric agent, particle, enzyme and the like) and/or a member of a binding pair, in certain embodiments (e.g., biotin/avidin, biotin/streptavidin).
  • The term “in solution” as used herein refers to a liquid, such as a liquid containing one or more nucleic acids, for example. Nucleic acids and other components in solution may be dispersed throughout, and a solution often comprises water (e.g., aqueous solution). A solution may contain any convenient number of oligonucleotide species, and there often are at least the same number of oligonucleotide species as there are amplicon species or target nucleic acid species to be detected.
  • The term “hybridization sequence” as used herein refers to a nucleotide sequence in an oligonucleotide capable of specifically hybridizing to an amplicon, target nucleic acid or complement thereof. The hybridization sequence is readily designed and selected and can be of a length suitable for hybridizing to an amplicon, target sequence or complement thereof in solution as described herein. In some embodiments, the hybridization sequence in each oligonucleotide is about 5 to about 200 nucleotides in length (e.g., about 5 to 10, about 10 to 15, about 15 to 20, about 20 to 25, about 25 to 30, about 30 to 35, about 35 to 40, about 40 to 45, or about 45 to 50, about 50 to 70, about 80 to 90, about 90 to 110, about 100 to 120, about 110 to 130, about 120 to 140, about 130 to 150, about 140 to 160, about 150 to 170, about 160 to 180, about 170 to 190, about 180 to 200 nucleotides in length).
  • The term “hybridization conditions” as used herein refers to conditions under which two nucleic acids having complementary nucleotide sequences can interact with one another. Hybridization conditions can be high stringency, medium stringency or low stringency, and conditions for these varying degrees of stringency are known. Hybridization conditions often are selected that allow for amplification and/or extension depending on the application of interest.
  • The term “specifically hybridizing to one amplicon or target nucleic acid” as used herein refers to hybridizing substantially to one amplicon species or target nucleic acid species and not substantially hybridizing to other amplicon species or target nucleic acid species in the solution. Specific hybridization rules out mismatches so that, for example, an oligonucleotide may be designed to hybridize specifically to a certain allele and only to that allele. An oligonucleotide that is homogenously matched or complementary to an allele will specifically hybridize to that allele, whereas if there is one or more base mismatches then no hybridization may occur.
  • The term “hybridization location” as used herein refers to a specific location on an amplicon or target nucleic acid to which another nucleic acid hybridizes. In certain embodiments, the terminus of an oligonucleotide is adjacent to or substantially adjacent to a site on an amplicon species or target nucleic acid species that has a different sequence than another amplicon species or target nucleic acid species. The terminus of an oligonucleotide is “adjacent” to a site when there are no nucleotides between the site and the oligonucleotide terminus. The terminus of an oligonucleotide is “substantially adjacent” to a site when there are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 or 10 nucleotides between the site and the oligonucleotide terminus, in certain embodiments.
  • Capture Agents and Solid Phases
  • One or more capture agents may be utilized for the methods described herein. There are several different types of capture agents available for processes described herein, including, without limitation, members of a binding pair, for example. Examples of binding pairs, include, without limitation, (a) non-covalent binding pairs (e.g., antibody/antigen, antibody/antibody, antibody/antibody fragment, antibody/antibody receptor, antibody/protein A or protein G, hapten/anti-hapten, biotin/avidin, biotin/streptavidin, folic acid/folate binding protein, receptor/ligand or binding portion thereof, and vitamin B12/intrinsic factor); and (b) covalent attachment pairs (e.g., sulfhydryl/maleimide, sulfhydryl/haloacetyl derivative, amine/isotriocyanate, amine/succinimidyl ester, and amine/sulfonyl halides), and the like. In some embodiments, one member of a binding pair is in association with an extended oligonucleotide or amplification product and another member in association with a solid phase. The term “in association with” as used herein refers to an interaction between at least two units, where the two units are bound or linked to one another, for example.
  • The term “competitor” as used herein refers to any molecule that competes with the capture agent for interaction with (e.g., binding to) the solid phase. Non-limiting examples of competitors include free capture agent (e.g., one or the other member of a binding pair, free biotin, free avidin/streptavidin), a competing fragment of a capture agent (e.g., a competing fragment of biotin or avidin/streptavidin), a competing multimer of the capture agent (e.g., a biotin multimer), another competing molecule or fragment or multimer thereof, a molecule that competes specifically for binding to the solid phase, elevated salt conditions, elevated temperature conditions, or combinations thereof. In some embodiments, a multimer of a capture agent comprises between about 2 and about 50 monomers. In some embodiments, a multimer of a capture agent comprises between about 2 and about 10 monomers. In some embodiments, a multimer of a capture agent comprises about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, or 20 monomers. In some embodiments, a capture agent comprising a multimer of capture agents comprises monomers that are covalently bound to each other. In some embodiments, a capture agent comprising a multimer of capture agents comprises monomers that are not covalently bound to each other. The term “free capture agent” as used herein refers to a capture agent that is not in association with a solid phase or extended oligonucleotide. In some embodiments, a free capture agent can be biotin or a competing portion or fragment thereof. In certain embodiments, a free capture agent can be avidin, streptavidin, or a competing portion or fragment thereof. The term “competing portion or fragment” refers to capture agent that is less than full size, yet still retains the functionality of the intact capture agent (e.g., the same, less or more of the capture agent interaction activity with the solid support) with respect to interaction with the other member of a binding pair (e.g., a fragment or portion of biotin that still can bind to avidin or streptavidin, a fragment or portion of avidin or streptavidin that still can bind to biotin). In some embodiments, a fragment of a free capture agent (e.g. a fragment of biotin), is any size that still retains the functionality of the intact capture agent. In some embodiments, a free capture agent (e.g. a fragment of biotin), is any size that still retains some of the functionality of the intact capture agent. In some embodiments, a free capture agent (e.g. a fragment of biotin), is a size that retains between about 30% and about 100% of the functionality of the intact capture agent. In some embodiments, a free capture agent (e.g. a fragment of biotin), is a size that retains about 30%, 40%, 50%, 60%, 70%, 80%, 90% or 100% of the functionality of the intact capture agent.
  • In some embodiments, free capture agent (e.g. free biotin) is added at a concentration from about 0.1 to about 5000 ug/ml. In some embodiments, free capture agent (e.g. free biotin) is added at a concentration of about 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2.5, 5, 10, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 200, 400, 800, 1000, 2000, 4000, 5000 ug/ml or higher. In some embodiments, free capture agent (e.g. free biotin) is added at a concentration from about 10 to about 100 ug/ml. In some embodiments, free capture agent (e.g. free biotin) is added at a concentration of about 10, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, or 30 ug/ml. In some embodiments, free capture agent (e.g. free biotin) is added to a composition comprising an extended oligonucleotides species at a concentration of about 25 ug/ml.
  • The term “solid support” or “solid phase” as used herein refers to an insoluble material with which nucleic acid can be associated. Examples of solid supports for use with processes described herein include, without limitation, arrays, beads (e.g., paramagnetic beads, magnetic beads, microbeads, nanobeads) and particles (e.g., microparticles, nanoparticles). Particles or beads having a nominal, average or mean diameter of about 1 nanometer to about 500 micrometers can be utilized, such as those having a nominal, mean or average diameter, for example, of about 10 nanometers to about 100 micrometers; about 100 nanometers to about 100 micrometers; about 1 micrometer to about 100 micrometers; about 10 micrometers to about 50 micrometers; about 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800 or 900 nanometers; or about 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500 micrometers. The term “paramagnetic” as used herein refers to magnetism that generally occurs only in the presence of an externally applied magnetic field. Thus, a paramagnetic bead can be attracted to an externally applied magnetic source, but typically does not exert its own magnetic field in the absence of an externally applied magnetic field. Magnetic beads comprising a ferrous core, generally exert their own magnetic field.
  • A solid support can comprise virtually any insoluble or solid material, and often a solid support composition is selected that is insoluble in water. For example, a solid support can comprise or consist essentially of silica gel, glass (e.g. controlled-pore glass (CPG)), nylon, Sephadex®, Sepharose®, cellulose, a metal surface (e.g. steel, gold, silver, aluminum, silicon and copper), a magnetic material, a plastic material (e.g., polyethylene, polypropylene, polyamide, polyester, polyvinylidenedifluoride (PVDF)) and the like. Beads or particles may be swellable (e.g., polymeric beads such as Wang resin) or non-swellable (e.g., CPG). Commercially available examples of beads include without limitation Wang resin, Merrifield resin and Dynabeads® and SoluLink. A solid phase (e.g. a bead) can comprise a member of a binding pair (e.g. avidin, streptavidin or derivative thereof). In some embodiments a solid phase is substantially hydrophilic. In some embodiments a solid phase (e.g. a bead) is substantially hydrophobic. In some embodiments a solid phase comprises a member of a binding pair (e.g. avidin, streptavidin or derivative thereof) and is substantially hydrophobic or substantially hydrophilic. In some embodiments, a solid phase comprises a member of a binding pair (e.g. avidin, streptavidin or derivative thereof) and has a binding capacity greater than about 1350 pmoles of free capture agent (e.g. free biotin) per mg solid support. In some embodiments the binding capacity of solid phase comprising a member of a binding pair is greater than 800, 900, 1000, 1100, 1200, 1250, 1300, 1350, 1400, 1450, 1500, 1600, 1800, 2000 pmoles of free capture agent per mg solid support.
  • A solid support may be provided in a collection of solid supports. A solid support collection comprises two or more different solid support species. The term “solid support species” as used herein refers to a solid support in association with one particular solid phase nucleic acid species or a particular combination of different solid phase nucleic acid species. In certain embodiments, a solid support collection comprises 2 to 10,000 solid support species, 10 to 1,000 solid support species or about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000 or 10000 unique solid support species. The solid supports (e.g., beads) in the collection of solid supports may be homogeneous (e.g., all are Wang resin beads) or heterogeneous (e.g., some are Wang resin beads and some are magnetic beads). Each solid support species in a collection of solid supports sometimes is labeled with a specific identification tag. An identification tag for a particular solid support species sometimes is a nucleic acid (e.g., “solid phase nucleic acid”) having a unique sequence in certain embodiments. An identification tag can be any molecule that is detectable and distinguishable from identification tags on other solid support species.
  • Solid phase nucleic acid often is single-stranded and is of any type suitable for hybridizing nucleic acid (e.g., DNA, RNA, analogs thereof (e.g., peptide nucleic acid (PNA)), chimeras thereof (e.g., a single strand comprises RNA bases and DNA bases) and the like). Solid phase nucleic acid is associated with the solid support in any manner known by the person of ordinary skill and suitable for hybridization of solid phase nucleic acid to nucleic acid. Solid phase nucleic acid may be in association with a solid support by a covalent linkage or a non-covalent interaction. Non-limiting examples of non-covalent interactions include hydrophobic interactions (e.g., C18 coated solid support and tritylated nucleic acid), polar interactions, and the like. Solid phase nucleic acid may be associated with a solid support by different methodology known to the person of ordinary skill, which include without limitation (i) sequentially synthesizing nucleic acid directly on a solid support, and (ii) synthesizing nucleic acid, providing the nucleic acid in solution phase and linking the nucleic acid to a solid support. Solid phase nucleic acid may be linked covalently at various sites in the nucleic acid to the solid support, such as (i) at a 1′, 2′, 3′, 4′ or 5′ position of a sugar moiety or (ii) a pyrimidine or purine base moiety, of a terminal or non-terminal nucleotide of the nucleic acid, for example. The 5′ terminal nucleotide of the solid phase nucleic acid is linked to the solid support in certain embodiments.
  • After extended oligonucleotides are associated with a solid phase (i.e. post capture), unextended oligonucleotides and/or unwanted reaction components that do not bind often are washed away or degraded. In some embodiments, a solid phase is washed after extended oligonucleotide species are captured. In some embodiments, a solid phase is washed after extended oligonucleotide species are captured and prior to releasing the extended oligonucleotide species. In some embodiments, washing a solid phase removes salts. In some embodiments, washing a solid phase removes salts that produce interfering adducts in mass spectrometry. In some embodiments, washing a solid phase removes salts that interfere with mass spectrometry. In some embodiments, extended oligonucleotide species are contacted with an anion exchange resin after washing the solid phase. In some embodiments, extended oligonucleotide species are not contacted with an anion exchange resin after washing the solid phase. In some embodiments, extended oligonucleotide species are captured on a solid phase, washed one or more times, released from the solid phase and are not contacted with an anion exchange resin. Extended oligonucleotides may be treated by one or more procedures prior to detection. For example, extended oligonucleotides may be conditioned prior to detection (e.g., homogenizing the type of cation and/or anion associated with captured nucleic acid by ion exchange). Extended oligonucleotides may be released from a solid phase prior to detection in certain embodiments.
  • In some embodiments, an extended oligonucleotide (e.g. an extended oligonucleotide species) is in association with a capture agent comprising one member of a binding pair (e.g., biotin or avidin/streptavidin). In certain embodiments, an extended oligonucleotide comprising a capture agent is captured by contacting a binding pair member with a solid phase comprising the other member of the binding pair (e.g., avidin/streptavidin or biotin). In certain embodiments an extended oligonucleotide is biotinylated, and the biotin moiety with extended oligonucleotide product is captured by contacting the biotin moiety with an avidin or streptavidin coated solid phase. In some embodiments, an extended oligonucleotide comprises a mass distinguishable tag, and in certain embodiments, detecting the mass distinguishable tag comprises detecting the presence or absence of an extended oligonucleotide. In some embodiments, the extended oligonucleotide is extended by one, two, three, or more nucleotides. In some embodiments, an extended oligonucleotide bound to a solid phase is released from the solid phase by competition with a competitor and the extended oligonucleotide is detected. In some embodiments, an extended oligonucleotide bound to a solid phase is released from the solid phase by competition with a competitor and a distinguishable label in, or associated with, the extended oligonucleotide is detected. In some embodiments, an extended oligonucleotide bound to a solid phase is released from the solid phase by competition with a competitor, a distinguishable label is released from the extended oligonucleotide, and the released distinguishable label is detected.
  • Distinguishable Labels and Release
  • As used herein, the terms “distinguishable labels” and “distinguishable tags” refer to types of labels or tags that can be distinguished from one another and used to identify the nucleic acid to which the tag is attached. A variety of types of labels and tags may be selected and used for multiplex methods provided herein. For example, oligonucleotides, amino acids, small organic molecules, light-emitting molecules, light-absorbing molecules, light-scattering molecules, luminescent molecules, isotopes, enzymes and the like may be used as distinguishable labels or tags. In certain embodiments, oligonucleotides, amino acids, and/or small molecule organic molecules of varying lengths, varying mass-to-charge ratios, varying electrophoretic mobility (e.g., capillary electrophoresis mobility) and/or varying mass also can be used as distinguishable labels or tags. Accordingly, a fluorophore, radioisotope, colormetric agent, light emitting agent, chemiluminescent agent, light scattering agent, and the like, may be used as a label. The choice of label may depend on the sensitivity required, ease of conjugation with a nucleic acid, stability requirements, and available instrumentation. The term “distinguishable feature,” as used herein with respect to distinguishable labels and tags, refers to any feature of one label or tag that can be distinguished from another label or tag (e.g., mass and others described herein). In some embodiments, label composition of the distinguishable labels and tags can be selected and/or designed to result in optimal flight behavior in a mass spectrometer and to allow labels and tags to be distinguished at high multiplexing levels.
  • For methods used herein, a particular target nucleic acid species, amplicon species and/or extended oligonucleotide species often is paired with a distinguishable detectable label species, such that the detection of a particular label or tag species directly identifies the presence of a particular target nucleic acid species, amplicon species and/or extended oligonucleotide species in a particular composition. Accordingly, one distinguishable feature of a label species can be used, for example, to identify one target nucleic acid species in a composition, as that particular distinguishable feature corresponds to the particular target nucleic acid. Labels and tags may be attached to a nucleic acid (e.g., oligonucleotide) by any known methods and in any location (e.g., at the 5′ of an oligonucleotide). Thus, reference to each particular label species as “specifically corresponding” to each particular target nucleic acid species, as used herein, refers to one label species being paired with one target species. When the presence of a label species is detected, then the presence of the target nucleic acid species associated with that label species thereby is detected, in certain embodiments.
  • The term “species,” as used herein with reference to a distinguishable tag or label (collectively, “label”), refers to one label that is detectably distinguishable from another label. In certain embodiments, the number of label species, includes, but is not limited to, about 2 to about 10000 label species, about 2 to about 500,000 label species, about 2 to about 100,000, about 2 to about 50000, about 2 to about 10000, and about 2 to about 500 label species, or sometimes about 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 325, 350, 375, 400, 425, 450, 475, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000, 5000, 6000, 7000, 8000, 9000, 10000, 20000, 30000, 40000, 50000, 60000, 70000, 80000, 90000, 100000, 200000, 300000, 400000 or 500000 label species.
  • The term “mass distinguishable label” as used herein refers to a label that is distinguished by mass as a feature. A variety of mass distinguishable labels can be selected and used, such as for example a compomer, amino acid and/or a concatemer. Different lengths and/or compositions of nucleotide strings (e.g., nucleic acids; compomers), amino acid strings (e.g., peptides; polypeptides; compomers) and/or concatemers can be distinguished by mass and be used as labels. Any number of units can be utilized in a mass distinguishable label, and upper and lower limits of such units depends in part on the mass window and resolution of the system used to detect and distinguish such labels. Thus, the length and composition of mass distinguishable labels can be selected based in part on the mass window and resolution of the detector used to detect and distinguish the labels.
  • The term “compomer” as used herein refers to the composition of a set of monomeric units and not the particular sequence of the monomeric units. For a nucleic acid, the term “compomer” refers to the base composition of the nucleic acid with the monomeric units being bases. The number of each type of base can be denoted by Bn (i.e.: AaCcGgTt, with A0C0G0T0 representing an “empty” compomer or a compomer containing no bases). A natural compomer is a compomer for which all component monomeric units (e.g., bases for nucleic acids and amino acids for polypeptides) are greater than or equal to zero. In certain embodiments, at least one of a, c, g or t equals 1 or more (e.g., A0C0G1T0, A1C0G1T0, A2C1G1T2, A3C2G1T5). For purposes of comparing sequences to determine sequence variations, in the methods provided herein, “unnatural” compomers containing negative numbers of monomeric units can be generated by an algorithm utilized to process data. For polypeptides, a compomer refers to the amino acid composition of a polypeptide fragment, with the number of each type of amino acid similarly denoted. A compomer species can correspond to multiple sequences. For example, the compomer A2G3 corresponds to the sequences AGGAG, GGGAA, AAGGG, GGAGA and others. In general, there is a unique compomer corresponding to a sequence, but more than one sequence can correspond to the same compomer. In certain embodiments, one compomer species is paired with (e.g., corresponds to) one target nucleic acid species, amplicon species and/or oligonucleotide species. Different compomer species have different base compositions, and distinguishable masses, in embodiments herein (e.g., A0C0G5T0 and A0C5G0T0 are different and mass-distinguishable compomer species). In some embodiments, a set of compomer species differ by base composition and have the same length. In certain embodiments, a set of compomer species differ by base compositions and length.
  • A nucleotide compomer used as a mass distinguishable label can be of any length for which all compomer species can be detectably distinguished, for example about 1 to 15, 5 to 20, 1 to 30, 5 to 35, 10 to 30, 15 to 30, 20 to 35, 25 to 35, 30 to 40, 35 to 45, 40 to 50, or 25 to 50, or sometimes about 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 85 or 100, nucleotides in length. A peptide or polypeptide compomer used as a mass distinguishable label can be of any length for which all compomer species can be detectably distinguished, for example about 1 to 20, 10 to 30, 20 to 40, 30 to 50, 40 to 60, 50 to 70, 60 to 80, 70 to 90, or 80 to 100 amino acids in length. As noted above, the limit to the number of units in a compomer often is limited by the mass window and resolution of the detection method used to distinguish the compomer species.
  • The terms “concatemer” and “concatemer” are used herein synonymously (collectively “concatemer”), and refer to a molecule that contains two or more units linked to one another (e.g., often linked in series; sometimes branched in certain embodiments). A concatemer sometimes is a nucleic acid and/or an artificial polymer in some embodiments. A concatemer can include the same type of units (e.g., a homoconcatemer) in some embodiments, and sometimes a concatemer can contain different types of units (e.g., a heteroconcatemer). A concatemer can contain any type of unit(s), including nucleotide units, amino acid units, small organic molecule units (e.g., trityl), particular nucleotide sequence units, particular amino acid sequence units, and the like. A homoconcatemer of three particular sequence units ABC is ABCABCABC, in an embodiment. A concatemer can contain any number of units so long as each concatemer species can be detectably distinguished from other species. For example, a trityl concatemer species can contain about 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 275, 300, 325, 350, 375, 400, 425, 450, 475, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900 or 1000 trityl units, in some embodiments.
  • A distinguishable label can be released from a nucleic acid product (e.g., an extended oligonucleotide) in certain embodiments. The linkage between the distinguishable label and a nucleic acid can be of any type that can be transcribed and cleaved, cleaved and allow for detection of the released label or labels (e.g., U.S. patent application publication no. US20050287533A1, entitled “Target-Specific Compomers and Methods of Use,” naming Ehrich et al.). Such linkages and methods for cleaving the linkages (“cleaving conditions”) are known. In certain embodiments, a label can be separated from other portions of a molecule to which it is attached. In some embodiments, a label (e.g., a compomer) is cleaved from a larger string of nucleotides (e.g., extended oligonucleotides). Non-limiting examples of linkages include linkages that can be cleaved by a nuclease (e.g., ribonuclease, endonuclease); linkages that can be cleaved by a chemical; linkages that can be cleaved by physical treatment; and photocleavable linkers that can be cleaved by light (e.g., o-nitrobenzyl, 6-nitroveratryloxycarbonyl, 2-nitrobenzyl group). Photocleavable linkers provide an advantage when using a detection system that emits light (e.g., matrix-assisted laser desorption ionization (MALDI) mass spectrometry involves the laser emission of light), as cleavage and detection are combined and occur in a single step.
  • In certain embodiments, a label can be part of a larger unit, and can be separated from that unit prior to detection. For example, in certain embodiments, a label is a set of contiguous nucleotides in a larger nucleotide sequence, and the label is cleaved from the larger nucleotide sequence. In such embodiments, the label often is located at one terminus of the nucleotide sequence or the nucleic acid in which it resides. In some embodiments, the label, or a precursor thereof, resides in a transcription cassette that includes a promoter sequence operatively linked with the precursor sequence that encodes the label. In the latter embodiments, the promoter sometimes is a RNA polymerase-recruiting promoter that generates an RNA that includes or consists of the label. An RNA that includes a label can be cleaved to release the label prior to detection (e.g., with an RNase).
  • In certain embodiments, a distinguishable label or tag is not cleaved from an extended oligonucleotide, and in some embodiments, the distinguishable label or tag comprises a capture agent. In certain embodiments, detecting a distinguishable feature includes detecting the presence or absence of an extended oligonucleotide, and in some embodiments an extended oligonucleotide includes a capture agent. In some embodiments an extended oligonucleotide is released from a solid phase by competition with a competitor, and in certain embodiments competition with a competitor comprises contacting a solid phase with a competitor. In some embodiments, releasing an extended oligonucleotide from a solid phase is carried out under elevated temperature conditions. In certain embodiments, the elevated temperature conditions are between about 80 degrees Celsius and about 100 degrees Celsius. In some embodiments, releasing the extend oligonucleotides from the capture agent occurs under elevated temperature conditions for between about 1 minute and about 10 minutes. In certain embodiments, releasing an extended oligonucleotides from a solid phase includes treatment with a competitor (e.g., free capture agent, competing fragment of free capture agent, multimer of free capture agent, any molecule that specifically competes for binding to the solid phase, the like and combinations thereof) for about 5 minutes at about 90 degrees Celsius. In some embodiments, a competitor is biotin and a solid phase comprises avidin/streptavidin, and in certain embodiments a competitor is avidin/streptavidin and a solid phase comprises biotin.
  • In certain embodiments, a multiplex assay includes some oligonucleotides that are extended and some oligonucleotides that are not extended after extension. In such embodiments, oligonucleotides that are not extended often do not bind to a solid phase, and in some embodiments, oligonucleotides that are not extended can interact with a solid phase.
  • In some embodiments, the ratio of competitor to capture agent attached to a nucleotide or nucleic acid (e.g., extended oligonucleotide with incorporated capture agent (e.g., biotin)) can be 1:1. In certain embodiments, a competitor may be used in excess of capture agent associated with an oligonucleotide, and in some embodiments, capture agent associated with an oligonucleotide may be in excess of competitor. In such embodiments, the excess sometimes is about a 5-fold excess to about a 50,000-fold excess (e.g., about a 10-fold excess, about a 100-fold excess, about a 1,000-fold excess, or about a 10,000-fold excess).
  • Detection and Degree of Multiplexing
  • The term “detection” of a label as used herein refers to identification of a label species. Any suitable detection device can be used to distinguish label species in a sample. Detection devices suitable for detecting mass distinguishable labels, include, without limitation, certain mass spectrometers and gel electrophoresis devices. Examples of mass spectrometry formats include, without limitation, Matrix-Assisted Laser Desorption/Ionization Time-of-Flight (MALDI-TOF) Mass Spectrometry (MS), MALDI orthogonal TOF MS (OTOF MS; two dimensional), Laser Desorption Mass Spectrometry (LDMS), Electrospray (ES) MS, Ion Cyclotron Resonance (ICR) MS, and Fourier Transform MS. Methods described herein are readily applicable to mass spectrometry formats in which analyte is volatized and ionized (“ionization MS,” e.g., MALDI-TOF MS, LDMS, ESMS, linear TOF, OTOF). Orthogonal ion extraction MALDI-TOF and axial MALDI-TOF can give rise to relatively high resolution, and thereby, relatively high levels of multiplexing. Detection devices suitable for detecting light-emitting, light absorbing and/or light-scattering labels, include, without limitation, certain light detectors and photodetectors (e.g., for fluorescence, chemiluminescence, absorbtion, and/or light scattering labels).
  • Methods provided herein allow for high-throughput detection or discovery of target nucleic acid species in a plurality of target nucleic acids. Multiplexing refers to the simultaneous detection of more than one target nucleic acid species. General methods for performing multiplexed reactions in conjunction with mass spectrometry, are known (see, e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,043,031, 5,547,835 and International PCT application No. WO 97/37041). Multiplexing provides an advantage that a plurality of target nucleic acid species (e.g., some having different sequence variations) can be identified in as few as a single mass spectrum, as compared to having to perform a separate mass spectrometry analysis for each individual target nucleic acid species. Methods provided herein lend themselves to high-throughput, highly-automated processes for analyzing sequence variations with high speed and accuracy, in some embodiments. In some embodiments, methods herein may be multiplexed at high levels in a single reaction. Multiplexing is applicable when the genotype at a polymorphic locus is not known, and in some embodiments, the genotype at a locus is known.
  • In certain embodiments, the number of target nucleic acid species multiplexed include, without limitation, about 2 to 1,000 species, and sometimes about 1-3, 3-5, 5-7, 7-9, 9-11, 11-13, 13-15, 15-17, 17-19, 19-21, 21-23, 23-25, 25-27, 27-29, 29-31, 31-33, 33-35, 35-37, 37-39, 39-41, 41-43, 43-45, 45-47, 47-49, 49-51, 51-53, 53-55, 55-57, 57-59, 59-61, 61-63, 63-65, 65-67, 67-69, 69-71, 71-73, 73-75, 75-77, 77-79, 79-81, 81-83, 83-85, 85-87, 87-89, 89-91, 91-93, 93-95, 95-97, 97-101, 101-103, 103-105, 105-107, 107-109, 109-111, 111-113, 113-115, 115-117, 117-119, 121-123, 123-125, 125-127, 127-129, 129-131, 131-133, 133-135, 135-137, 137-139, 139-141, 141-143, 143-145, 145-147, 147-149, 149-151, 151-153, 153-155, 155-157, 157-159, 159-161, 161-163, 163-165, 165-167, 167-169, 169-171, 171-173, 173-175, 175-177, 177-179, 179-181, 181-183, 183-185, 185-187, 187-189, 189-191, 191-193, 193-195, 195-197, 197-199, 199-201, 201-203, 203-205, 205-207, 207-209, 209-211, 211-213, 213-215, 215-217, 217-219, 219-221, 221-223, 223-225, 225-227, 227-229, 229-231, 231-233, 233-235, 235-237, 237-239, 239-241, 241-243, 243-245, 245-247, 247-249, 249-251, 251-253, 253-255, 255-257, 257-259, 259-261, 261-263, 263-265, 265-267, 267-269, 269-271, 271-273, 273-275, 275-277, 277-279, 279-281, 281-283, 283-285, 285-287, 287-289, 289-291, 291-293, 293-295, 295-297, 297-299, 299-301, 301-303, 303-305, 305-307, 307-309, 309-311, 311-313, 313-315, 315-317, 317-319, 319-321, 321-323, 323-325, 325-327, 327-329, 329-331, 331-333, 333-335, 335-337, 337-339, 339-341, 341-343, 343-345, 345-347, 347-349, 349-351, 351-353, 353-355, 355-357, 357-359, 359-361, 361-363, 363-365, 365-367, 367-369, 369-371, 371-373, 373-375, 375-377, 377-379, 379-381, 381-383, 383-385, 385-387, 387-389, 389-391, 391-393, 393-395, 395-397, 397-401, 401-403, 403-405, 405-407, 407-409, 409-411, 411-413, 413-415, 415-417, 417-419, 419-421, 421-423, 423-425, 425-427, 427-429, 429-431, 431-433, 433-435, 435-437, 437-439, 439-441, 441-443, 443-445, 445-447, 447-449, 449-451, 451-453, 453-455, 455-457, 457-459, 459-461, 461-463, 463-465, 465-467, 467-469, 469-471, 471-473, 473-475, 475-477, 477-479, 479-481, 481-483, 483-485, 485-487, 487-489, 489-491, 491-493, 493-495, 495-497, 497-501 species or more. Design methods for achieving resolved mass spectra with multiplexed assays can include primer and oligonucleotide design methods and reaction design methods. For primer and oligonucleotide design in multiplexed assays, the same general guidelines for primer design applies for uniplexed reactions, such as avoiding false priming and primer dimers, only more primers are involved for multiplex reactions. In addition, analyte peaks in the mass spectra for one assay are sufficiently resolved from a product of any assay with which that assay is multiplexed, including pausing peaks and any other by-product peaks. Also, analyte peaks optimally fall within a user-specified mass window, for example, within a range of 5,000-8,500 Da. Extension oligonucleotides can be designed with respect to target sequences of a given SNP strand, in some embodiments. In such embodiments, the length often is between limits that can be, for example, user-specified (e.g., 17 to 24 bases or 17-26 bases) and often do not contain bases that are uncertain in the target sequence. Hybridization strength sometimes is gauged by calculating the sequence-dependent melting (or hybridization/dissociation) temperature, Tm. A particular primer choice may be disallowed, or penalized relative to other choices of primers, because of its hairpin potential, false priming potential, primer-dimer potential, low complexity regions, and problematic subsequences such as GGGG. Methods and software for designing extension oligonucleotides (e.g., according to these criteria) are known, and include, for example, SpectroDESIGNER (Sequenom).
  • As used herein, the term “call rate” or “calling rate” refers to the number of calls (e.g., genotypes determined) obtained relative to the number of calls attempted to be obtained. In other words, for a 12-plex reaction, if 10 genotypes are ultimately determined from conducting methods provided herein, then 10 calls have been obtained with a call rate of 10/12. Different events can lead to failure of a particular attempted assay, and lead to a call rate lower than 100%. Occasionally, in the case of a mix of dNTPs and ddNTPs for termination, inappropriate extension products can occur by pausing of a polymerase after incorporation of one non-terminating nucleotide (i.e., dNTP), resulting in a prematurely terminated extension primer, for example. The mass difference between this falsely terminated and a correctly terminated primer mass extension reaction at the polymorphic site sometimes is too small to resolve consistently and can lead to miscalls if an inappropriate termination mix is used. The mass differences between a correct termination and a false termination (i.e., one caused by pausing) as well between a correct termination and salt adducts as well as a correct termination and an unspecific incorporation often is maximized to reduce the number of miscalls.
  • Multiplex assay accuracy may be determined by assessing the number of calls obtained (e.g., correctly or accurately assessed) and/or the number of false positive and/or false negative events in one or more assays. Accuracy also may be assessed by comparison with the accuracy of corresponding uniplex assays for each of the targets assessed in the multiplex assay. In certain embodiments, one or more methods may be used to determine a call rate. For example, a manual method may be utilized in conjunction with an automated or computer method for making calls, and in some embodiments, the rates for each method may be summed to calculate an overall call rate. In certain embodiments, accuracy or call rates, when multiplexing two or more target nucleic acids (e.g., fifty or more target nucleic acids), can be about 99% or greater, 98%, 97%, 96%, 95%, 94%, 93%, 92%, 91%, 90%, 89%, 87-88%, 85-86%, 83-84%, 81-82%, 80%, 78-79% or 76-77%, for example. In some embodiments, a call rate for each target species in a multiplex assay that includes about 2 to 200 target species is greater than or equal to 80% or more (e.g., 81%, 82%, 83%, 84%, 85%, 86%, 87%, 88%, 89%, 90%, 91%, 92%, 93%, 94%, 95%, 96%, 97%, 98%, 99% or greater).
  • In certain embodiments the error rate may be determined based on the call rate or rate of accuracy. For example, the error rate may be the number of calls made in error. In some embodiments, for example, the error rate may be 100% less the call rate or rate of accuracy. The error rate may also be referred to as the “fail rate.” Identification of false positives and/or false negatives can readjust both the call and error rates. In certain embodiments running more assays can also help in identifying false positives and/or false negatives, thereby adjusting the call and/or error rates. In certain embodiments, error rates, when multiplexing two or more target nucleic acids (e.g., fifty or more target nucleic acids), can be about 1% or less, 2%, 3%, 4%, 5%, 6%, 7%, 8%, 9%, 10%, 11%, 12%, 13%, 14%, 15%, 16%, 17%, 18%, 19%, 20%, 21%, 22%, 23%, 24% or 25%, for example.
  • Applications
  • Following are examples of non-limiting applications of multiplex technology described herein.
  • 1. Detection of Sequence Variations (e.g. Genetic Variants)
  • Provided are improved methods for identifying the genomic basis of disease and markers thereof. The sequence variation (e.g. genetic variant) candidates that can be identified by the methods provided herein include sequences containing sequence variations that are polymorphisms. Polymorphisms include both naturally occurring, somatic sequence variations and those arising from mutation. Polymorphisms include but are not limited to: sequence microvariants where one or more nucleotides in a localized region vary from individual to individual, insertions and deletions which can vary in size from one nucleotides to millions of bases, and microsatellite or nucleotide repeats which vary by numbers of repeats. Nucleotide repeats include homogeneous repeats such as dinucleotide, trinucleotide, tetranucleotide or larger repeats, where the same sequence in repeated multiple times, and also heteronucleotide repeats where sequence motifs are found to repeat. For a given locus the number of nucleotide repeats can vary depending on the individual.
  • A polymorphic marker or site is the locus at which divergence occurs. Such a site can be as small as one base pair (an SNP). Polymorphic markers include, but are not limited to, restriction fragment length polymorphisms (RFLPs), variable number of tandem repeats (VNTR's), hypervariable regions, minisatellites, dinucleotide repeats, trinucleotide repeats, tetranucleotide repeats and other repeating patterns, simple sequence repeats and insertional elements, such as Alu. Polymorphic forms also are manifested as different Mendelian alleles for a gene. Polymorphisms can be observed by differences in proteins, protein modifications, RNA expression modification, DNA and RNA methylation, regulatory factors that alter gene expression and DNA replication, and any other manifestation of alterations in genomic nucleic acid or organelle nucleic acids.
  • Furthermore, numerous genes have polymorphic regions. Since individuals have any one of several allelic variants of a polymorphic region, individuals can be identified based on the type of allelic variants of polymorphic regions of genes. This can be used, for example, for forensic purposes. In other situations, it is crucial to know the identity of allelic variants that an individual has. For example, allelic differences in certain genes, for example, major histocompatibility complex (MHC) genes, are involved in graft rejection or graft versus host disease in bone marrow transportation. Accordingly, it is highly desirable to develop rapid, sensitive, and accurate methods for determining the identity of allelic variants of polymorphic regions of genes or genetic lesions. A method or a kit as provided herein can be used to genotype a subject by determining the identity of one or more allelic variants of one or more polymorphic regions in one or more genes or chromosomes of the subject. Genotyping a subject using a method as provided herein can be used for forensic or identity testing purposes and the polymorphic regions can be present in mitochondrial genes or can be short tandem repeats.
  • Single nucleotide polymorphisms (SNPs) are generally biallelic systems, that is, there are two alleles that an individual can have for any particular marker. This means that the information content per SNP marker is relatively low when compared to microsatellite markers, which can have upwards of 10 alleles. SNPs also tend to be very population-specific; a marker that is polymorphic in one population can not be very polymorphic in another. SNPs, found approximately every kilobase (see Wang et al. (1998) Science 280:1077-1082), offer the potential for generating very high density genetic maps, which will be extremely useful for developing haplotyping systems for genes or regions of interest, and because of the nature of SNPs, they can in fact be the polymorphisms associated with the disease phenotypes under study. The low mutation rate of SNPs also makes them excellent markers for studying complex genetic traits.
  • Much of the focus of genomics has been on the identification of SNPs, which are important for a variety of reasons. They allow indirect testing (association of haplotypes) and direct testing (functional variants). They are the most abundant and stable genetic markers. Common diseases are best explained by common genetic alterations, and the natural variation in the human population aids in understanding disease, therapy and environmental interactions.
  • Sensitive detection of somatic mutations is especially valuable to the cancer research community whose interest is the identification of genetic determinants for the initiation and proliferation of tumors. The information gained from a sensitive approach can also be used for profiling mutations to predict patient outcomes and inform a relevant treatment option. In some embodiments, a sensitive detection method, that can detect a genetic variant that represents less than or equal to 5% of its counterpart wild type sequence, is needed. In some embodiments, a detection method that can detect less than or equal to 1% of wild type is implemented. In some embodiments, a detection method that can detect less than or equal to 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.8%, 0.75%, 0.5%, 0.1%, 0.05%, or 0.01% of wild type is implemented. Additionally, within pre-natal diagnostics, this type of method could elucidate paternally derived mutations in utero.
  • In some embodiments, allelic analysis can be performed by generating extended oligonucleotides from nucleic acid targets carrying one or more somatic mutations (e.g., SNPs, disease markers, the like and combinations thereof) of interest. Detecting the presence or absence of a released, extended oligonucleotide representing an allele carrying a somatic mutation can be utilized as a rapid method of screening for the presence or absence of a particular mutation in a target population, in some embodiments. In certain embodiments involving generating an extended oligonucleotide from a mutant allele, the extended oligonucleotide can be detected as the appropriate mutant allele gives rise to an extended oligonucleotide product.
  • 2. Identifying Disease Markers
  • Provided herein are methods for the rapid and accurate identification of sequence variations that are genetic markers of disease, which can be used to diagnose or determine the prognosis of a disease. Diseases characterized by genetic markers can include, but are not limited to, atherosclerosis, obesity, diabetes, autoimmune disorders, and cancer. Diseases in all organisms have a genetic component, whether inherited or resulting from the body's response to environmental stresses, such as viruses and toxins. The ultimate goal of ongoing genomic research is to use this information to develop new ways to identify, treat and potentially cure these diseases. The first step has been to screen disease tissue and identify genomic changes at the level of individual samples. The identification of these “disease” markers is dependent on the ability to detect changes in genomic markers in order to identify errant genes or sequence variants. Genomic markers (all genetic loci including single nucleotide polymorphisms (SNPs), microsatellites and other noncoding genomic regions, tandem repeats, introns and exons) can be used for the identification of all organisms, including humans. These markers provide a way to not only identify populations but also allow stratification of populations according to their response to disease, drug treatment, resistance to environmental agents, and other factors. A disease marker sometimes is a mutation, and can be a relatively rare allele such as, for example, a somatic mutation against the background of a wild type allele (e.g., cancer tissue versus normal tissue, mutant viral type versus normal viral type (e.g. HIV)), in some embodiments. In some embodiments the rare allele or mutation represents less than 5%, 4%, 3%, 2%, 1%, 0.8%, 0.75%, 0.5%, 0.1%, 0.05%, or 0.01% of the wild type. In some embodiment, the rare allele or mutation can represent less than 1% of the wild type.
  • 3. Microbial Identification
  • Provided herein is a process or method for identifying genera, species, strains, clones or subtypes of microorganisms and viruses. The microorganism(s) and viruses are selected from a variety of organisms including, but not limited to, bacteria, fungi, protozoa, ciliates, and viruses. The microorganisms are not limited to a particular genus, species, strain, subtype or serotype or any other classification. The microorganisms and viruses can be identified by determining sequence variations in a target microorganism sequence relative to one or more reference sequences or samples. The reference sequence(s) can be obtained from, for example, other microorganisms from the same or different genus, species strain or serotype or any other classification, or from a host prokaryotic or eukaryotic organism or any mixed population.
  • Identification and typing of pathogens (e.g., bacterial or viral) is critical in the clinical management of infectious diseases. Precise identity of a microbe is used not only to differentiate a disease state from a healthy state, but is also fundamental to determining the source of the infection and its spread and whether and which antibiotics or other antimicrobial therapies are most suitable for treatment. In addition treatment can be monitored. Traditional methods of pathogen typing have used a variety of phenotypic features, including growth characteristics, color, cell or colony morphology, antibiotic susceptibility, staining, smell, serotyping, biochemical typing and reactivity with specific antibodies to identify microbes (e.g., bacteria). All of these methods require culture of the suspected pathogen, which suffers from a number of serious shortcomings, including high material and labor costs, danger of worker exposure, false positives due to mishandling and false negatives due to low numbers of viable cells or due to the fastidious culture requirements of many pathogens. In addition, culture methods require a relatively long time to achieve diagnosis, and because of the potentially life-threatening nature of such infections, antimicrobial therapy is often started before the results can be obtained. Some organisms cannot be maintained in culture or exhibit prohibitively slow growth rates (e.g., up to 6-8 weeks for Mycobacterium tuberculosis).
  • In many cases, the pathogens are present in minor amounts and/or are very similar to the organisms that make up the normal flora, and can be indistinguishable from the innocuous strains by the methods cited above. In these cases, determination of the presence of the pathogenic strain can require the higher resolution afforded by the molecular typing methods provided herein.
  • 4. Detecting the Presence of Viral or Bacterial Nucleic Acid Sequences Indicative of an Infection
  • The methods provided herein can be used to determine the presence of viral or bacterial nucleic acid sequences indicative of an infection by identifying sequence variations that are present in the viral or bacterial nucleic acid sequences relative to one or more reference sequences. The reference sequence(s) can include, but are not limited to, sequences obtained from an infectious organism, related non-infectious organisms, or sequences from host organisms. Viruses, bacteria, fungi and other infectious organisms contain distinct nucleic acid sequences, including sequence variants, which are different from the sequences contained in the host cell. A target DNA sequence can be part of a foreign genetic sequence such as the genome of an invading microorganism, including, for example, bacteria and their phages, viruses, fungi, protozoa, and the like. The processes provided herein are particularly applicable for distinguishing between different variants or strains of a microorganism (e.g., pathogenic, less pathogenic, resistant versus non-resistant and the like) in order, for example, to choose an appropriate therapeutic intervention. Examples of disease-causing viruses that infect humans and animals and that can be detected by a disclosed process include but are not limited to Retroviridae (e.g., human immunodeficiency viruses such as HIV-1 (also referred to as HTLV-III, LAV or HTLV-III/LAV; Ratner et al., Nature, 313:227-284 (1985); Wain Hobson et al., Cell, 40:9-17 (1985), HIV-2 (Guyader et al., Nature, 328:662-669 (1987); European Patent Publication No. 0 269 520; Chakrabarti et al., Nature, 328:543-547 (1987); European Patent Application No. 0 655 501), and other isolates such as HIV-LP (International Publication No. WO 94/00562); Picornaviridae (e.g., polioviruses, hepatitis A virus, (Gust et al., Intervirology, 20:1-7 (1983)); enteroviruses, human coxsackie viruses, rhinoviruses, echoviruses); Calcivirdae (e.g. strains that cause gastroenteritis); Togaviridae (e.g., equine encephalitis viruses, rubella viruses); Flaviridae (e.g., dengue viruses, encephalitis viruses, yellow fever viruses); Coronaviridae (e.g., coronaviruses); Rhabdoviridae (e.g., vesicular stomatitis viruses, rabies viruses); Filoviridae (e.g., ebola viruses); Paramyxoviridae (e.g., parainfluenza viruses, mumps virus, measles virus, respiratory syncytial virus); Orthomyxoviridae (e.g., influenza viruses); Bungaviridae (e.g., Hantaan viruses, bunga viruses, phleboviruses and Nairo viruses); Arenaviridae (hemorrhagic fever viruses); Reoviridae (e.g., reoviruses, orbiviruses and rotaviruses); Birnaviridae; Hepadnaviridae (Hepatitis B virus); Parvoviridae (parvoviruses); Parvoviridae (most adenoviruses); Papovaviridae (papilloma viruses, polyoma viruses); Adenoviridae (most adenoviruses); Herpesviridae (herpes simplex virus type 1 (HSV-1) and HSV-2, varicella zoster virus, cytomegalovirus, herpes viruses; Poxyiridae (variola viruses, vaccinia viruses, pox viruses); Iridoviridae (e.g., African swine fever virus); and unclassified viruses (e.g., the etiological agents of Spongiform encephalopathies, the agent of delta hepatitis (thought to be a defective satellite of hepatitis B virus), the agents of non-A, non-B hepatitis (class 1=internally transmitted; class 2=parenterally transmitted, i.e., Hepatitis C); Norwalk and related viruses, and astroviruses.
  • Examples of infectious bacteria include but are not limited to Helicobacter pyloris, Borelia burgdorferi, Legionella pneumophilia, Mycobacteria sp. (e.g. M. tuberculosis, M. avium, M. intracellulare, M. kansaii, M. gordonae), Salmonella, Staphylococcus aureus, Neisseria gonorrheae, Neisseria meningitidis, Listeria monocytogenes, Streptococcus pyogenes (Group A Streptococcus), Streptococcus agalactiae (Group B Streptococcus), Streptococcus sp. (viridans group), Streptococcus faecalis, Streptococcus bovis, Streptococcus sp. (anaerobic species), Streptococcus pneumoniae, pathogenic Campylobacter sp., Enterococcus sp., Haemophilus influenzae, Bacillus anthracis, Corynebacterium diphtheriae, Corynebacterium sp., Erysipelothrix rhusiopathiae, Clostridium perfringens, Clostridium tetani, Escherichia coli, Enterobacter aerogenes, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Pasturella multocida, Bacteroides sp., Fusobacterium nucleatum, Streptobacillus moniliformis, Treponema pallidium, Treponema pertenue, Leptospira, and Actinomyces israelli and any variants including antibiotic resistance variants
  • Examples of infectious fungi include but are not limited to Cryptococcus neoformans, Histoplasma capsulatum, Coccidioides immitis, Blastomyces dermatitidis, Chlamydia trachomatis, Candida albicans. Other infectious organisms include protists such as Plasmodium falciparum and Toxoplasma gondii.
  • 5. Antibiotic Profiling
  • Methods provided herein can improve the speed and accuracy of detection of nucleotide changes involved in drug resistance, including antibiotic resistance. Genetic loci involved in resistance to isoniazid, rifampin, streptomycin, fluoroquinolones, and ethionamide have been identified [Heym et al., Lancet 344:293 (1994) and Morris et al., J. Infect. Dis. 171:954 (1995)]. A combination of isoniazid (inh) and rifampin (rif) along with pyrazinamide and ethambutol or streptomycin, is routinely used as the first line of attack against confirmed cases of M. tuberculosis [Banerjee et al., Science 263:227 (1994)]. The increasing incidence of such resistant strains necessitates the development of rapid assays to detect them and thereby reduce the expense and community health hazards of pursuing ineffective, and possibly detrimental, treatments. The identification of some of the genetic loci involved in drug resistance has facilitated the adoption of mutation detection technologies for rapid screening of nucleotide changes that result in drug resistance. In addition, the technology facilitates treatment monitoring and tracking or microbial population structures as well as surveillance monitoring during treatment. In addition, correlations and surveillance monitoring of mixed populations can be performed.
  • 6. Haplotyping
  • The methods provided herein can be used to detect haplotypes. In any diploid cell, there are two haplotypes at any gene or other chromosomal segment that contain at least one distinguishing variance. In many well-studied genetic systems, haplotypes are more powerfully correlated with phenotypes than single nucleotide variations. Thus, the determination of haplotypes is valuable for understanding the genetic basis of a variety of phenotypes including disease predisposition or susceptibility, response to therapeutic interventions, and other phenotypes of interest in medicine, animal husbandry, and agriculture.
  • Haplotyping procedures as provided herein permit the selection of a portion of sequence from one of an individual's two homologous chromosomes and to genotype linked SNPs on that portion of sequence. The direct resolution of haplotypes can yield increased information content, improving the diagnosis of any linked disease genes or identifying linkages associated with those diseases.
  • 7. Microsatellites
  • Methods provided herein allow for rapid, unambiguous detection of microsatellite sequence variations. Microsatellites (sometimes referred to as variable number of tandem repeats or VNTRs) are short tandemly repeated nucleotide units of one to seven or more bases, the most prominent among them being di-, tri-, and tetranucleotide repeats. Microsatellites are present every 100,000 bp in genomic DNA (J. L. Weber and P. E. Can, Am. J. Hum. Genet. 44, 388 (1989); J. Weissenbach et al., Nature 359, 794 (1992)). CA dinucleotide repeats, for example, make up about 0.5% of the human extra-mitochondrial genome; CT and AG repeats together make up about 0.2%. CG repeats are rare, most probably due to the regulatory function of CpG islands. Microsatellites are highly polymorphic with respect to length and widely distributed over the whole genome with a main abundance in non-coding sequences, and their function within the genome is unknown. Microsatellites can be important in forensic applications, as a population will maintain a variety of microsatellites characteristic for that population and distinct from other populations which do not interbreed.
  • Many changes within microsatellites can be silent, but some can lead to significant alterations in gene products or expression levels. For example, trinucleotide repeats found in the coding regions of genes are affected in some tumors (C. T. Caskey et al., Science 256, 784 (1992) and alteration of the microsatellites can result in a genetic instability that results in a predisposition to cancer (P. J. McKinnen, Hum. Genet. 175, 197 (1987); J. German et al., Clin. Genet. 35, 57 (1989)).
  • 8. Short Tandem Repeats
  • The methods provided herein can be used to identify short tandem repeat (STR) regions in some target sequences of the human genome relative to, for example, reference sequences in the human genome that do not contain STR regions. STR regions are polymorphic regions that are not related to any disease or condition. Many loci in the human genome contain a polymorphic short tandem repeat (STR) region. STR loci contain short, repetitive sequence elements of 3 to 7 base pairs in length. It is estimated that there are 200,000 expected trimeric and tetrameric STRs, which are present as frequently as once every 15 kb in the human genome (see, e.g., International PCT application No. WO 9213969 A1, Edwards et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 19:4791 (1991); Beckmann et al. (1992) Genomics 12:627-631). Nearly half of these STR loci are polymorphic, providing a rich source of genetic markers. Variation in the number of repeat units at a particular locus is responsible for the observed sequence variations reminiscent of variable nucleotide tandem repeat (VNTR) loci (Nakamura et al. (1987) Science 235:1616-1622); and minisatellite loci (Jeffreys et al. (1985) Nature 314:67-73), which contain longer repeat units, and microsatellite or dinucleotide repeat loci (Luty et al. (1991) Nucleic Acids Res. 19:4308; Litt et al. (1990) Nucleic Acids Res. 18:4301; Litt et al. (1990) Nucleic Acids Res. 18:5921; Luty et al. (1990) Am. J. Hum. Genet. 46:776-783; Tautz (1989) Nucl. Acids Res. 17:6463-6471; Weber et al. (1989) Am. J. Hum. Genet. 44:388-396; Beckmann et al. (1992) Genomics 12:627-631). VNTR typing is a very established tool in microbial typing e.g. M. tuberculosis (MIRU typing).
  • Examples of STR loci include, but are not limited to, pentanucleotide repeats in the human CD4 locus (Edwards et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 19:4791 (1991)); tetranucleotide repeats in the human aromatase cytochrome P-450 gene (CYP19; Polymeropoulos et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 19:195 (1991)); tetranucleotide repeats in the human coagulation factor XIII A subunit gene (F13A1; Polymeropoulos et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 19:4306 (1991)); tetranucleotide repeats in the F13B locus (Nishimura et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 20:1167 (1992)); tetranucleotide repeats in the human c-les/fps, proto-oncogene (FES; Polymeropoulos et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 19:4018 (1991)); tetranucleotide repeats in the LFL gene (Zuliani et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 18:4958 (1990)); trinucleotide repeat sequence variations at the human pancreatic phospholipase A-2 gene (PLA2; Polymeropoulos et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 18:7468 (1990)); tetranucleotide repeat sequence variations in the VWF gene (Ploos et al., Nucl. Acids Res. 18:4957 (1990)); and tetranucleotide repeats in the human thyroid peroxidase (hTPO) locus (Anker et al., Hum. Mol. Genet. 1:137 (1992)).
  • 9. Organism Identification
  • Polymorphic STR loci and other polymorphic regions of genes are sequence variations that are extremely useful markers for human identification, paternity and maternity testing, genetic mapping, immigration and inheritance disputes, zygosity testing in twins, tests for inbreeding in humans, quality control of human cultured cells, identification of human remains, and testing of semen samples, blood stains, microbes and other material in forensic medicine. Such loci also are useful markers in commercial animal breeding and pedigree analysis and in commercial plant breeding. Traits of economic importance in plant crops and animals can be identified through linkage analysis using polymorphic DNA markers. Efficient and accurate methods for determining the identity of such loci are provided herein.
  • 10. Detecting Allelic Variation
  • The methods provided herein allow for high-throughput, fast and accurate detection of allelic variants. Studies of allelic variation involve not only detection of a specific sequence in a complex background, but also the discrimination between sequences with few, or single, nucleotide differences. One method for the detection of allele-specific variants by PCR is based upon the fact that it is difficult for Taq polymerase to synthesize a DNA strand when there is a mismatch between the template strand and the 3′ end of the primer. An allele-specific variant can be detected by the use of a primer that is perfectly matched with only one of the possible alleles; the mismatch to the other allele acts to prevent the extension of the primer, thereby preventing the amplification of that sequence. The methods herein also are applicable to association studies, copy number variations, detection of disease marker and SNP sets for typing and the like.
  • 11. Determining Allelic Frequency
  • The methods herein described are valuable for identifying one or more genetic markers whose frequency changes within the population as a function of age, ethnic group, sex or some other criteria. For example, the age-dependent distribution of ApoE genotypes is known in the art (see, e.g., Schechter et al. (1994) Nature Genetics 6:29-32). The frequencies of sequence variations known to be associated at some level with disease can also be used to detect or monitor progression of a disease state. For example, the N291 S polymorphism (N291 S) of the Lipoprotein Lipase gene, which results in a substitution of a serine for an asparagine at amino acid codon 291, leads to reduced levels of high density lipoprotein cholesterol (HDL-C) that is associated with an increased risk of males for arteriosclerosis and in particular myocardial infarction (see, Reymer et al. (1995) Nature Genetics 10:28-34). In addition, determining changes in allelic frequency can allow the identification of previously unknown sequence variations and ultimately a gene or pathway involved in the onset and progression of disease.
  • 12. Epigenetics
  • The methods provided herein can be used to study variations in a target nucleic acid or protein relative to a reference nucleic acid or protein that are not based on sequence, e.g., the identity of bases or amino acids that are the naturally occurring monomeric units of the nucleic acid or protein. For example, methods provided herein can be used to recognize differences in sequence-independent features such as methylation patterns, the presence of modified bases or amino acids, or differences in higher order structure between the target molecule and the reference molecule, to generate fragments that are cleaved at sequence-independent sites. Epigenetics is the study of the inheritance of information based on differences in gene expression rather than differences in gene sequence. Epigenetic changes refer to mitotically and/or meiotically heritable changes in gene function or changes in higher order nucleic acid structure that cannot be explained by changes in nucleic acid sequence. Examples of features that are subject to epigenetic variation or change include, but are not limited to, DNA methylation patterns in animals, histone modification and the Polycomb-trithorax group (Pc-G/tx) protein complexes (see, e.g., Bird, A., Genes Dev., 16:6-21 (2002)).
  • Epigenetic changes usually, although not necessarily, lead to changes in gene expression that are usually, although not necessarily, inheritable. For example, as discussed further below, changes in methylation patterns is an early event in cancer and other disease development and progression. In many cancers, certain genes are inappropriately switched off or switched on due to aberrant methylation. The ability of methylation patterns to repress or activate transcription can be inherited. The Pc-G/trx protein complexes, like methylation, can repress transcription in a heritable fashion. The Pc-G/trx multiprotein assembly is targeted to specific regions of the genome where it effectively freezes the embryonic gene expression status of a gene, whether the gene is active or inactive, and propagates that state stably through development. The ability of the Pc-G/trx group of proteins to target and bind to a genome affects only the level of expression of the genes contained in the genome, and not the properties of the gene products. The methods provided herein can be used with specific cleavage reagents or specific extension reactions that identify variations in a target sequence relative to a reference sequence that are based on sequence-independent changes, such as epigenetic changes.
  • 13. Methylation Patterns
  • The methods provided herein can be used to detect sequence variations that are epigenetic changes in the target sequence, such as a change in methylation patterns in the target sequence. Analysis of cellular methylation is an emerging research discipline. The covalent addition of methyl groups to cytosine is primarily present at CpG dinucleotides (microsatellites). Although the function of CpG islands not located in promoter regions remains to be explored, CpG islands in promoter regions are of special interest because their methylation status regulates the transcription and expression of the associated gene. Methylation of promoter regions leads to silencing of gene expression. This silencing is permanent and continues through the process of mitosis. Due to its significant role in gene expression, DNA methylation has an impact on developmental processes, imprinting and X-chromosome inactivation as well as tumor genesis, aging, and also suppression of parasitic DNA. Methylation is thought to be involved in the cancerogenesis of many widespread tumors, such as lung, breast, and colon cancer, and in leukemia. There is also a relation between methylation and protein dysfunctions (long Q-T syndrome) or metabolic diseases (transient neonatal diabetes, type 2 diabetes). Bisulfite treatment of genomic DNA can be utilized to analyze positions of methylated cytosine residues within the DNA. Treating nucleic acids with bisulfite deaminates cytosine residues to uracil residues, while methylated cytosine remains unmodified. Thus, by comparing the sequence of a target nucleic acid that is not treated with bisulfite with the sequence of the nucleic acid that is treated with bisulfite in the methods provided herein, the degree of methylation in a nucleic acid as well as the positions where cytosine is methylated can be deduced.
  • Methylation analysis via restriction endonuclease reaction is made possible by using restriction enzymes which have methylation-specific recognition sites, such as HpaII and MSPI. The basic principle is that certain enzymes are blocked by methylated cytosine in the recognition sequence. Once this differentiation is accomplished, subsequent analysis of the resulting fragments can be performed using the methods as provided herein.
  • These methods can be used together in combined bisulfite restriction analysis (COBRA). Treatment with bisulfite causes a loss in BstUI recognition site in amplified PCR product, which causes a new detectable fragment to appear on analysis compared to untreated sample. Methods provided herein can be used in conjunction with specific cleavage of methylation sites to provide rapid, reliable information on the methylation patterns in a target nucleic acid sequence.
  • 14. Resequencing
  • The dramatically growing amount of available genomic sequence information from various organisms increases the need for technologies allowing large-scale comparative sequence analysis to correlate sequence information to function, phenotype, or identity. The application of such technologies for comparative sequence analysis can be widespread, including SNP discovery and sequence-specific identification of pathogens. Therefore, resequencing and high-throughput mutation screening technologies are critical to the identification of mutations underlying disease, as well as the genetic variability underlying differential drug response.
  • Several approaches have been developed in order to satisfy these needs. Current technology for high-throughput DNA sequencing includes DNA sequencers using electrophoresis and laser-induced fluorescence detection. Electrophoresis-based sequencing methods have inherent limitations for detecting heterozygotes and are compromised by GC compressions. Thus a DNA sequencing platform that produces digital data without using electrophoresis can overcome these problems. Matrix-assisted laser desorption/ionization time-of-flight mass spectrometry (MALDI-TOF MS) measures nucleic acid fragments with digital data output. Methods provided herein allow for high-throughput, high speed and high accuracy in the detection of sequence identity and sequence variations relative to a reference sequence. This approach makes it possible to routinely use MALDI-TOF MS sequencing for accurate mutation detection, such as screening for founder mutations in BRCA1 and BRCA2, which are linked to the development of breast cancer.
  • 15. Disease Outbreak Monitoring
  • In times of global transportation and travel outbreaks of pathogenic endemics require close monitoring to prevent their worldwide spread and enable control. DNA based typing by high-throughput technologies enable a rapid sample throughput in a comparatively short time, as required in an outbreak situation (e.g. monitoring in the hospital environment, early warning systems). Monitoring is dependent of the microbial marker region used, but can facilitate monitoring to the genus, species, strain or subtype specific level. Such approaches can be useful in biodefense, in clinical and pharmaceutical monitoring and metagenomics applications (e.g. analysis of gut flora). Such monitoring of treatment progress or failure is described in U.S. Pat. No. 7,255,992, U.S. Pat. No. 7,217,510, U.S. Pat. No. 7,226,739 and U.S. Pat. No. 7,108,974 which are incorporated by reference herein.
  • 16. Vaccine Quality Control and Production Clone Quality Control
  • Methods provided herein can be used to control the identity of recombinant production clones (not limited to vaccines), which can be vaccines or e.g. insulin or any other production clone or biological or medical product.
  • 17. Microbial Monitoring in Pharmacology for Production Control and Quality
  • Methods provided herein can be used to control the quality of pharmacological products by, for example, detecting the presence or absence of certain microorganism target nucleic acids in such products.
  • Kits
  • In some embodiments, provided are kits for carrying out methods described herein. Kits often comprise one or more containers that contain one or more components described herein. A kit comprises one or more components in any number of separate containers, packets, tubes, vials, multiwell plates and the like, or components may be combined in various combinations in such containers. One or more of the following components, for example, may be included in a kit: (i) one or more nucleotides (e.g. terminating nucleotides and/or non-terminating nucleotides); (ii) one or more nucleotides comprising a capture agent; (iii) one or more oligonucleotides (e.g. oligonucleotide primers, one or more extension oligonucleotides, oligonucleotides comprising a tag, oligonucleotides comprising a capture agent); (iv) free capture agent (e.g. free biotin); (v) a solid phase (e.g. a bead) comprising a member of a binding pair (viii); (ix) one or more enzymes (e.g. a polymerase, endonuclease, restriction enzyme, etc.); (x) controls components (e.g. control genomic DNA, primers, synthetic templates, target nucleic acids, etc.) (xi) one or more buffers and (xii) printed matter (e.g. directions, labels, etc).
  • A kit sometimes is utilized in conjunction with a process, and can include instructions for performing one or more processes and/or a description of one or more compositions. A kit may be utilized to carry out a process (e.g., using a solid phase) described herein. Instructions and/or descriptions may be in tangible form (e.g., paper and the like) or electronic form (e.g., computer readable file on a tangle medium (e.g., compact disc) and the like) and may be included in a kit insert. A kit also may include a written description of an internet location that provides such instructions or descriptions.
  • EXAMPLES
  • The examples set forth below illustrate, and do not limit, the technology.
  • Example 1 Pre-PCR Reaction
  • The presented process provides an alternative biochemistry to the regular PCR, which usually has two gene specific primers amplifying the same target. The process is suited for the amplification of target regions e.g. containing a SNP.
  • Approach 1: This method uses only one primer to extend, see FIG. 1. The gene specific extend primer has a 5′ universal PCRTag1R. It is extended on the genomic DNA. The DNA or the PCR Tag1R gene specific extend primer may be biotinylated, to facilitate clean up of the reaction. The extended strand is then ligated to a universal phosphorylated oligonucleotide, which has sequence which is reverse complement of Tag2F (universal PCR primer). To facilitate clean up in the next step, the phosphorylated oligonucleotide has exonuclease resistant nucleotides at its 3′ end. During the exonuclease treatment, all non-ligated extend strands are digested, whereas ligated products are protected and remain in the reaction. A universal PCR is then performed using Tag1R and the Tag2F primers, to amplify multiple targets. An overview of concept-1 is outlined in FIG. 1.
  • Approach 2: In this method, primer extension and ligation takes place in the same reaction. FIG. 2 shows the use of a biotinylated PCRTag3R gene specific primer as an extension primer. The phosphorylated oligonucleotide has a gene specific sequence and binds around 40 bases away from the primer extension site, to the same strand of DNA. Thus, Stoffel DNA polymerase extends the strand, until it reaches the phosphorylated oligonucleotide. Amp ligase (Epicentre) ligates the gene specific sequence of the phosphorylated oligonucleotide to the extended strand. The 3′ end of Phospho oligonucleotide has PCRTag4(RC)F as its universal tag. The biotinylated extended strands are then bound to streptavidin beads. This facilitates clean up of the reaction. Genomic DNA and the gene specific phosphorylated oligonucleotides will get washed away. A universal PCR is then performed using Tag3R and Tag4F as primers, to amplify different genes of interest. An overview of concept-2 is as shown in FIG. 2.
  • The universal PCR products from both the Approach 1 and 2 can be identified using the post-PCR reaction, as shown in FIG. 3. SAP was used to clean up the PCR reaction. Post-PCR reactions were performed using gene specific oligonucleotides binding just before the SNP and the single base extended products were spotted on a chip array and analyzed on mass spectrometry. Alternatively the methods provided herein can be used for post-PCR read-out.
  • Example 2 Pre-PCR Reaction Materials from Example 1 Approach 1:
  • 1a) Extension: A 90 ul reaction was performed with 18 ng plasmid insert, 1× Qiagen PCR buffer with Mg, 2.82 mM of total MgCl2,10 mM Tris, pH 9.5, 50 uM dNTPs, 0.5 uM 5′ PCR tag1R gene specific extension primer, 5.76U Thermosequenase. The thermo cycling conditions used were 2 minutes at 94° C. followed by 45 cycles of 10 second denaturation at 94° C.; 10 seconds annealing at 56° C.; 20 seconds extension at 72° C.
  • 1b) Ligation: 5 ul of extended product was ligated with 500 pmols of a phospho oligonucleotide (reverse complement of the Tag2F primer) which is exonuclease resistant at its 3′ end. The extension product and phospho-oligonucleotide were denatured at 65° C./10 minutes, cooled before volume made to 50 ul with 50 mM Tris-HCl, pH 7.8, 10 mM MgCl2, 10 mM DTT, 1 mM ATP and 50 U T4 RNA Ligase1. Incubation was carried out at 37° C./4 hours, 65° C./20 minutes.
  • 1c) Exonuclease treatment: 10 ul of the ligated product was denatured at 95° C./5 minutes, cooled and diluted with 0.5× exonuclease III buffer containing 20U exonuclease 1 and 100U exonuclease III in a total volume of 20 ul. The reaction was incubated at 37° C./4 hours, 80° C./20 minutes.
  • 1d) Universal PCR: 2 ul of the exonuclease treated product was amplified with 0.4 uM each of M13 forward and reverse primers in a 25 ul reaction containing 1× Qiagen buffer containing 1.5 mM MgCl2,200 uM dNTP and 0.625U Hot star DNA polymerase. The thermo cycling conditions used were 15 minutes at 94° C., followed by 45 cycles of 30 second denaturation at 94° C.; 30 seconds annealing at 55° C. and one minute extension at 72° C. The primers and PCR tag sequences used were:
  • Universal Tag 1R (rs10063237) =
    (SEQ ID NO: 1)
    5′ GGAAACAGCTATGACCATG-(GTAATTGTACTGTGAGTGGC) gene
    specific sequence 3′,
    Universal Tag2 (RC) F =
    (SEQ ID NO: 2)
    5′P-CATGTCGTTTTACAACGTCG*T*G*ddC 3′
    (The * represents exonuclease resistant linkages
    between the nucleotides)
    Tag1R (M13R) =
    (SEQ ID NO: 3)
    5′ GGAAACAGCTATGACCATG 3′
    Tag2F (M13F) =
    (SEQ ID NO: 4)
    5′ CACGACGTTGTAAAACGAC 3′
    rs10063237_E1 (for post-PCR reaction):
    (SEQ ID NO: 5)
    5′TCAAAGAATTATATGGCTAAGG 3′
  • Results from Approach 1 can be seen in FIG. 4.
  • Approach 2:
  • 2a) Extension and Ligation: The 20 ul reaction was carried out with 16-35 ng genomic DNA, 1× Amp ligase buffer(Epicentre), 200 uM dNTP, 10 nM biotinylated extension primer, 50 nM gene specific phospho oligonucleotide, 1U Stoffel fragment DNA polymerase and 4U Amp ligase (Epicentre). The thermo cycling conditions used: 5 minutes at 94° C. followed by 19 cycles of 30 second denaturation at 94° C.; 150 seconds annealing at 58.5° C., with a decrease in temperature by 0.2° C. at every cycle; 45 seconds extension at 72° C. The extension and ligation reaction was treated with 40 ug of proteinase K at 60° C. for 20 minutes.
  • 2b) Bead Clean up: 15 ul of Dyna beads M-280 streptavidin beads were washed three times with 1× binding buffer (5 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5, 1 M NaCl, 0.5 mM EDTA). During all washes, the beads were bound to the magnet and the supernatant then discarded. Two extension reactions were pooled and diluted to get a 1× binding buffer concentration and then mixed with the beads. The beads were incubated at room temperature for 20 minutes, with gentle agitation. The beads were then washed 3 times with 1× wash buffer (10 mM Tris, pH 81 mM EDTA) and 2 times with water. The beads were then treated with 0.1N NaOH at room temperature for 10 minutes. The beads were then washed 2 times with 1× wash buffer and 2 times with water. The beads were finally suspended in 15 ul water.
  • 2c) Universal PCR: 2 ul beads were added to a 25 ul PCR reaction containing 1×PCR Gold buffer (Applied Biosystems), 250 uM dNTP, 2.5 mM MgCl2, and 0.4 uM each of Tag4F and Tag3R primers, 1.25U AmpliTaq Gold DNA polymerase and 0.05% Tween 20. The thermo cycling conditions used were 12 minutes at 94° C. followed by 60 cycles of 30 second denaturation at 94° C.; 30 seconds annealing at 68° C.; 45 seconds extension at 72° C., with a final extension of 72° C. for 2 minutes.
  • The primers and Tag sequences used were:
  • Universal Tag 3R =
    (SEQ ID NO: 6)
    5′ GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAAC-gene specific
    sequence
     3′,
    Universal Tag4 (RC) F =
    (SEQ ID NO: 7)
    5′P-gene specific sequence-
    GCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 3′
    Tag3R =
    (SEQ ID NO: 8)
    5′ GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAAC 3′
    Tag4F =
    (SEQ ID NO: 9)
    5′ CCATGTCATACACCGCCTTCAGAGC 3′
  • Approach 2 gene specific extend primers, phospho oligonucleotides and post-PCR reaction extension primers are listed in Tables 1, 2 and 3 respectively. For Table 1, the PCR tag region is underlined. In Approach 2,5′-Biotinylated and PCR-tagged gene specific-primer is extended on genomic DNA by Stoffel DNA polymerase and simultaneously ligated to a downstream gene specific PCR-tagged phospho oligonucleotide bound on the same strand, by Amp Ligase (Epicentre). Results from Approach 2 are shown in FIG. 5A-5.
  • TABLE 1
    Extension primers used to extend genomic DNA in the extension ligation reaction (non-hybridizing
    regions are underlined)
    SEQ
    ID
    Primer Name 5′Biotin-primer seq NO:
    5′BiotinUF rs1000586 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACTCTCAAACTCCAGAGTGGCC 10
    5′BiotinUF rs10012004 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACAGCAGTGCTTCACACACTTTAG 11
    5′BiotinUF rs10014076 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACGTCCTGATTTCTCCTCCAGAG 12
    5′BiotinUF rs10027673 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACCCCTCTTGCATAAAATGTTGCAG 13
    5′BiotinUF rs10028716 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACCATGAAGAGAAATAGTTCTGAGGTTTCC 14
    5′BiotinNewUF rs10063237 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACCTGATAGTAATTGTACTGTGAGTGGC 15
    5′BiotinUF rs1007716 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACCTAAAAACTTATAATTTTAATAGAGGGTGCATTGAAG 16
    5′BiotinUF rs10131894 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACACGTAAGCACACATCCCCAG 17
    5′BiotinUF rs1014337 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACGATTTCTATCCTCAAAAAGCTTATGGG 18
    5′BiotinUF rs1015731 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACGATGAATCATCTTACTCTTTAGTATGGTTGC 19
    5′BiotinUF rs10164484 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACCCTGCCCTTTAGACAGGAATC 20
    5′BiotinUF rs10251765 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACCATCTGCCTTGATCTCCCTTC 21
    5′BiotinUF rs10265857 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACCCTTCATGCTCTTCTTCCTGC 22
    5′BiotinUF rs1032426 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACGCTATTTTTATAATATTTATTATTTT 23
    AAATAATTCAAAATACAAAAGTAACAC
    5′BiotinUF rs10495556 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACCTAGACATTGGGAATACATAGGAGTG 24
    5′BiotinUF rs10499226 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACAACTTGTACCCAGATGCAGTC 25
    5′BiotinUF rs10505007 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACCTTCTAAGGCTTCAGGGATGAC 26
    5′BiotinUF rs1063087 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACGTACTTGAAAAGAAGCCCGG 27
    5′BiotinUF rs10732346 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACGATCTCTCTACCACCATCAGGG 28
    5′BiotinNewUF rs10742993 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACAGGAGTCACTACATTCAGGGATG 29
    5′BiotinUF rs10882763 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACGTGTCTCAGGTGAAAGTGACTC 30
    5′BiotinNewUF rs10911946 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACCTTCAGGATTATACTGGCAGTTGC 31
    5′BioinUF rs11033260 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACGCTTTGAATGGTATCACCCTCAC 32
    5′BiotinUF rs11240574 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACAAACGCAGTCATCACTCTCC 33
    5′BiotinUF rs11599388 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACGGGAGCGGGAATCTTAAATCC 34
    5′BiotinUF rs11634405 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACGCAACAGGATTCGACTAAGGC 35
    5′BiotinUF rs1222958 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACCATGTATATAGTTTGGCTAGCAGTGAAAG 36
    5′BiotinUF rs12334756 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACGAATCCTACTCCTAAGGTGATGTTG 37
    5′BiotinUF rs1266886 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACCTTCATCAGCAAGCAACTACATTG 38
    5′BiotinNewUF rs12825566 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACGGGTCCAAAACTGCTCATGTC 39
    5′BiotinUF13023380 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACTTTTTCCATGGCTTTTGGGC 40
    5′BiotinUF rs1393257 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACTGTACAGGCAGGTCTTAGAGATG 41
    5′BiotinUF rs1400130 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACGTAGCCAATTCCTTCAGTGCAG 42
    5′BiotinNewUF rs1490492 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACAGGGCTTGTTTCAGCTTGAG 43
    5′BiotinUF rs1567603 5′Biotin-GAGCTGCTGCACCATATTCCTGAACCAAAAGTTTTGTTTAGGTGCCTTCC 44
  • TABLE 2
    Gene-specific phospho oligonucleotides used to ligate the extended strand in the extension ligation
    reaction (non-hybridizing regions are underlined)
    Primer name 5′P-Primer Sequence SEQ ID NO:
    5′P rs1000586 GGGGAGTGTAGGTTCTGGTACCCAGGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 45
    5′P rs10012004 CATCACCTATATCATTATTTACTAAATTATTTTTTCTTCAAACTGACTTAGGCTCTGAA 46
    GGCGGTGTATGACATGG
    5′P rs10014076 CCCTTTTTTCCTAAAAGCCCCCAAACTTTTGGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 47
    5′P rs10027673 CTTTTGTGAGCTGGCTTTTGCTCATCTCGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 48
    5′P rs10028716 CCTATTTGAGTTTTGCTTTTTTGTTTTGGTCTCGGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 49
    5′P rs10063237long GATTTAGACAGAGTCTTACTCTGTCACCAGGGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 50
    5′P rs1007716 CTATACTCTTGCTCGTGGAGTTAATCTCAGAGGGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 51
    5′P rs10131894 CTCAGAAGTGTGGAACAGCTGCCCGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 52
    5′P rs1014337 CTTGGGACTTCAGGTAGACTTAGTTTGAACATCGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 53
    5′P rs1015731 CCATCTACATTAGCTTACCAGGGCTGCGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 54
    5′P rs10164484 CTCTCTAATGTTCCAGAGAAACCCCAGGGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 55
    5′P rs10251765 CGTTTTCTTATGTGTCTGGCCTCATCCGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 56
    5′P rs10265857 GGAGCGCTCCATGAAACACAACAGGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 57
    5′P rs1032426 GTTGACAGTTGATTTTGTAATGCCTCCACGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 58
    5′P rs10495556 CGATGTGATCCTGTGTCAAATAATGACGGGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 59
    5′P rs10499226 CTGAAGGGAATGGCTGGTTTTTAATTTGTAGTGGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 60
    5′P rs10505007 GAAGGTGGGATTACGCCTAACTTTAGGGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 61
    5′P rs1063087 GACTTCATGGCTGGCAGAAAGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 62
    5′P rs10732346 CTGCATTTCTACTGGTAACATGCGCCGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 63
    5′PNew rs10742993 CTATTCAGGTGTCACTTTTATTATGATTATCTAAGGTCAGTGGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 64
    5′P rs10882763 CAGGTCCAGTTCTTGAGTTTCATCCTTTCGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 65
    5′P rs10911946long CCTCTCTGTTTTGTTGAGAAATCCACTCTTGGTCGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 66
    5′P rs11033260 GCAAAATGGGTATGGTTTAGCCAGAAACATGGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 67
    5′P rs11240574 GGTGATGGACCCACTGCCTGGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 68
    5′P rs11599388 GTGACCTGACACTGGTGGGATGGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 69
    5′P rs11634405 GCTTTGTGTGCAAATCACCTATTTTCCTGGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 70
    5′P rs1222958 GGTGAGAGAATATGAAAGCAAAACAGCAACCGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 71
    5′P rs12334756 GGGCTATGTAGACACTTCAAAGGTGTTCGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 72
    5′P rs1266886 GTTTGCTCTAGCTCAATGGCCTCTTAAGGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 73
    5′PNew rs12825566 CCAACACAGTCATCTGATCCCATCTCCGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 74
    5′P rs13023380 GTAGGCAAGGCTGTTCTTTTTTGTGTTGGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 75
    5′P rs1393257 CCATATGCAGTTTTTGTTTTCCCAGTGCGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 76
    5′P rs1400130 CACCATAATAGTTTATCTGCTTCTACTAAAATTATTATTGGCGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 77
    5′PNew rs1490492 CCTCAGAATGAAATCATGCTTTTCTGCTAATTTGTAGGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 78
    5′P rs1567603 CCTTCAGACATACCTTGGGAAAATGTCAGGCTCTGAAGGCGGTGTATGACATGG 79
  • TABLE 3
    Standard post-PCR primers used in the post-PCR assay for the universal PCR readout
    SEQ ID EXT1_ EXT1_
    TERM SNP_ID UEP_DIR UEP_MASS UEP_SEQ 5′-3′ NO: CALL MASS EXT2_CALL EXT2_MASS
    L1 goldPLEX rs10882763 F 4374.9 CCTTCTTCATCCCCC 80 G 4662.1 T 4701.9
    L2 goldPLEX rs12334756 R 4515 GCCCATAAGCCAACA 81 G 4762.2 A 4842.1
    L3 goldPLEX rs1014337 F 4627 GTCCCAAGGGAGAGC 82 G 4914.2 T 4954.1
    L4 goldPLEX rs1063087 R 4875.2 GGTAAAGCCCCTCGAA 83 C 5162.4 A 5202.3
    L5 goldPLEX rs1000586 R 5027.3 CTCCCCACCTGACCCTG 84 G 5274.5 A 5354.4
    L6 goldPLEX rs1400130 R 5118.3 TTATGGTGTCTTTCCCC 85 T 5389.5 C 5405.5
    L7 goldPLEX rs11634405 R 5237.4 CAAAGCAGGTGCACGAA 86 G 5484.6 A 5564.5
    L8 goldPLEX rs12825566 R 5311.5 ACTTCCTCCCTTCTTACT 87 C 5598.7 A 5638.6
    L9 goldPLEX rs10251765 F 5448.5 CCCTTTTGGCTTCCTGGG 88 G 5735.7 T 5775.6
    L10 goldPLEX rs11033260 F 5704.7 CCCATTTTGCGCCATTTAT 89 A 5975.9 G 5991.9
    L11 goldPLEX rs10495556 F 5827.8 GGATCACATCGTGTTAGAC 90 C 6075 T 6154.9
    L12 goldPLEX rs10027673 R 5867.8 ggAAGACGCTTATCATGGT 91 G 6115 A 6194.9
    M1 goldPLEX rs10131894 F 6037.9 ccctTGCATGCATGCGCACA 92 C 6285.1 G 6325.1
    M2 goldPLEX rs1393257 F 6239.1 agGCAATAGAGGGAGTATCA 93 C 6486.3 T 6566.2
    M3 goldPLEX rs10164484 F 6246.1 aaactTCTCCCTCAGCCTACC 94 A 6517.3 G 6533.3
    M4 goldPLEX rs10499226 R 6373.2 CAGAAATACATTTGCCACTAT 95 G 6620.4 C 6660.4
    M5 goldPLEX rs1007716 R 6446.2 gcGCTGTATCCTCAGAGAGTA 96 G 6693.4 A 6773.3
    M6 goldPLEX rs10732346 R 6731.4 GGGAGAATGCATTTCTTTTTCC 97 T 7002.6 C 7018.6
    M7 goldPLEX rs10014076 R 6831.5 GGATACTTCAAGAATAGTAGAG 98 G 7078.7 A 7158.6
    M8 goldPLEX rs1266886 R 6840.4 cccacTCTATTCCCACGTCAGCC 99 T 7111.7 C 7127.7
    M9 goldPLEX rs11240574 F 6954.5 tttaTTTTTCCATCACACGTATG 100 C 7201.7 T 7281.6
    M10 goldPLEX rs11599388 R 7233.7 tttcTAAATCCCCACCCGGCGCAG 101 G 7480.9 A 7560.8
    M11 goldPLEX rs1222958 F 7240.7 gCTCTCACCATTAACTATACAGCA 102 A 7511.9 G 7527.9
    M12 goldPLEX rs10742993 R 7327.8 gttgACAGTTCTCCAAGTCCAGAT 103 T 7599 C 7615
    H1 goldPLEX rs10505007 F 7398.8 ggattACAGATGCCTTCTTGGGTA 104 A 7670 G 7686
    H2 goldPLEX rs10063237 R 7722.1 CAATCAAAGAATTATATGGCTAAGG 105 G 7969.2 A 8049.2
    H3 goldPLEX rs10012004 F 7902.1 cccttTAACACCTATATGGGTTTTTG 106 C 8149.3 T 8229.2
    H4 goldPLEX rs13023380 F 7909.2 gcagcACAGCCTTGCCTACAATGACA 107 A 8180.4 G 8196.4
    H5 goldPLEX rs1490492 F 8098.3 gggCATTCTGAGGAAAATAATGTATG 108 C 8345.5 T 8425.4
    H6 goldPLEX rs10265857 R 8106.3 ggacGAGAGGTCTGAGAGTTTCTGAT 109 T 8377.5 C 8393.5
    H7 goldPLEX rs1567603 F 8265.4 acATAACTCTCAGATAATTAAAGTTGT 110 C 8512.6 T 8592.5
    H8 goldPLEX rs1015731 R 8310.5 atgtTAACAGAAAGCACAATAAAAACA 111 G 8557.7 A 8637.6
    H9 goldPLEX rs10911946 F 8470.5 gggagGAGAGGAACCATAAGATATTAG 112 C 8717.7 T 8797.6
    H10 goldPLEX rs10028716 R 8477.5 cctggTTTTGTCTTCCCTATTTACTGAT 113 T 8748.7 C 8764.7
    H11 goldPLEX rs1032426 F 8672.7 ggacAAAAGTTCTGAATTATTTGGTTTG 114 A 8943.9 G 8959.9
  • Example 3 Post-PCR Reaction after Examples 1 and 2
  • SAP/Post-PCR Reaction: 5 ul Univ PCR was dispensed in a 384 well plate and 2 ul SAP reaction containing 0.6U SAP (shrimp alkaline phosphatase) were added with incubation at 37° C. for 40 minutes and finally inactivation of the enzyme at 85° C. for 5 minutes. Extension reagents were added in 2 ul amounts containing 0.9 mM acyclic terminators and 1.353U post-PCR enzyme. The extension oligonucleotide mixture differed in concentration according to its mass: 0.5 uM of low mass: 4000-5870 daltons, 1.0 uM of medium mass: 6000-7350 daltons and 1.5 uM of high mass: 7400-8700 daltons were added in a final volume of 9 ul. The cycling conditions used for post-PCR reaction were 94° C./30 sec and 40 cycles of an 11 temperature cycle (94° C./5 secs and 5 internal cycles of (52° C./5 sec and 80° C./5 sec) and final extension at 72° C./3 minutes.
  • MALDI-TOF MS: The extension reaction was diluted with 16 ul water and 6 mg CLEAN Resin (Sequenom) was added to desalt the reaction. It was rotated for 2 hours at room temperature. 15 nl of the post-PCR reaction were dispensed robotically onto silicon chips preloaded with matrix (SpectroCHIP®, Sequenom). Mass spectra were acquired using a Mass ARRAY Compact Analyzer (MALDI-TOF mass spectrometer, Sequenom).
  • Example 4 Post-PCR Reaction to Increase Multiplexing and Flexibility in SNP Genotyping
  • The presented process provides a concept for an alternative goldPLEX primer extension post-PCR format to increase multiplexing and flexibility of SNP genotyping. It utilizes allele specific extension primers, with two extension primers per SNP designed to hybridize on the SNP site. Each primer contains a gene and allele specific 3′ nucleotide for specific hybridization to the SNP site of interest and a varied defined 5′ nucleotide sequence which corresponds to a mass tag. The specificity of the assay is determined by the match of the 3′ end of the primer to the template, which will only be extended by DNA polymerase if corresponding to the specific SNP. An overview of the process is outlined in FIG. 6.
  • The extension primers are extended by dNTP incorporation and terminated by a ddNTP or alternatively terminated by ddNTP incorporation without dNTP extension. One or more dNTP and/or ddNTP used during the extension reaction are labeled with a moiety allowing immobilization to a solid support, such as biotin.
  • The extension product is subsequently immobilized on a solid support, such as streptavidin coated beads, where only extended/terminated products will bind. Unextended primers and unwanted reaction components do not bind and are washed away.
  • The 5′ nucleotide sequence or an alternative group which corresponds to a mass tag is cleaved from the extension product, leaving the 3′ section of the extension product bound to the solid support. The cleavage can be achieved with a variety of methods including enzymatic, chemical and physical treatments. The possibility outlined in this example utilizes Endonuclease V to cleave a deoxyinosine within the primer. The reaction cleaves the second phosphodiester bonds 3′ to deoxyinosine releasing an oligonucleotide mass tag.
  • The 5′ nucleotide sequence (mass tag) is then transferred to a chip array and analyzed by mass spectrometry (e.g. MALDI-TOF MS). The presence of a mass signal matching the tag's mass indicates an allele specific primer was extended and therefore the presence of that specific allele.
  • Example 5 Endonuclease V Cleavage of Deoxyinosine
  • Prior to the extension reaction a 35 plex PCR was carried out in a 5 μl reaction volume using the following reagents; 5 ng DNA, 1×PCR buffer, 500 μM each dNTP, 100 nM each PCR primer (as listed in Table 4), 3 mM MgCl2, and 0.15 U Taq (Sequenom). Thermocycling was carried out using the following conditions: 7 minutes at 95° C.; followed by 45 cycles of 20 seconds at 95° C., 30 seconds at 56° C. and 1 minute at 72° C.; and concludes with 3 minutes at 72° C.
  • The PCR reaction was treated with SAP (shrimp alkaline phosphatase) to dephosphorylate unincorporated dNTPs. A 2 μl mixture containing 0.6 U SAP was added to the PCR product and then subjected to 40 minutes at 37° C. and 5 minutes at 85° C.
  • Extension reaction reagents were combined in a 3 μl volume, which was added to the SAP treated PCR product. The total extension reaction contained the following reagents; 1× goldPLEX buffer, 17 μM each biotin ddNTP, 0.8 μM each extension primer (listed in Table 5) and 1× post-goldPLEX enzyme.
  • Thermocycling was carried out using a 200 cycle program consisting of 2 minutes at 94° C.; followed by 40 cycles of 5 seconds at 94° C., followed by 5 cycles of 5 seconds at 52° C., and 5 seconds at 72° C.; and concludes with 3 minutes at 72° C. Extension primer sequences containing the mass tags and resulting masses of the cleaved products corresponding to specific alleles are listed in Table 5.
  • Solulink magnetic streptavidin beads were conditioned by washing three times with 50 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5, 1M NaCl, 0.5 mM EDTA, pH 7.5. The extension reaction was then combined with 300 μg conditioned beads. Beads were incubated at room temperature for 30 minutes with gentle agitation and then pelleted using a magnetic rack. The supernatant was removed. Subsequently the beads were washed 3 times with 50 mM Tris-HCl, 1M NaCl, 0.5 mM EDTA, pH 7.5 and 3 times with water. For each wash step the beads were pelleted and the supernatant removed.
  • The mass tags were cleaved from the extension product by addition of a solution containing 30 U Endonuclease V and 0.4× buffer 4(NEB) and incubation at 37° C. for 1 hour. After incubation the magnetic beads were pelleted using a magnetic rack and the supernatant containing the mass tag products was removed.
  • Desalting was achieved by the addition of 6 mg CLEAN Resin (Sequenom). 15 nl of the cleavage reactions were dispensed robotically onto silicon chips preloaded with matrix (SpectroCHIP®, Sequenom). Mass spectra were acquired using a MassARRAY Compact Analyser (MALDI-TOF mass spectrometer (Sequenom). FIG. 7 shows MALDI-TOF MS spectra for 35 plex genotyping using the post-PCR readout as presented herein.
  • TABLE 4
    PCR primers used in this study
    SNP ID Forward Primer SEQ ID NO: Reverse Primer SEQ ID NO:
    rs11155591 ACGTTGGATGAAAGGCTGATCCAGGTCATC 115 ACGTTGGATGTTCTCTTCAAACCTCCCATC 150
    rs12554258 ACGTTGGATGTTGAGACACGGCACAGCGG 116 ACGTTGGATGTTTTCCTCTTCCTACCCCTC 151
    rs12162441 ACGTTGGATGAAGGTAGGCCTTTAGGAGAG 117 ACGTTGGATGTGGCAACACACGACTGTACT 152
    rs11658800 ACGTTGGATGATGCACAATCGTCCTACTCC 118 ACGTTGGATGTGCTTCCCAGGTCACTATTG 153
    rs13194159 ACGTTGGATGTGAGCCAGGGATATCCTAAC 119 ACGTTGGATGTCCATGAGTGCAGGACTACG 154
    rs1007716 ACGTTGGATGTAATAGAGGGTGCATTGAAG 120 ACGTTGGATGCTCCACGAGCAAGAGTATAG 155
    rs11637827 ACGTTGGATGAAAGAGAGAGAGATCCCTG 121 ACGTTGGATGATCCCATACGGCCAAGAAGA 156
    rs13188128 ACGTTGGATGCACTAATAAAGGCAGCCTGT 122 ACGTTGGATGATGAGTAACGCTTGGTGCTG 157
    rs1545444 ACGTTGGATGGGCTCTGATCCCTTTTTTTAG 123 ACGTTGGATGTGGTAGCCTCAAGAATGCTC 158
    rs1544928 ACGTTGGATGGCTTTTCCTCTTCTTTGGTAG 124 ACGTTGGATGGAATGTGTAAAACAAACCAG 159
    rs11190684 ACGTTGGATGTCTCAGTTCCAACTCATGCC 125 ACGTTGGATGTGAGCCATGTAGAGACTCAG 160
    rs12147286 ACGTTGGATGAGAATGTGCCAAAGAGCAG 126 ACGTTGGATGTCTGCATCCCTTAGGTTCAC 161
    rs11256200 ACGTTGGATGCCTTATTGGATTCTATGTCCC 127 ACGTTGGATGACCAAGCACTGTACTTTTC 162
    rs1124181 ACGTTGGATGACTTGGCGAGTCCCCATTTC 128 ACGTTGGATGTTAATATAGTCCCCAGCCAC 163
    rs1392592 ACGTTGGATGTCTTGTCTCTTACCTCTCAG 129 ACGTTGGATGCTGTGCTGACTGAGTAGATG 164
    rs1507157 ACGTTGGATGTGAGGATTAAAGGATCTGGG 130 ACGTTGGATGATCTTTGAAGGCTCCTCTGG 165
    rs1569907 ACGTTGGATGGAGGCTCCTCTACACAAAAG 131 ACGTTGGATGGCATGTCCCTATGAGATCAG 166
    rs1339007 ACGTTGGATGTTGCTCTAAGGTGGATGCTG 132 ACGTTGGATGTTAGGCACCCCAAGTTTCAG 167
    rs1175500 ACGTTGGATGGTTTACAACCTGTGGCAGAC 133 ACGTTGGATGTGTAGCATGTCAGCCATCAG 168
    rs11797485 ACGTTGGATGGAAAGTGACCCATCAAGCAG 134 ACGTTGGATGGTAGTTGCTTGTGGTTACCG 169
    rs1475270 ACGTTGGATGCTATGGGGAACTGAATAAGTG 135 ACGTTGGATGGAGCAATTCATTTGTCTCC 170
    rs12631412 ACGTTGGATGCAAACTATTGACTGGTCATGG 136 ACGTTGGATGTTTTGTTGTTTGGGCATTGG 171
    rs1456076 ACGTTGGATGGCAGAGGTTTGAGAAAAGAG 137 ACGTTGGATGGTTCCCATCCAGTAATGGAG 172
    rs12958106 ACGTTGGATGGTATATGCCTGTATGTGGTC 138 ACGTTGGATGCCAACAGTTTTTCTTTAAGGG 173
    rs1436633 ACGTTGGATGGAGGGAAAGACCTGCTTCTA 139 ACGTTGGATGAGAAGCTCCGAGAAAAGGTG 174
    rs1587543 ACGTTGGATGGAGAAGGCTTTCCAGAATTTG 140 ACGTTGGATGTATAGCCATTACTGGGCTTG 175
    rs10027673 ACGTTGGATGCAAAAGCCAGCTCACAAAAG 141 ACGTTGGATGCCCTCTTGCATAAAATGTTGC 176
    rs12750459 ACGTTGGATGTTTTGGGCCCCTCCATATTC 142 ACGTTGGATGCTCCATGCAAGGCTGTGGC 177
    rs13144228 ACGTTGGATGTGGATATGCTGAATTTGAGG 143 ACGTTGGATGCGTTATCAAGGACTTTGTGC 178
    rs11131052 ACGTTGGATGCTTTTGTCCATGTTTGGCAG 144 ACGTTGGATGGAGGTTATCTTATTGTAACGC 179
    rs1495805 ACGTTGGATGAGGACAGTTGTCGTGAGATG 145 ACGTTGGATGAGACTGTCCTTTCCCAGGAT 180
    rs1664131 ACGTTGGATGCTGAGGCTGGGTAACTTATC 146 ACGTTGGATGTCATCAGAAGCAGATGCTGG 181
    rs1527448 ACGTTGGATGGCCCTTGGCACATAGTACTG 147 ACGTTGGATGCCATACGTTCAAGGATTGGG 182
    rs11062992 ACGTTGGATGTTGGTTATAGAGCGTCCCTG 148 ACGTTGGATGAGGTGTGCAAGTGTCAGAAG 183
    rs12518099 ACGTTGGATGACCCCTTACTCCAATAAGTC 149 ACGTTGGATGGTATATCATGTCCAGTGAAG 184
  • TABLE 5
    Extension primers and mass tags released after cleavage*
    SEQ SEQ
    ID ID
    SNP ID Extension Primer Sequence NO: Mass Tag Sequence NO: Mass
    rs11155591_a CCACCGCCTCCICCTCCCATCTCCACCCTCTA 185 CCACCGCCTCCIC 255 3802.49
    rs11155591_g CCACCGCCTACICCTCCCATCTCCACCCTCTG 186 CCACCGCCTACIC 256 3826.52
    rs12554258_c CCACAGCCTACICTTCCTACCCCTCCAGCCGC 187 CCACAGCCTACIC 257 3850.54
    rs12554258_t CCACAGCATACICTTCCTACCCCTCCAGCCGT 188 CCACAGCATACIC 258 3874.57
    rs12162441_c CAACAGCACAAITTGCTATCCCCACAATTACC 189 CAACAGCACAAIT 259 3922.62
    rs12162441_t CAACAGAACAAITTGCTATCCCCACAATTACT 190 CAACAGAACAAIT 260 3946.64
    rs11658800_c CAAAAGAACAAITGAAACTGCAGACTCTTCCC 191 CAAAAGAACAAIT 261 3970.67
    rs11658800_t CAAAAGAAAAAITGAAACTGCAGACTCTTCCT 192 CAAAAGAAAAAIT 262 3994.69
    rs13194159_c AATAAGAAGAAICGTCTGATTGGCTTTAGTTC 193 AATAAGAAGAAIC 263 4010.69
    rs13194159_t GATAAGAAGAAICGTCTGATTGGCTTTAGTTT 194 GATAAGAAGAAIC 264 4026.69
    rs1007716_c AATAGCGAGAAIGCTGTATCCTCAGAGAGTAC 195 AATAGCGAGAAIG 265 4042.69
    rs1007716_t AATAGCGAGAGIGCTGTATCCTCAGAGAGTAT 196 AATAGCGAGAGIG 266 4058.69
    rs11637827_a CCACCCCCGCCCITTCTCCCACAGTAAACTTCCA 197 CCACCCCCGCCCIT 267 4091.68
    rs11637827_g CCACCACCGCCCITTCTCCCACAGTAAACTTCCG 198 CCACCACCGCCCIT 268 4115.70
    rs13188128_c CCACCGCACTACICTCTTCTGCTTCATATTTCAC 199 CCACCGCACTACIC 269 4139.73
    rs13188128_g CCACAGCACTACICTCTTCTGCTTCATATTTCAG 200 CCACAGCACTACIC 270 4163.75
    rs1545444_a CAACAGCACCACITTCATTATTTCACTCAAGCGA 201 CAACAGCACCACIT 271 4187.78
    rs1545444_g CAACAGCAACACITTCATTATTTCACTCAAGCGG 202 CAACAGCAACACIT 272 4211.80
    rs1544928_a CAACAGCTACAAIAAACAAACCAGAAAGTCACTA 203 CAACAGCTACAAIA 273 4235.83
    rs1544928_g CAACAGATACAAIAAACAAACCAGAAAGTCACTG 204 CAACAGATACAAIA 274 4259.85
    rs11190684_c CAAAAGATACAAIATGTAGAGACTCAGTCTCTTC 205 CAAAAGATACAAIA 275 4283.88
    rs11190684_g CAAAAGATAGAAIATGTAGAGACTCAGTCTCTTG 206 CAAAAGATAGAAIA 276 4323.90
    rs12147286_c CAAAAGAGAGAAITGCAAATTAGATTTGTCAGGC 207 CAAAAGAGAGAAIT 277 4339.90
    rs12147286_t CAGAAGAGAGAAITGCAAATTAGATTTGTCAGGT 208 CAGAAGAGAGAAIT 278 4355.90
    rs11256200_a CAGAAGAGAGAGITATGTCTTATTCTTCTTCACCA 209 CAGAAGAGAGAGIT 279 4371.90
    rs11256200_g CAGGAGAGAGAGITATGTCTTATTCTTCTTCACCG 210 CAGGAGAGAGAGIT 280 4387.90
    rs1124181_c CCACCCACCGCCCITAGTCCCCAGCCACTATAAAAC 211 CCACCCACCGCCCIT 281 4404.89
    rs1124181_g CCACCCGCCGCCCITAGTCCCCAGCCACTATAAAAG 212 CCACCCGCCGCCCIT 282 4420.89
    rs1392592_c CCACCCGCCGCTCITTCCCAAAGTTGAGGGACTTAC 213 CCACCCGCCGCTCIT 283 4435.90
    rs1392592_t CCACTCGCCGCTCITTCCCAAAGTTGAGGGACTTAT 214 CCACTCGCCGCTCIT 284 4450.91
    rs1507157_c CCACGCGCCCTACIAAGGCTCCTCTGGGGCACAAGC 215 CCACGCGCCCTACIA 285 4468.94
    rs1507157_t CAACGCGCACTACIAAGGCTCCTCTGGGGCACAAGT 216 CAACGCGCACTACIA 286 4516.99
    rs1569907_a CAACAAGCACTACIGGGTTTTGTTGTGCCAGTAGAA 217 CAACAAGCACTACIG 287 4541.01
    rs1569907_g CAACAAGCAATACIGGGTTTTGTTGTGCCAGTAGAG 218 CAACAAGCAATACIG 288 4565.04
    rs1339007_c CAAGAAGAAATAAICTGCCAATTAATCATCAACTCTC 219 CAAGAAGAAATAAIC 289 4613.09
    rs1339007_t AAAGAAGAAATAAICTGCCAATTAATCATCAACTCTT 220 AAAGAAGAAATAAIC 290 4637.11
    rs1175500_a GAAGAAGACATAAIATGTCAGCCATCAGCCTCTCACA 221 GAAGAAGACATAAIA 291 4653.11
    rs1175500_g GAAGAAGACATAGIATGTCAGCCATCAGCCTCTCACG 222 GAAGAAGACATAGIA 292 4669.11
    rs11797485_c GAAGAGGACGTAGIGCTCTTATATCTCATATGAACAC 223 GAAGAGGACGTAGIG 293 4717.11
    rs11797485_g GAGGAGGACGTAGIGCTCTTATATCTCATATGAACAG 224 GAGGAGGACGTAGIG 294 4733.11
    rs1475270_c CCACGCTCCTCTACIACTTTTCATGGTTATTCTCAGTC 225 CCACGCTCCTCTACIA 295 4748.12
    rs1475270_t CCGCGCTCCTCTACIACTTTTCATGGTTATTCTCAGTT 226 CCGCGCTCCTCTACIA 296 4764.12
    rs12631412_c CCACGCGCACCAACITGTTTTGTTTGTTTTGTTTTTTC 227 CCACGCGCACCAACIT 297 4782.15
    rs12631412_t CCACGCGCGCCAACITGTTTTGTTTGTTTTGTTTTTTT 228 CCACGCGCGCCAACIT 298 4798.15
    rs1456076_c CCACGCGAGTCAACICCATCCAGTAATGGAGTACAGTC 229 CCACGCGAGTCAACIC 299 4822.17
    rs1456076_g CCACGAGAGTCAACICCATCCAGTAATGGAGTACAGTG 230 CCACGAGAGTCAACIC 300 4846.20
    rs12958106_a CCACGAGAGTCAACIAGTTTTTCTTTAAGGGGAGTAGA 231 CCACGAGAGTCAACIA 301 4870.22
    rs12958106_g CAACGAGAGTAAACIAGTTTTTCTTTAAGGGGAGTAGG 232 CAACGAGAGTAAACIA 302 4918.27
    rs1436633_c CAAAGAGAATAAACIGGACAAAGATGAGTGCGTATATC 233 CAAAGAGAATAAACIG 303 4942.30
    rs1436633_t CAAAGAGAATAAAAIGGACAAAGATGAGTGCGTATATT 234 CAAAGAGAATAAAAIG 304 4966.32
    rs1587543_a CAAAGAGAATAGAAIGGCTTGGGGTCCCCATTAAAGCGA 235 CAAAGAGAATAGAAIG 305 4982.32
    rs1587543_g CAGAGAGAATAGAAIGGCTTGGGGTCCCCATTAAAGCGG 236 CAGAGAGAATAGAAIG 306 4998.32
    rs10027673_c AAGAGCGAGAGAGAITACTAAAGACGCTTATCATGGTC 237 AAGAGCGAGAGAGAIT 307 5014.32
    rs10027673_t AGGAGCGAGAGAGAITACTAAAGACGCTTATCATGGTT 238 AGGAGCGAGAGAGAIT 308 5030.32
    rs12750459_c CGGAGAGAGAGGAGITGCAAGGCTGTGGCTGGACAAGAC 239 CGGAGAGAGAGGAGIT 309 5046.32
    rs12750459_t CGGAGAGGGAGGAGITGCAAGGCTGTGGCTGGACAAGAT 240 CGGAGAGGGAGGAGIT 310 5062.31
    rs13144228_c CCCGCTCCGCCAGTCIATTCTATATTAGAACAACTCTCTTC 241 CCCGCTCCGCCAGTCIA 311 5078.31
    rs13144228_t CCACGCGCGCCAGTCIATTCTATATTAGAACAACTCTCTTT 242 CCACGCGCGCCAGTCIA 312 5127.35
    rs11131052_c CCACGCGCGACAGACITAACGCATATGCACATGCACACATC 243 CCACGCGCGACAGACIT 313 5151.38
    rs11131052_t CCACGCGAGACAGACITAACGCATATGCACATGCACACATT 244 CCACGCGAGACAGACIT 314 5175.40
    rs1495805_c CAACGCGAGACAGACITGTCCTTTCCCAGGATGCTCAAAGC 245 CAACGCGAGACAGACIT 315 5199.43
    rs1495805_t CAACGCGAGACAGAAITGTCCTTTCCCAGGATGCTCAAAGT 246 CAACGCGAGACAGAAIT 316 5223.45
    rs1664131_g CAACGAGAGACAGTAIAGCAGATGCTGGCCCCATGCTTCAG 247 CAACGAGAGACAGTAIA 317 5247.48
    rs1664131_t CAACGAGAGAAAGTAIAGCAGATGCTGGCCCCATGCTTCAT 248 CAACGAGAGAAAGTAIA 318 5271.50
    rs1527448_c CAAGGAGAGAAAGAAITAATAGTACAACAGCTATCAATTAC 249 CAAGGAGAGAAAGAAIT 319 5311.53
    rs1527448_t CAAGGAGAGAGAGAAITAATAGTACAACAGCTATCAATTAT 250 CAAGGAGAGAGAGAAIT 320 5327.53
    rs11062992_a CAAGGAGAGAGAGAGITGTGCAAGTGTCAGAAGATGAACAA 251 CAAGGAGAGAGAGAGIT 321 5343.53
    rs11062992_g CGAGGAGAGAGAGAGITGTGCAAGTGTCAGAAGATGAACAG 252 CGAGGAGAGAGAGAGIT 322 5359.53
    rs12518099_c CCACCTACCACCAGTCIGAAGAAATAAGAAACATTGAGACAC 253 CCACCTACCACCAGTCIG 323 5375.52
    rs12518099_t CCACATACCACCAGTCIGAAGAAATAAGAAACATTGAGACAT 254 CCACATACCACCAGTCIG 324 5399.55
    *SNP specific nucleotides are underlined, mass tags are underlined and “I” refers to deoxyinosine.
  • Example 6 RNase A Cleavage of Ribonucleotide Materials and Methods
  • Prior to the extension reaction a 2-plex PCR was carried out in a 5 μl reaction volume using the following reagents; 2 ng DNA, 1.25× HotStar Taq buffer, 500 μM each dNTP, 100 nM each PCR primer (as listed in Table 1), 3.5 mM MgCl2, and 0.15 U HotStar Taq (Qiagen). Thermocycling was carried out using the following conditions: 15 minutes at 95° C.; followed by 45 cycles of 20 seconds at 95° C., 30 seconds at 56° C. and 1 minute at 72° C.; and concludes with 3 minutes at 72° C. The PCR reaction was treated with SAP (shrimp alkaline phosphatase) to dephosphorylate unincorporated dNTPs. A 2 μl mixture containing 0.3 U SAP was added to the PCR product and then subjected to 40 minutes at 37° C. and 5 minutes at 85° C.
  • TABLE 6
    PCR primers used
    SEQ SEQ
    ID ID
    SNP ID Forward Primer NO: Reverse Primer NO:
    rs1000586 ACGTTGGATGTACCAGAACCTACACTCCCC 325 ACGTTGGATGTCTCAAACTCCAGAGTGGCC 327
    rs10131894 ACGTTGGATGACGTAAGCACACATCCCCAG 326 ACGTTGGATGAGCTGTTCCACACTTCTGAG 328
  • Extension reaction reagents were combined in a 2 μl volume, which was added to the SAP treated PCR product. The extension reaction contained the following reagents; 21 μM each biotin ddNTP, 1 μM each extension primer including a ribonucleotide for subsequent RNase A cleavage (listed in Table 7) and 1.25 U Thermo Sequenase. Thermocycling was carried out using the following cycling conditions: 2 minutes at 94° C.; followed by 100 cycles of 5 seconds at 94° C., 5 seconds at 52° C., and 5 seconds at 72° C.; and concludes with 3 minutes at 72° C. Removal of unbound nucleotides was carried out using the QIAquick Nucleotide Removal Kit (Qiagen) as recommended by the manufacturer.
  • The eluted extension reaction was then combined with 30 pg prepared Dynabeads M-280 Streptavidin beads (Dynal) (washed three times with 5 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5, 1M NaCl, 0.5 mM EDTA). Beads were incubated at room temperature for 15 minutes with gentle agitation and then pelleted using a magnetic rack. The supernatant was removed. Subsequently the beads were washed 6 times with 5 mM Tris-HCl pH 7.5, 1 M NaCl, 0.5 mM EDTA. For each wash step the beads were pelleted and the supernatant removed.
  • The mass tags were cleaved from the extension product by addition of RNase A and incubation at 37° C. for 1 hour. After incubation the magnetic beads were pelleted using a magnetic rack and the supernatant containing the mass tag products was removed. Desalting was achieved by the addition of 6 mg CLEAN Resin (Sequenom).
  • 15 nl of the cleavage reactions were dispensed robotically onto silicon chips preloaded with matrix (SpectroCHIP®, Sequenom). Mass spectra were acquired using a MassARRAY Compact Analyser (MALDI-TOF mass spectrometer, Sequenom).
  • Extension primer sequences containing the mass tags and resulting masses of the cleaved products corresponding to specific alleles are listed in Table 7. Example spectra are shown in FIG. 8. For each of the two SNPs both homozygous as well as a heterozygous sample are displayed and show a clear distinction of the corresponding mass tags.
  • TABLE 7
    Extension primers and mass tags released after cleavage
    SEQ SEQ
    ID ID
    Assay Name Extension Primer Sequence NO: Mass Tag Sequence NO: Mass
    rs1000586_C TTTCTCCCC ACCTGACCCTGC 329 TTTCTCCCC 333 2697.73
    rs1000586_T TTTTCTCCCC ACCTGACCCTGT 330 TTTTCTCCCC 334 3001.93
    rs10131894_C TTATTCCCAGGU GCATGCATGCGCACAC 331 TTATTCCCAGGU 335 3694.37
    rs10131894_G TTATTTCCCAGGU GCATGCATGCGCACAG 332 TTATTTCCCAGGU 336 3998.57
  • In Table 7, ribonucleotides are highlighted in bold, SNP specific nucleotides are underlined and mass tags are underlined. In FIG. 8, MALDI-TOF MS spectra are shown for genotyping of rs1000586 and rs10131894.
  • Example 7 Mass Taq Design
  • Mass Tags were designed to be at least 16 Daltons apart to avoid any overlap with potential salt adducts, and so a double charge of any mass signal would not interfere with a mass tag signal. The calculation of the mass tags must take into account the deoxyinosine and the nucleotide 3′ to the deoxyinosine.
  • Nucleotide mass tags: MALDI-TOF flight behavior was examined for oligonucleotides which correspond to the mass tags used in a 70 plex (FIGS. 9 and 10) and 100 plex assay (FIGS. 11A and B).
  • All oligonucleotides corresponding to a 70 plex assay were called by the standard Sequenom Typer 3.4 software using the three parameters; area, peak height and signal-to-noise ratio at a comparable level (FIG. 9). Using oligonucleotides representing a 70 plex assay, the area value of each peak correlates to the sequence composition of that oligonucleotide. The higher percentage of guanidine and cytosine nucleotides results in larger area values; whereas the percentage of adenosine corresponds with lower area values (FIG. 10). Using oligonucleotides representing a 100 plex assay we examined the effects of oligonucleotide concentration (10, 5, 2.5 and 1 μmol final concentration per oligonucleotide) on signal-to-noise ratio (FIG. 11B). The lower oligonucleotide concentrations of 2.5 and 1 μmol gave consistently higher signal-to-noise ratio values than oligonucleotides concentrations of 10 and 5 μmol. This observation was confirmed by manual observation of the peaks seen in Typer 3.4. However, the four oligonucleotides concentrations gave comparable area values (data not shown).
  • Example 8 Extension Primer Design and dNTP/ddNTP Incorporation
  • Extension primers were designed using Sequenom's Assay Design software utilizing the following parameters SBE Mass Extend/goldPLEX extension, primer lengths between 20 and 35 bases (and corresponding mass window), and a minimum peak separation of 10 Daltons for analytes (the minimum possible) and 0 Daltons for mass extend primers.
  • Extension oligonucleotide and ddNTP role in extension reaction: To investigate the effects of extension oligonucleotide (with/without deoxyinosine nucleotide) and ddNTP composition (with/without biotin moiety) upon primer extension, we investigated extension rates of a 5 plex (FIG. 12). Assays generally show the best extension rates using unmodified extension oligonucleotides and ddNTPs. Extension oligonucleotides containing a deoxyinosine showed no significant reduction in extension rate. However, when using a ddNTP including a biotin moiety a reduction in extension rate was seen in all assays, when using either type of extension oligonucleotide.
  • Biotinylated dNTP/ddNTP extension: To compare the effects of extending by a single biotinylated ddNTP or a biotinylated dNTP and terminated by an unmodified ddNTP, we compared extension rates in a 7 plex and 5 plex. The 7 plex was extended by a biotinylated ddCTP or biotinylated dCTP and a ddATP, ddUTP, or ddGTP. The 5 plex was extended by a biotinylated ddUTP or biotinylated dUTP and a ddATP, ddCTP, or ddGTP. The experiment also compared two concentrations of biotinylated dNTP or ddNTP, either 210 or 420 pmol.
  • In both plexes, and in all individual assays extension rates when extended by a biotinylated dNTP and terminated by an unmodified ddNTP were significantly decreased when compared to extending by a single biotinylated ddNTPs (FIG. 13).
  • These results indicated that extension with a single biotinylated ddNTPs gives greater extension efficiency.
  • PCR Amplification
  • Prior to the extension reaction a PCR was carried out in a 5 μl reaction volume using the following reagents; 5 ng DNA, 1×PCR buffer, 500 μM each dNTP, 100 nM each PCR primer, 3 mM MgCl2, and 0.15 U Taq (Sequenom).
  • Thermocycling was carried out using the following conditions: 7 minutes at 95° C.; followed by 45 cycles of 20 seconds at 95° C., 30 seconds at 56° C. and 1 minute at 72° C.; and concludes with 3 minutes at 72° C.
  • SAP Treatment
  • The PCR reaction was treated with SAP (shrimp alkaline phosphatase) to dephosphorylate unincorporated dNTPs. A 2 μl mixture containing 0.6 U SAP was added to the PCR product and then subjected to 40 minutes at 37° C. and 5 minutes at 85° C. in a Thermocycler.
  • Extension Reaction
  • Extension reaction reagents were combined in a 3 μl volume, which was added to the SAP treated PCR product. The total extension reaction contained the following reagents; 1× goldPLEX buffer, 0.2 μl of 250 μM stock each biotinylated ddNTP (50 μmol final), 0.8 μl of 2.5 μM solution each extension primer (2 μmol final) (IDT), and 0.05 μl goldPLEX enzyme (Sequenom).
  • Thermocycling was carried out using a 300 cycle program consisting of: 2 minutes at 94° C.; followed by 60 cycles of; 5 seconds at 94° C. followed by 5 cycles of 5 seconds at 52° C. and 5 seconds at 80° C.; and concludes with 3 minutes at 72° C.
  • Capture
  • For conditioning magnetic streptavidin beads were washed two times with 100 μl of 50 mM Tris-HCl, 1M NaCl, 0.5 mM EDTA, pH 7.5. The extension reaction was combined with 50 pg (5 μl) conditioned beads. Beads were incubated at room temperature for 1 hour with gentle agitation and then pelleted using a magnetic rack. The supernatant was removed. Subsequently the beads were washed 3 times with 100 μl of 50 mM Tris-HCl, 1 M NaCl, 0.5 mM EDTA, pH 7.5 and 3 times with 100 μl of water. For each wash step the beads were pelleted and the supernatant removed.
  • MALDI-TOF
  • Desalting was achieved by the addition of 6 mg CLEAN Resin (Sequenom). 15 nl of the cleavage reactions was dispensed robotically onto silicon chips preloaded with matrix (SpectroCHIP®, Sequenom). Mass spectra were acquired using a MassARRAY Compact Analyser (MALDI-TOF mass spectrometer).
  • Example 9 Enzyme, Buffer, Oligonucleotide and Biotin ddNTP Titration Enzyme Titration:
  • The amount of post-PCR enzyme used in the extension reaction was examined. The standard PCR, extension, and immobilization/cleavage conditions (as outlined in the protocol in Example 8) were used except for the enzyme. The amount of enzyme used resulted in no difference in either manual calls or signal-to-noise ratio values for individual assays (FIG. 14).
  • Buffer Titration:
  • The amount of goldPLEX buffer used in the extension reaction was examined. The standard PCR, extension, and immobilization/cleavage conditions (as outlined in the protocol in example 8) were used except for adjusting the amount of buffer. The amount of buffer used resulted in no difference in either manual calls or signal-to-noise ratio values for individual assays (FIG. 15).
  • Oligonucleotide Titration:
  • The amount of oligonucleotide used in the extension reaction was examined. The standard PCR, extension, and immobilization/cleavage conditions (as outlined in the protocol section) were used except for adjusting the amount of oligonucleotide.
  • In the initial experiment (FIG. 16) final amounts of 15 pmol, 10 pmol and 5 pmol of each oligonucleotide were tested. The 10 and 15 pmol amounts gave similar results, but 5 pmol gave significantly more manual and software genotype calls. This can be seen by observing signal-to-noise ratio values (FIG. 9), where poorly performing assays showing an increased signal-to-noise ratio when using lower amounts of oligonucleotide.
  • In follow-up experiments final amounts of 5 pmol, 2.5 pmol and 1 pmol of each oligonucleotide were tested (FIG. 17). The results for all three amounts gave similar results as assessed by signal-to-noise ratio and manual genotype calls. However, three individual assays, for which peaks were clearly seen when concentrations of 2.5 or 1 pmol were used, were difficult to call due to low intensity when a final concentration of 5 pmol was used. When using two 70 plex assays comparing final amounts of 2 pmol, 1 pmol and 0.5 pmol of each oligonucleotide the same amount of manual calls were seen for all concentrations. However, greater signal-to-noise ratios were seen when more oligonucleotide was used (FIGS. 18 and 19).
  • These results show the optimal amount of each oligonucleotide to be 2 pmol when using a 70 plex assay. However, similar results were seen with final amounts of each oligonucleotide ranging from 0.5 to 5 pmol.
  • Biotinylated ddNTP Concentration:
  • The amount of biotinylated ddNTP used in the extension reaction was examined. The standard PCR, extension, and immobilization/cleavage conditions (as outlined in the protocol in Example 8) were used except for adjusting the amount of biotinylated ddNTP.
  • In the initial experiment final amounts of 100, 200, 300 and 400 pmol of each biotinylated ddNTP in each extension reaction were tested. Manual calls and signal-to-noise ratio (FIG. 20), show similar results were seen with all test amounts of biotinylated ddNTP.
  • To further investigate the amount of biotinylated ddNTP needed in each extension reaction, an experiment compared 50 and 100 pmol of each biotinylated ddNTP in an alternative 70 plex assay.
  • These assays again show no difference in manual calls or signal-to-noise ratio (FIG. 21). This indicates 50 pmol of each biotinylated ddNTP is sufficient to get an optimal extension reaction when using a 70 plex assay.
  • Example 10 Capture and Cleavage Optimization Immobilization and Oligonucleotide Cleavage:
  • Binding capacity of magnetic streptavidin beads. Comparison of Solulink and Dynabeads MyOne C1 magnetic streptavidin beads to capture biotinylated oligonucleotide followed the capture protocol as described in Example 8. The experiment uses two oligonucleotides which correspond to extension products for the two possible alleles for an assay designed for SNP rs1000586. The oligonucleotides contain a deoxyinosine nucleotide and 3′ biotinylated nucleotide. The oligonucleotides are bound to the magnetic streptavidin in the presence of either water or varying quantities of biotinylated dNTPs, and are cleaved by treatment with endonuclease V.
  • Dynabeads MyOne C1 magnetic streptavidin beads show no reduction in area in the presence of 10 or 100 pmol biotinylated ddNTP. However, a large decrease in signal is seen with the addition of 500 pmol of biotinylated ddNTP.
  • Solulink magnetic beads show no reduction in signal in the presence of up to and including 500 pmol of biotinylated dNTP. This indicates that unincorporated biotinylated ddNTP from an extension reaction would not cause a decrease in final signal if it does not total greater than 500 pmol.
  • These results in combination with experiments not outlined in this report indicate Solulink beads have a greater tolerance to biotinylated small molecules inhibiting the binding of biotinylated extension product. This is probably due to the greater binding capacity of the beads, which is reported to be 2500 vs. 500 pmol biotin oligonucleotides/mg (FIG. 22).
  • Cleavage
  • The mass tags were cleaved from the extension product by addition of a solution containing 12 U Endonuclease V (NEB) and 10 mM Magnesium Acetate (Sigma) and incubation at 37° C. for 4 hours in a Thermomixer R (Eppendorf) shaking at 1500 rpm. After incubation the magnetic beads were pelleted using a magnetic rack and the supernatant was removed.
  • Effect of Deoxyinosine Position on Cleavage Properties:
  • This experiment was designed to analyze the ability of endonuclease V to cleave an extension product containing a deoxyinosine nucleotide in different locations. Four oligonucleotides were designed to simulate an extension product (contained a 3′ biotin and a deoxyinosine nucleotide), which only differed in the location of the deoxyinosine nucleotide. The deoxyinosine was placed 10, 15, 20 and 25 base pairs from the 3′ nucleotide containing the biotin moiety.
  • The mass tag signal seen after cleavage of the supernatant from the binding step (unbound oligonucleotide) indicates a similar quantity of oligonucleotide was bound onto the magnetic streptavidin beads for all oligonucleotides. However, after cleaving the oligonucleotides bound to the magnetic streptavidin beads a clear pattern is seen. The larger the distance of deoxyinosine to the 3′ end of the oligonucleotide the greater the signal and presumably the cleavage. These results led to design all extension oligonucleotides so the deoxyinosine is at least 20 nucleotides from the putative 3′ end of the extension product (FIG. 23).
  • Bead and Endonuclease V Titration:
  • The quantity of Solulink magnetic streptavidin beads to efficiently capture biotinylated extension products, and endonuclease V to cleave captured product to release mass tags was evaluated in a series of experiments using 70 plex assays.
  • The initial experiment compared 10, 20 and 30 μl of Solulink magnetic streptavidin beads and 10, 20 and 30 units of endonuclease V. Signal-to-noise ratios show similar results with all combinations tested except when using 20 and 30 μl of magnetic beads in combination with 10 units of endonuclease V (FIG. 24). Identical results were seen when calling genotypes manually comparing 30 μl of beads and 30 U endonuclease V with 10 μl of beads and 10 U endonuclease V.
  • To follow up these results an experiment compared the following conditions; 10 μl beads/10 U endonuclease V; 5 μl beads/10 U endonuclease V, 10 μl beads/5 U endonuclease V, and 5 μl beads/5 U endonuclease V. When examining either manual genotype calls or signal-to-noise ratio similar results were seen when using either 10 or 5 μl of magnetic beads (FIG. 25). However, when using 5 U endonuclease V there was a significant reduction in both manual calls and signal-to-noise ratio when compared to 10 U endonuclease V.
  • To confirm these results an additional experiment compared the following conditions; 10 μl beads/12 U endonuclease V; 5 μl beads/6 U endonuclease V, 5 μl beads/12 U endonuclease V, and 5 μl beads/18 U endonuclease V. When comparing both manual genotype calls and signal-to-noise ratios, similar results were seen when comparing 10 or 5 μl of Solulink magnetic beads (FIG. 26). When comparing different quantities of endonuclease V, similar results were seen with 12 and 18 U endonuclease V. However, when using 6 U of endonuclease V a reduction in signal was observed (FIG. 26).
  • Example 11 Alternative Oligonucleotide Cleavage Mechanism Ribonucleotide:
  • Initial experiments used extension oligonucleotides which included a ribonucleotide. After extension and subsequent capture on magnetic streptavidin beads the mass tags are released by RNase A cleavage of the ribonucleotide. The method is outlined in the following section. The assays were developed for the SNPs rs1000586 and rs10131894 in combination. The 2 plex reaction worked well and the genotypes are clearly seen (FIG. 8). A challenge to overcome in the future is cleavage of the ribonucleotides-containing oligonucleotides due to freeze thawing.
  • Photocleavable:
  • To explore an alternative to cleavage of deoxyinosine with endonuclease V oligonucleotides containing a photocleavable linker were tested (IDT). The linker contains a 10-atom spacer arm which can be cleaved with exposure to UV light in the 300-350 nm spectral range.
  • Methylphosphonate:
  • As a further alternative to using cleavage of deoxyinosine with endonuclease V, oligonucleotides containing a methylphosphonate modification were examined. The oligonucleotides contain a modification of the phosphate backbone at a single position, where oxygen is substituted with a methyl group. This results in a neutrally charged backbone which can be cleaved by Sodium hydroxide (NaOH), or potassium hydroxide (KOH) and heat. A series of experiments showed that the oligonucleotides can be cleaved by addition of as little as 50 mM of NaOH or 200 mM KOH and heating at 70° C. for one hour.
  • dSpacer, Phosphorothioate/Phosphoramidite:
  • Three alternative cleavage mechanisms that have not been explored in detail are the replacement of a nucleotide with a 1′,2′-Dideoxyribose (dSpacer) and the backbone modifications creating either a phosphorothioate or phosphoramidite. A phosphorothioate modification replaces a bridging oxygen with a sulphur. This enables the backbone to be cleaved with treatment with either 30/50 mM aqueous sliver nitrate solution (with/without dithiothreitol) or 50 mM iodine in aqueous acetone. A phosphoramidite modification replaces a bridging oxygen with a amide group. The resulting P—N bond can be cleaved with treatment with 80% CH3COOH or during the MALDI-TOF procedure.
  • Example 12 Isolation of Biotinylated Extension Products Using a Biotin Competition Release Method
  • A method for purifying biotinylated extension products and releasing the products from streptavidin coated magnetic beads using free biotin is described herein, and illustrated in FIG. 27A-G. In some embodiments, the method is utilized to purify and isolate and analyze single base extension reactions for polymorphism identification
  • A genomic region of interest (e.g., a region having genetic variation) can be targeted using PCR based methods (see FIG. 27A). After PCR amplification of a region of interest, the reaction products were treated with shrimp alkaline phosphatase (SAP) to dephosphorylate unincorporated nucleotide triphosphates. The region of interest, including a polymorphism of interest, can be targeted by nucleotide probes using single base extension (SBE) reactions that correspond to the nucleotide residue of interest (e.g., polymorphism; see FIG. 27B). The SBE reactions utilize biotin labeled dideoxynucleotide triphosphate terminators. Biotinylated extension products were subsequently captured (see FIG. 27C), washed and purified away from (see FIG. 27D) unused reaction components utilizing streptavidin coated magnetic beads and magnetic separation.
  • The purified extension products were subsequently eluted from the streptavidin coated magnetic beads by competition with free biotin under elevated temperature conditions (see FIG. 27E). The eluant containing the biotinylated extension products from the region of interest are dispensed (see FIG. 27F) onto a SpectroCHIP® (Sequenom), and analyzed using MALDI-TOF mass spectrometry (see FIG. 27G). Reaction components and conditions are described herein.
  • Methods
  • Reaction components use in PCR amplification reactions.
  • Final
    Concentration per
    Reagent Reaction
    RNase-free ddH2O N/A
    10X Buffer
    1x
    dNTPs (25 mM each) 200 μM
    MgCl2 (25 mM)  1.0 mM
    HotStar Taq (5 U/μl) N/A
    Primer Mix (1 μl M) 200 nM
    Template various
  • Reaction components used in Shrimp Alkaline Phosphatase dephosphorylation reactions.
  • Final
    Concentration per
    Reagent Reaction
    RNase-free ddH2O N/A
    10X SAP Buffer 0.24X
    SAP enzyme (1.7 U/μl) 0.073 U
  • Reaction components used in single base extension reactions.
  • Final
    Concentration
    Reagent per Reaction
    H2O N/A
    10X Buffer 0.222X
    Primer mix (9 μM)   1 μM
    Biotinylated ddNTPs (250 μl 5.56 μM
    μM)
    Thermosequenase (32 U/μl)  1.3 U
  • Binding and wash solutions used isolate and purify biotinylated extension products.
  • Solution Composition
    2X Binding 2M NaCl, 10 mM Tris pH 7.5, 1.0 mM
    Buffer EDTA
    10X WASH
    100 mM Tris-HCl pH 8.0
    Buffer
    1X WASH
    10 mM Tris pH 8.0
    Buffer
  • Components and procedure for preparing streptavidin coated magnetic beads.
  • Reagent Volume per Reaction [μl]
    Beads 10
  • Place on magnet at least 3 min to concentrate beads; remove supernatant.
  • Add 2× Binding Buffer to the tube as follows:
  • Reagent Volume per Reaction [μl]
    2x Binding Buffer 10
  • Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture beads; remove supernatant.
  • Add 2× Binding Buffer to the tube to repeat for a total of 2 washes as follows:
  • Reagent Volume per Reaction [μl]
    2x Binding Buffer 10
  • Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture beads; remove supernatant.
  • Resuspend beads in 2× Binding Buffer as follows:
  • Reagent Volume per Reaction
    25
  • Components and procedure for capturing biotinylated extension products using streptavidin coated magnetic beads.
  • Add an equal volume the 2× Binding Buffer with Beads to each well of PCR reaction:
      • 25 μl Beads in 2× Binding Buffer
      • 25 μl Extension product
  • Rotate plate to mix for 15-30 min at room temperature.
  • Place plate on magnetic separator, remove supernatant.
  • Components and procedure for purification and washing of biotinylated extension products using streptavidin coated magnetic beads.
  • Add 1×WASH Buffer as follows:
  • Volume per
    Reagent Reaction [μl]
    1x WASH Buffer 50
  • Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture beads; remove supernatant.
  • Add 1×WASH Buffer to the tube to repeat for a total of 2 washes as follows:
  • Volume per
    Reagent Reaction [μl]
    1x WASH Buffer 100
  • Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture beads; remove supernatant.
  • Add WATER as follows:
  • Volume per
    Reagent Reaction [μl]
    WATER 100
  • Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture beads; remove supernatant.
  • Add WATER to the tube to repeat for a total of 2 washes as follows:
  • Volume per
    Reagent Reaction [μl]
    WATER 100
  • Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture beads; remove supernatant.
  • Elution of captured biotinylated extension products from streptavidin coated magnetic beads for subsequent analysis.
  • The biotinylated extension products were eluted from the streptavidin coated magnetic beads using competition with free biotin at elevated temperatures. The reaction conditions are given in the table below.
      • Add 15 μl of BIOTIN (Resin treated, 25 ng/μl).
      • Heat to 90° C. for 5 min. then chill to 4° C.
      • Place on magnet for 2-3 min to capture beads.
  • After capturing the magnetic beads as described in the table, the eluant was removed from the beads and prepared for further analysis. In some embodiments, preparation for further analysis includes dispensing or spotting onto a solid support suitable for use in MALDI-TOF mass spectrometry. In certain embodiments, the solid support is a SpectroCHIP® (Sequenom) solid support. The biotinylated extension products sometimes are analyzed by MALDI-TOF mass spectrometry, which uses differences in mass of the extension products to elucidate the genotype of the sample at the region of interest (e.g., at the site of the polymorphism). A representative spectrum tracing is shown in FIG. 28.
  • FIG. 28 illustrates the mass differences in single base reaction products analyzed by MALDI-TOF mass spectrometry. Unextended primer is shown on the spectrum tracing at a mass of approximately 5997 Daltons. Two extension reaction products also are shown in FIG. 28, a ddU reaction product representing about 10% of the input template and having a mass of approximately 6665 Daltons, and a ddA reaction product representing about 90% of the input template and having a mass of approximately 6687 Daltons. The additional dotted lines at mass 6510 and 6579 are the expected mass for alleles of the BRAF2_WT and BRAF2_R marker single base extension products.
  • Example 13 Extension and Releasing Extended Oligonucleotides from a Solid Phase
  • A typical multiplex (i.e. iPLEX) was followed up to the extension step (e.g. Example 8). PCR amplification of the region of interest was performed followed by SAP dephosphorylation of the unincorporated nucleotides. The single base extension utilized biotinylated dideoxynucleotides. This extension was performed by either including only the nucleotides corresponding to the minor species or all four nucleotides. Biotinylated oligonucleotides were captured using streptavidin beads from different manufacturers. For the releasing step, the inosine cleavage method was compared to using free-biotin to compete off bound biotinylated oligonucleotides. Other components of this reaction were similar to assays previously described (e.g. Example 8). Conditions used for the PCR amplification, SAP dephosphorylation and extension are shown in Table 8 below.
  • TABLE 8
    PCR Setup
    Final Concentration Volume for Single Reaction
    Reagent per Reaction [ul]
    RNase-free ddH2O N/A 0.16
    10X Buffer 1x 0.50
    dNTPs (25 mM each) 200 uM 0.04
    MgCl2 (25 mM) 1.0 mM 0.20
    HotStar Taq (5 U/ul) N/A 0.10
    Primer Mix (1 uM) 200 nM 1.00
    Competitor Titration 3.00
    TOTAL 5.00
    PCR Amplification Parameters
    95 C. 15 min
    95 C. 20 sec 10 cycles
    56 C. 20 sec
    72 C.  1 min
    72 C.  3 min
     4 C.
    SAP Setup
    Volume
    Final Concentration for Single Reaction
    Reagent per Reaction [ul]
    RNase-free ddH2O N/A 1.53
    10X SAP Buffer 0.24X 0.17
    SAP enzyme (1.7 U/ul) 0.073 U/ul 0.3
    TOTAL 2
    SAP Incubation
    37° C. for 20 minutes
    85° C. for 10 minutes
     4° C. forever
    Extension Setup
    Volume for
    Final Concentration Single Reaction
    Reagent per Reaction [ml]
    H2O N/A 0.56
    10X Buffer 0.222X 0.2
    Primer mix (9 uM) 1 uM 1
    Biotinylated ddT&A (250 uM) 5.56 uM 0.2
    Thermosequenase (32 U/ul) 1.3U 0.04
    TOTAL 2
    Extension Parameters
    94° C. for 30 seconds
    94° C. for 5 seconds 40 cycles
    52° C. for 5 seconds 5 cycles
    80° C. for 5 seconds
    72° C. for 3 minutes
     4° C. forever
  • After extension, the reaction was introduced to streptavidin coated magnetic beads. The extended products were allowed to capture for a short duration. Subsequent wash steps were conducted to remove reaction components except the captured extension products (Table 9). This procedure removed salts that produce interfering adducts in MALDI-TOF mass spectrometry, which allowed for the removal of the anion exchange resin procedure now employed with current iPLEX workflow.
  • After washing, captured extension products were eluted from the beads by introducing a high molar free biotin solution at 25 ng/ul. After elution, the extension products remained in the eluent. The cleaned analyte was now ready for dispensing on the bioarray chip and was substantially free from unextended primer, salts, and other contaminants that can obscure a low abundant species on the MALDI-TOF spectra, thus allowing for a more sensitive detection. FIGS. 29A-G depict a flow chart of this procedure.
  • TABLE 9
    Bead Conditioning
    Vortex MyOne Steptavidin C1 beads to completely resuspend beads.
    Transfer beads to a tube as follows:
    Reagent Vol per Reaction
    Beads
    10
    Place on magnet at least 3 min to concentrate beads; remove supernatant.
    Add 2x Binding Buffer to the tube as follows:
    Reagent Vol per Reaction
    2x Binding Buffer 10
    Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture b
    Figure US20130017960A1-20130117-P00899
    Add 2x Binding Buffer to the tube to repeat for a total of 2 washes as
    follows:
    Reagent Vol per Reaction
    2x Binding Buffer 10
    Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture beads; remove
    supernatant.
    Capture
    Resupend beads in 2x Binding Buffer as follows:
    Reagent Vol per Reaction
    2x Binding Buffer 25
    Add an equal volume the 2x Binding Buffer with Beads to each well of
    PCR reaction.
    25 ul Beads in 2x Binding Buffer
    25 ul PCR product
    50 ul
    Rotate plate to mix for 15-30 min at room temp.
    Place plate on magnetic separator, remove supernatant.
    Bead Wash
    Add
    1x WASH Buffer as follows:
    Reagent Vol per Reaction
    1x WASH Buffer 50
    Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture beads; remove
    supernatant.
    Add 1x WASH Buffer to the tube to repeat for a total of 2 washes as
    follows:
    Reagent Vol per Reaction
    1x WASH Buffer 100
    Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture beads; remove
    supernatant.
    Add WATER as follows:
    Reagent Vol per Reaction
    WATER
    100
    Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture beads; remove
    supernatant.
    Add WATER to the tube to repeat for a total of 2 washes as follows:
    Reagent Vol per Reaction
    WATER
    100
    Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture beads; remove
    supernatant.
    Elution
    Add
    15 of BIOTIN (Resin treated, 25 ng/ul).
    Heat to 90 C. for 5 min. then chill t 4 C.
    Place on magnet for 2-3 min to capture beads
    Remove supernatant to a clean 96-well plate and run on MALDI.
    Figure US20130017960A1-20130117-P00899
    indicates data missing or illegible when filed
  • Inosine Cleavage
  • As an alternate elution method, inosine cleavage of mass tags from the captured extension products was performed. This method deviated from the biotin competition approach for extension oligonucleotide design. This approach required a non-templated sequence on the 5′ end of the extension primer to correspond to the extension product. In addition, this oligonucleotide was synthesized with an inosine residue that separates the complementary sequence of the target and the mass tag sequence identifier. Through this inosine residue, the mass tag was cleaved from the capture agent by endonuclease V activity. The cleavage portion of this process is illustrated in FIGS. 30A and 30B.
  • Streptavidin Bead Selection and Elution Evaluation (Biotin Vs Inosine Cleavage)
  • Five streptavidin bead products were selected for evaluation. The selection was based on surface characteristics and binding capacity of free biotin. These characteristics are listed in Table 10.
  • TABLE 10
    Bead characteristics
    Binding capacity of free biotin
    Bead Surface (pmoles/mg beads)
    Dynal M270 Hydrophilic 650-1350
    Dynal M280 Hydrophobic 650-900 
    Dynal C1 Hydrophilic >2,500
    Dynal T1 Hydrophobic >1,300
    Solulink Hydrophilic >1,300
  • The performance of the beads was evaluated using oligonucleotides synthesized with 3′ biotin. Two oligonucleotides were designed with an identical “sequence specific” region; one had no 5′ modification while the other contained a 5′ mass tag with an inosine residue. To evaluate efficiency of capture and elution strategy, a comparative measure within each spectrum was employed. Additional oligonucleotides were designed so their respective size was within an acceptable mass range of the eluted products for comparison.
  • The testing procedure included capturing the 3′ biotinylated oligonucleotides, performing a set of washes, and subsequent elution (biotin competition vs. inosine cleavage). This strategy alleviates variability that may have been introduced during the PCR and extension steps. Beads and elution strategies were evaluated by response to limiting the capturable oligonucleotide. This evaluation was performed by serially diluting the 3′ biotinylated oligonucleotide from 2 uM to 0.031 uM. For each concentration tested, an equal amount of quantification oligonucleotide was added to the eluent to measure bead capture and elution efficiency.
  • The ratio of capture oligonucleotide to quantification oligonucleotide heights was measured at each concentration for each bead evaluated. This initial experiment showed the biotin competition method to outperform the elution method. Both elution methods exhibited a captured product at the lowest starting input, but the biotin capture clearly showed more captured and eluted product, as displayed by the ratio. This outcome was evident regardless of bead used and the biotin competition was chosen as the elution strategy. The data also showed underperformance of DynalM280 and DynalT1. The data reflecting this experiment can be seen in FIG. 31 and FIG. 32.
  • Bead Evaluation
  • The next approach was to analyze capture beads for further development. This experimentation utilized all steps of the proposed ultra-sensitive detection workflow to evaluate bead performance from an extended product off a PCR template. In order to control input material, competitor oligonucleotides were used as template material. PCR, SAP, extension and capture were performed as outlined previously. The template complement, Biotin-ddUTP, was the sole nucleotide used in the extension reaction. Competitor oligonucleotide template concentration was serial diluted from approx. 60,000 molecules to approx. 30 molecules. Each dilution was replicated six times. For all reactions 1 ul of a 1 uM solution of extension oligonucleotides was used. The beads evaluated were Dynal M270, Dynal C1, and Solulink. To elucidate binding performance of each bead using the same strategy as employed in the previous study, 1 ul of a 1 uM quantification oligonucleotide solution was added to the eluent post biotin capture.
  • The results of this evaluation demonstrated Dynal C1 to outperform both Solulink and M270 at all template concentrations. M270 failed to capture any product. For Dynal C1, a gradual decline in the ratio of extension product to quantification oligonucleotide using either height or area as the measure was observed as it related to input amount. This same relationship was not observed with Solulink, suggesting a limit of capture. The data for this experiment can be seen in FIG. 33 and FIG. 34.
  • Genomic Variants (i.e. Genomic Mix Model)
  • With the essential components and procedures for the process established, development proceeded to actual samples. A model system was developed using samples and assays well characterized in a previous validation (Oncocarta validation). The genetic material used is commercially available from ATCC and is known to carry somatic mutations. Sample HTB-26D (genomic DNA of a cell line derived from breast adenomcarcinoma) carries a mutation in the serine/threonine-protein kinase B-Raf (BRAF) encoding region. Specifically, this sample has previously shown a somatic mutation in BRAF-2 (Wild type—G; Mutant—T). This sample was characterized as being 30% mutant. Sample HTB-38D (genomic DNA of cell line derived from colorectal adenocarcinoma) also carries a mutation in the BRAF region. This sample has previously shown a mutation in BRAF-15 (Wild type—T; Mutant—A). This sample was characterized as 15% mutant. HTB-26D is wild type for BRAF-15 and HTB-38D is wild type for BRAF-2.
  • One rationale for the selection of these assays and samples, beyond the ease of obtaining genetic material, was the specific genotypes involved. Biotin-ddCTP and biotin-ddTTP are only separated by 1 Da in mass. Although this mass difference is within the resolution of the MALDI-TOF instruments, a larger mass difference between products was evaluated. Subsequently, a different vendor was found to offer biotin-ddUTP with a 16 carbon linker (vs. the 11 carbon linker of the original set). Replacement of the 11 carbon linker with the 16 carbon linker in this assay alleviated any potential design issues.
  • To evaluate sensitivity in this model system, the two samples were mixed to further dilute each corresponding somatic mutation. The two samples were mixed at different ratios, titrating the somatic mutation in BRAF-2 for sample 26D from 30% to 1.5% and titrating the BRAF-15 variant from 15% to 0.75% for sample 38D. Each titration point was run in duplicate and recombined after SAP. The mixed analyte was redistributed to two different reactions. One of the reactions was subject to all four biotin-ddNTP's while the other used just biotin-ddUTP (for BRAF-2) and biotin-ddATP (for BRAF-15). Capture and elution were performed with the Dynal-C1 beads and free-biotin competition. FIG. 35 shows the results for these four scenarios.
  • The BRAF-2 mutant showed a slight signal in the reaction run with all 4 biotin-ddNTP's (top left panel, FIG. 35). Ordinarily this sort of signal would not be considered significant above baseline noise. With just biotin-ddUTP (for BRAF-2 reaction, bottom left of FIG. 35) a very clear and distinct signal was observed for the mutant. This same observation held true for the 0.75% mutant in the BRAF-15 assay for sample 38D. A very clear and distinct signal was observed for the BRAF-15 mutant when just biotin-ddATP (bottom right of FIG. 35) was included in the extension composition. This data demonstrated a significant increase in the signal to noise ratio (SNR) by excluding the biotin-ddNTP's corresponding to the more abundant wild type sequence. In the case of BRAF-15, there was no observed signal for the mutant in the reaction when all 4 biotin-ddNTP's were included in the extension reaction (top right panel, FIG. 35).
  • Detection and Quantitaion of a Low Abandance Variant
  • In some embodiments the amount of molecules of a target mutant variant (e.g. low abundant variant) present in an assay where the wild type (e.g. high abundance species) extension product is not generated is determined by the use of a synthetic template included in the extension reaction. The initial goal of this evaluation was to assess the ability to reliably detect the minor contribution (i.e. of a low abundance mutant) in a mixture at sensitive levels. The post-PCR enrichment strategy summarized here defines this ability is possible by effectively removing the wild type (e.g. high abundance species) extension product. It is possible to determine the amount (e.g. copy number, concentration, percentage) of target mutant molecules present (i.e. mutant extension products) in an assay (e.g. extension reaction), if the input quantity of template is known. The amount of target (e.g. copy number, concentration, percentage) mutant variant (i.e. mutant extension products) and/or percentage of target mutant variant in the sample is quantified by including a known amount of synthetic template in the extension reaction. The synthetic template can hybridize to an oligonucleotide species and contain a base substitution at the mutant position located just 3′ of the oligonucleotide species to be extended. The base substitution is different than the wild type or target mutant variant (e.g. first variant, low abundant variant, SNP). The base substitution present in the synthetic template is not present in the sample prior to introduction of the synthetic template. A ddNTP that is complementary to the base substitution in the synthetic template is also introduced into the reaction. Oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the target mutant variant are co-amplified (e.g. co-extended) with oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the synthetic template. By performing multiple reactions, that include serial dilutions of a synthetic template, the amount and/or percentage of the target mutant variant can be ascertained. The amount and/or percentage of the target mutant variant is determined by the amount of synthetic template that yields equal extension product as the target mutant variant.
  • Mutant quantification, as described, was carried out on a genomic mix model. With constant mutant percentages of 5, 1, 0.5 and 0.1, synthetic template titrations were applied targeting a theoretical number of molecules given a total input DNA of 20 ng. The result showed an accurate count of mutant molecules for the 5 and 1% samples. The process was not as accurate at lower levels, presumably due to PCR sampling bias with limited template. FIG. 36 shows the titration profile for the 1% mutant.
  • Conclusions
  • Elimination of the wild type extension product can increase sensitivity of the multiplex assay disclosed herein. In some embodiments, assays of the same plex have the same wild type genotype, or have the same mutant genotype. In some embodiments, synthetic templates or plasmid constructs with designed “mutations” against a genomic DNA of a healthy population (i.e. HAPMAP consortium samples) can be used. This strategy can alleviate design concerns and can have the distinct advantage of artificially creating different mutant percentages in different assays for the same plex (competitor only). In some embodiments, synthetic templates (e.g. plasmids or oligonucleotide templates) are used as controls. In some embodiments, synthetic templates (e.g. plasmids or oligonucleotide templates) are included in kits.
  • In some embodiments, designs are tailored toward the wild type (i.e more abundant) nucleotide. In this way all assays in one plex share the same nucleotide for wild type and the extension mix used leaves out this nucleotide. In some embodiments, designs can be tailored toward the mutant. In some embodiments, all assays in a plex have the same mutant base in common. In certain embodiments, the extension mix only contains the mutant base. In some embodiments, there is a risk of non-specific interaction with the overwhelming background wild type DNA. In some embodiments there should be at least one control plex representing each wild type base removed, or each mutant base left in depending on the design style chosen.
  • Workflow Improvements
  • The processes as described are amenable to automation. Key steps to consider for automation can be bead conditioning, bead addition, bead washing, and aspiration of the eluted product.
  • Example 14 Detecting “Wild Type” and “Mutant” Genotypes Using Multiplex Assays and Kits Assay Design
  • A hindrance to a more sensitive detection has been the presence of the wild type peak scaling the intensity to a point where low level mutants are no longer visible above baseline. Removing the wild type peak from detection has improved sensitivity and signal to noise ratio. Assays designed within a single plex have the same wild type peak in common with corresponding wild type base removed from the extension reaction, or designed to have the same mutant peak in common with only that specific base included in the extension reaction (Table 11). In terms of material cost, the strategy of choosing a plex directed toward the mutant allele with only one base used in the extension reaction is used for a model system.
  • Multiplex (i.e. Plex) designs are divided into three classes of assays. The three classes represent each of the other 3 nucleotides as the wild type. Four multiplex assays (i.e. plexes) are designed using this rationale with each plex targeting a different mutant base. This assay design strategy allows the exploration of all possible wild type/mutant combinations.
  • The design incorporates six regions from a Lung Panel. Each designed “mutant” is interrogated in the forward and reverse direction to facilitate the requirement of all possible wild type/mutant combinations. The design avoids overlap from extension oligonucleotide and PCR primer so as to avoid any potential exonuclease derived additional signals. The mutation designed into the model represents actual somatic mutations used in the Lung Panel. The design with multiplex is outlined in Table 12. The four multiplexes are designed so they can also be multiplexed together in one plex using acyclic extension mix. The design incorporates an EcoRI site separating the regions from each other (FIG. 37). Prior to using the model, the plasmid is cleaved through EcoRI restriction digest to separate the regions and more adequately reflect a genomic context.
  • TABLE 11
    Extension nucleotide mix
    Design with all assays sharing the same wild type nucleotide in a plex
    Plex with wild type-T C, G, A
    Plex with wild type-C T, G, A
    Plex with wild type-G T, C, A
    Plex with wild type-A T, C, G
    Design with all assays sharing the same mutant nucleotide in a plex
    Plex with mutant-T T
    Plex with mutant-C C
    Plex with mutant-G G
    Plex with mutant-A A
  • TABLE 12
    Wild Type/ Extension
    Multiplex Region Mutation Direction
    Mutant C DDR2_L63V G/C R
    Multiplex EPHA3_N379K A/C R
    JAK2_Y931C T/C R
    Alubmin_Ctrl_C A/C R
    Mutant A NOTCH1_R2328W G/A R
    Multiplex TP53_R249W T/A F
    ALK_C4493A C/A F
    Alubmin_Ctrl_A G/A F
    Mutant T ALK_C4493A G/T R
    Multiplex NOTCH1_R2328W C/T F
    TP53_R249W A/T R
    Alubmin_Ctrl_T C/T R
    Mutant G EPHA3_N379K T/G F
    Multiplex DDR2_L63V C/G F
    JAK2_Y931C A/G F
    Alubmin_Ctrl_G T/G F
  • Controls
  • Elements of the process lead to controls for downstream analysis. Failure to capture a product can be due to limited template, failed PCR/extension, or failed capture and elution. To evaluate issues with these specific variables, a control assay is included in each plex designed. The control designed targets the human albumin gene. A control is represented in each reaction that is sufficiently templated with proper functioning PCR and extension. Four separate extension oligonucleotides are intended for this control. These extension oligonucleotides target a residue representing each of the four nucleotides and are used with the appropriate extension nucleotide mix.
  • Subsequent to the extension assay, a 5′ biotinylated oligonucleotide with 3′ inverted dTTP is spiked into all assays as a control for capture and elution. The absence of this signal coinciding with an absence of any analyte informs the user of a failed capture and/or elution. The molarity of this particular control should not overwhelm the reaction to avoid masking any low level mutant in detection.
  • Elution Optimization
  • Captured and washed products are eluted into 15 ul of high molar biotin solution. New hardware which pellets beads at the appropriate height for 15 ul elution is optimized for the process using Matrix PlateMate 2×2 and/or the Epimotion 5075. A titration experiment is used to evaluate the performance of the new plate. As a test of the process, this evaluation is done in triplicate for each dilution of capture control. The capture control is spiked into an iPLEX simulant solution. The test solution undergoes the typical post-extension process using the hardware.
  • Automation adjustments for the PlateMate are made prior to elution experimentation. The titration encompasses twelve steps of a serial dilution bringing input capture oligonucleotide from 2500 molecules to approximately 1 molecule. The method with new hardware is optimized for the ability to maintain a pellet during the washes without loss of beads. Ultimately, the performance is judged by the sensitivity as demonstrated by detection of capture oligonucleotide.
  • Quality Control
  • The four multiplexes are initially run with the typical iPLEX process using an acyclic extension mix on plasmid alone. This is performed as a quality measure of plasmid manufacturing. Restriction digest is also optimized and visualized in an agarose gel to ensure complete digestion into constituent fragments.
  • Capture Control Optimization
  • There is an initial experiment to determine what concentration of capture control is appropriate for subsequent experiments. This control is useful for those reactions where there is no mutant and therefore no extension peak. In this situation, it is necessary to determine if the absence of a peak is the result of the absence of sufficient template to generate an extension product or a failure of capture or elution. A titration of plasmid is performed in quadruplicate. For each replicate, a different concentration of capture oligonucleotide is used. The titration of plasmid mirrors the sensitivity experiment with eight dilutions from 50% mutant to 0.01% mutant and a no mutant reaction. The lowest concentration of capture control used is determined from the elution optimization experiment. This concentration is used as input for one replicate and doubling concentrations for the other three replicates. Performance of the capture control is evaluated by how mutant assay detection is effected by the presence of a capture control peak. The peak should not obscure low level mutant by being too prevalent in the spectra. However, the capture control peak must be clearly detected at low level mutant concentrations. The findings of this experiment are the basis for capture control concentration in subsequent sensitivity, specificity and concordance assays. The 3′ inverted dT is not necessary for these reactions, as the oligonucleotide is not involved in the extension reaction. However, the control is designed this way as to allow incorporation of the control in the extension reaction itself.
  • Sensitivity and Specificity
  • Establishing a sensitivity threshold of the process involves titrating plasmid DNA relative to the human DNA. Sensitivity thresholds are determined when no mutant analyte is detectable or to a point were a single copy of the variant is used for the minority template. Various dilutions of the mixture are used. The number of template mutant molecules is 15000, 3750, 938, 235, 59, 15, 4 and 0. The respective number of wild type copies is 15000, 26250, 29062, 29765, 29941, 29985, 29996 and 30000. Combined, these eight mixtures represent a 50%, 12.5%, 3.13%, 0.78%, 0.2%, 0.05%, 0.01% and 0% mutant concentration, respectively. Total template is 90 ng/rz×n, or 30,000 genomic copies. Every dilution of each plex is run with 48 replicates. An extra two plates running 48 non-templated reactions for each multiplex is run as a control to assess the extent of non-specific interactions. Additionally, a “golden standard” plate of 48 samples run in duplicate using the 50% mutant and 12.5% mutant establishes proper ratios are being employed. In total, the sensitivity and specificity trial requires nineteen 96 well plates. PCR and SAP is implemented according to current iPLEX protocol. Post-SAP reactions are subject to an extension reaction containing biotin-ddNTP's as the alternative terminating nucleotide substrate (except the “golden standard plate”). All other reaction components will remain the same. Table 13 shows the model system dilution setup in terms of molecules number and weight of each constituent DNA. Table 14 and Table 15 lists the entire process from PCR to extension in concentrations for each component on a per reaction basis.
  • Initial analysis considers at what point no signal is observed to establish a statistically significant sensitivity threshold. This analysis considers the overall data encompassing all multiplexes, and also takes into account variability that may occur when extending a specific base as well as what impact, if any, the wild type background genotype has on successful extension. This analysis evaluates how the sensitivity has effect on specificity.
  • TABLE 13
    Extension mix table
    Total
    Weight Weight Weight Total %
    (ng) molecules (ng) molecules (ng) molecules Mutant
    45 15000 45 15000 90 30000 50
    78.75 26250 11.25 3750 90 30000 12.5
    87.19 29062 2.81 938 90 30000 3.13
    89.3 29765 0.71 235 90 30000 0.78
    89.82 29941 0.18 59 90 30000 0.2
    89.96 29985 0.05 15 90 30000 0.05
    89.99 29996 0.01 4 90 30000 0.01
    90 30000 0 0 90 30000 0
  • Concordance
  • Concordance analysis considers the data collected from the sensitivity and specificity experiments. All replicates are gauged for agreement within each experiment as well as agreement across experiments. The “golden standard genotype” is established by running the model system itself in the model system quality control.
  • An additional measure of concordance is performed with samples provided by Horizon Diagnostics. Horizon Diagnostics provides genetically defined gDNA and FFPE cell reference standards. Evaluation considers no more than 23 samples that are FFPE prepared. Eight to fifteen mutations are selected from a list prepared by Horizon. To explore the power of the detection system, mutants selected are purchased with the corresponding wild type version, or mixed with in house healthy population samples. The samples provided by Horizon are in 50% mutant state and a dilution is required to evaluate sensitive detection in this context. The dilution series is the same as utilized in the sensitivity and specificity evaluation. In addition, a non-templated control is run to bring total sample number to 24. All samples are run in quadruplicate for a total of eight 96 well plate. This experimental design will include an iPLEX “golden standard” using the Horizon Diagnostic samples without dilution. This evaluation not only further assesses concordance to traditional iPLEX, but also gives information on performance of actual FFPE samples.
  • Control Variables
  • Pre-enrichment processing: All reactions are carried out according to iPLEX SOP up to the extension step. These processes are detailed in Table 14 and Table 15. All reagents used are controlled so that the same lot of reagents is used across the studies.
  • Bead Processing: Conditioning, wash, and elution steps have been established from other studies to produce a reliable system. After elution strategies have been decided upon from the Pre-Testing phase, a defined protocol is used for all ensuing experiments.
  • Sample DNA: DNA derived from three sources is used for all studies. The first is plasmid DNA containing the model system. Secondly is HapMap samples from Utah residents of European ancestry. Lastly is DNA provided by Horizon Diagnostics.
  • Instrumentation: Pre and Post-PCR instrumentation include either the PlateMate 2×2 and/or the Hamilton Micro Lab 4000. Nanodispensing is performed on the Sequenom Nanodispenser RS1000 with analyte detection using the MassARRAY Analyzer 4. All instrumentation serial numbers are cataloged.
  • TABLE 14
    PCR Setup
    Volume
    Final Concentration for Single
    Reagent per Reaction Reaction [ml]
    RNase-free ddH2O N/A 1.16
    10X Buffer (w/20 mM MgCl2) 1x 0.50
    dNTPs (25 mM each) 200 uM 0.04
    MgCl2 (25 mM) 1.0 mM 0.20
    Fastart Taq (5 U/ul) 0.1 U/rxn 0.10
    Primer Mix (1 uM) 200 nM 1.00
    DNA (5 ng/ul) 10 ng/rxn 2.00
    TOTAL 5.00
    PCR Amplification Parameters
    95 C. 15 min
    95 C. 20 sec 46 cycles
    56 C. 20 sec
    72 C.  1 min
    72 C.  3 min
     4 C.
    SAP Addition
    Final Concentration Volume for Single
    Reagent per Reaction Reaction [ml]
    RNase-free ddH2O N/A 1.53
    10X SAP Buffer 0.24X 0.17
    SAP enzyme (1.7 U/ul) 0.073 U/ul 0.30
    TOTAL 2.00
    SAP incubation
    37° C. 20 min
    85° C.  6 min
     4° C.
  • TABLE 15
    Extension Reaction
    Volume
    Final Concentration for Single
    Reagent per Reaction Reaction [ml]
    H2O N/A 0.56
    10X Buffer 0.222X 0.20
    Primer mix (9 uM) 1 um 1.00
    Biotinylated ddNTPs (250 uM) 5.56 uM 0.20
    Thermosequenase (32 U/ul) 1.3 U/rxn 0.04
    TOTAL 2.00
    Extension Parameters
    94° C. 30 sec
    94° C.  5 sec 40 cycles
    52° C.  6 sec 5 cycles
    80° C.  6 sec
    72° C.  3 min
     4° C.
  • Response Variables
  • The experiments employed in this test plan are evaluated for several parameters. Control variables have potential impact on several parameters. The ability of the process to deliver a reliable and desirable result is evaluated. Any bearing on response variable that can be reliably ascertained by control variables is accounted for.
      • Peak heights
      • Peak confidence scores
      • Expected genotypes
  • TABLE 16
    Bead Conditioning
    Vortex MyOne Steptavidin C1 beads to completely resuspend beads.
    Transfer beads to a tube as follows:
    Reagent Vol per Reaction
    Beads
    10
    Place on magnet at least 3 min to concentrate beads; remove supernatant.
    Add 2x Binding Buffer to the tube as follows:
    Reagent Vol per Reaction
    2x Binding Buffer 10
    Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture bea
    Figure US20130017960A1-20130117-P00899
    Add 2x Binding Buffer to the tube to repeat for a total of 2 washes as
    follows:
    Reagent Vol per Reaction
    2x Binding Buffer 10
    Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture beads; remove
    supernatant.
    Capture
    Resupend beads in 2x Binding Buffer as follows:
    Reagent Vol per Reaction
    2x Binding Buffer 25
    Add an equal volume the 2x Binding Buffer with Beads to each well of
    PCR reaction:
    25 ul Beads in 2x Binding Buffer
    25 ul PCR product
    50 ul
    Rotate plate to mix for 15-30 min at room temp.
    Place plate on magnetic separator, remove supernatant.
    Bead Wash
    Add
    1x WASH Buffer as follows:
    Reagent Vol per Reaction
    1x WASH Buffer 50
    Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture beads; remove
    supernatant.
    Add 1x WASH Buffer to the tube to repeat for a total of 2 washes as
    follows:
    Reagent Vol per Reaction
    1x WASH Buffer 100
    Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture beads; remove
    supernatant.
    Add WATER as follows:
    Reagent Vol per Reaction
    WATER
    100
    Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture beads; remove
    supernatant.
    Add WATER to the tube to repeat for a total of 2 washes as follows:
    Reagent Vol per Reaction
    WATER
    100
    Mix gently, then place 2-3 min on magnet to capture beads; remove
    supernatant.
    Elution
    Add
    15 of BIOTIN (Resin treated, 25 ng/ul).
    Heat to 90 C. for 5 min. then chill to 4 C.
    Place on magnet for 2-3 min to capture beads
    Remove supernatant to a clean 96-well plate and run on MALDI.
    Figure US20130017960A1-20130117-P00899
    indicates data missing or illegible when filed
  • Bead Process
  • Beads are conditioned in 2× binding buffer and a final volume of 25 ul conditioned beads are added to the 9 ul extension reaction. Water is added to bring the total volume to 50 ul. Bead capture is executed in a 96 well plate to accommodate the volume. Capture of extension products is performed on the hematology rotator at room temperature for 30 minutes. After capture, the beads are washed of reaction components in a 1× Tris buffer solution. This wash is repeated for a total of two washes. The beads are then washed with water. The water wash is also repeated for a total of two more washes. Each wash step utilizes 100 ul total volume. A 96 well plate magnet is used to pellet beads. The wash steps can be done manually or through the use of automation. Washed beads are re-suspended in 15 ul of concentrated free biotin solution (25 ng/ul; resin treated). Free biotin is allowed to out compete the biotinylated extension products at 90° C. for 5 min. Of the 15 ul re-suspension, 10 ul is aspirated while beads are pelleted under magnet. This 10 ul clean eluent is dispensed into a 384 well plate for dispensing. Bead conditioning and washing parameters are shown in Table 16.
  • Dispensing parameters require some alterations to typical dispensing protocols given volume height and analyte characteristics. Aspiration offset is set to 8 mm and dispense speed is changed to approximately 150 mm/sec or other higher dispense speed to account for viscosity difference in this analyte from typical iPLEX biochemistry.
  • Example 15 Non-Limiting Examples of Embodiments
  • Provided hereafter are non-limiting examples of certain embodiments of the technology.
  • A1. A method for determining the presence or absence of a plurality of target nucleic acids in a composition, which comprises:
      • (a) preparing amplicons of the target nucleic acids by amplifying the target nucleic acids, or portions thereof, under amplification conditions;
      • (b) contacting the amplicons in solution with a set of oligonucleotides under hybridization conditions, where each oligonucleotide in the set includes a hybridization sequence capable of specifically hybridizing to one amplicon under the hybridization conditions when the amplicon is present in the solution;
      • (c) generating extended oligonucleotides that include a capture agent by extending oligonucleotides hybridized to the amplicons by one or more nucleotides, wherein one of the one of more nucleotides is a terminating nucleotide and one or more of the nucleotides added to the oligonucleotides includes the capture agent;
      • (d) contacting the extended oligonucleotides with a solid phase under conditions in which the capture agent interacts with the solid phase;
      • (e) releasing the extended oligonucleotides that have interacted with the solid phase by competition with a competitor; and
      • (f) detecting the extended oligonucleotides released in (e) by mass spectrometry; whereby the presence or absence of each target nucleic acid is determined by the presence or absence of the corresponding extended oligonucleotide.
  • A1.1. The method of embodiment A1, wherein (i) the mass of one oligonucleotide species detectably differs from the masses of the other oligonucleotide species in the set; and (ii) each oligonucleotide species specifically corresponds to a specific amplicon and thereby specifically corresponds to a specific target nucleic acid.
  • A1.2. A method for determining the presence or absence of a plurality of target nucleic acids in a composition, which comprises:
      • (a) preparing amplicons of the target nucleic acids by amplifying the target nucleic acids, or portions thereof, under amplification conditions;
      • (b) contacting the amplicons in solution with a set of oligonucleotides under hybridization conditions, wherein:
        • (i) each oligonucleotide in the set comprises a hybridization sequence capable of specifically hybridizing to one amplicon under the hybridization conditions when the amplicon is present in the solution,
        • (ii) each oligonucleotide in the set comprises a mass distinguishable tag located 5′ of the hybridization sequence,
        • (iii) the mass of the mass distinguishable tag of one oligonucleotide detectably differs from the masses of mass distinguishable tags of the other oligonucleotides in the set; and
        • (iv) each mass distinguishable tag specifically corresponds to a specific amplicon and thereby specifically corresponds to a specific target nucleic acid;
      • (c) generating extended oligonucleotides that comprise a capture agent by extending oligonucleotides hybridized to the amplicons by one or more nucleotides, wherein one of the one of more nucleotides is a terminating nucleotide and one or more of the nucleotides added to the oligonucleotides comprises the capture agent;
      • (d) contacting the extended oligonucleotides with a solid phase under conditions in which the capture agent interacts with the solid phase;
      • (e) releasing the mass distinguishable tags in association with the extended oligonucleotides that have interacted with the solid phase from the solid phase by competition with a competitor; and
      • (f) detecting the mass distinguishable tags released in (e) by mass spectrometry; whereby the presence or absence of each target nucleic acid is determined by the presence or absence of the corresponding mass distinguishable tag.
  • A2. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A1.2, wherein competition with a competitor comprises contacting the solid phase with a competitor.
  • A3. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A2, wherein the competitor consists of free capture agent, or a competing fragment or multimer thereof.
  • A3.1. The method of embodiment A3, wherein the competitor consists of free capture agent.
  • A4. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A3.1, wherein the nucleotide that comprises the capture agent is a capture agent conjugated to a nucleotide triphosphate.
  • A5. The method of embodiment A4, wherein the nucleotide triphosphate is a dideoxynucleotide triphosphate.
  • A6. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A5, wherein the capture agent comprises a member of a binding pair.
  • A7. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A6, wherein the capture agent comprises biotin.
  • A8. The method of embodiment A7, wherein the solid phase comprises avidin or streptavidin.
  • A9. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A6, wherein the capture agent comprises avidin or streptavidin.
  • A10. The method of embodiment A9, wherein the solid phase comprises biotin.
  • A11. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A10, wherein releasing the mass distinguishable tags by competition with free capture agent is carried out under elevated temperature conditions.
  • A12. The method of embodiment A11, wherein the elevated temperature conditions comprise treatment for about 5 minutes at about 90 degrees Celsius.
  • A13. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A12, wherein (c) is carried out in one container and the method further comprises transferring the released mass distinguishable tags to another container between (e) and (f).
  • A14. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A13, wherein the solution containing amplicons produced in (a) is treated with an agent that removes terminal phosphates from any nucleotides not incorporated into the amplicons.
  • A15. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A14, wherein the terminal phosphate is removed by contacting the solution with a phosphatase.
  • A16. The method of embodiment A15, wherein the phosphatase is alkaline phosphatase.
  • A17. The method of embodiment A16, wherein the alkaline phosphatase is shrimp alkaline phosphatase.
  • A18. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A17, wherein the terminal nucleotides in the extended oligonucleotides comprise the capture agent.
  • A19. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A18, wherein one or more non-terminal nucleotides in the extended oligonucleotides comprise the capture agent.
  • A20. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A19, wherein the hybridization sequence is about 5 to about 200 nucleotides in length.
  • A21. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A20, wherein the solid phase is selected from a flat surface, a bead, a silicon chip, or combinations of the foregoing.
  • A22. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A21, wherein the solid phase is paramagnetic.
  • A23. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A22, wherein the mass spectrometry is matrix-assisted laser desorption ionization (MALDI) mass spectrometry.
  • A24. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A23, wherein the mass spectrometry is electrospray (ES) mass spectrometry.
  • A25. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A24, wherein the presence or absence of about 1 to about 50 or more target nucleic acids is detected.
  • A26. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A25, wherein the mass distinguishable tag consists of nucleotides.
  • A27. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A26, wherein the mass distinguishable tag is a nucleotide compomer.
  • A28. The method of embodiment A27, wherein the nucleotide compomer is about 5 nucleotides to about 150 nucleotides in length.
  • A29. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A28, wherein the target nucleic acids are genomic DNA.
  • A30. The method of embodiment A29, wherein the genomic DNA is human genomic DNA.
  • A31. The method of any one of embodiments A1 to A30, wherein the detecting in (f) comprises a signal to noise ratio greater than the signal to noise ratio for a method in which releasing does not comprise competition with a competitor.
  • B1. A method for detecting the presence, absence or amount of a plurality of genetic variants in a composition, comprising:
      • (a) preparing a plurality of amplicons derived from a plurality of target nucleic acid species, or portions thereof, wherein each target nucleic acid species comprises a first variant and a second variant;
      • (b) hybridizing the amplicons to oligonucleotide species, wherein each oligonucleotide species hybridizes to an amplicon derived from a target nucleic acid species, thereby generating hybridized oligonucleotide species; and
      • (c) contacting the hybridized oligonucleotide species with an extension composition comprising one or more terminating nucleotides under extension conditions; wherein:
        • (i) at least one of the one or more terminating nucleotides comprises a capture agent, and
        • (ii) the hybridized oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the first variant are extended by a terminating nucleotide and the hybridized oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the second variant are not extended by a terminating nucleotide, thereby generating extended oliognucleotide species;
      • (d) capturing the extended oligonucleotide species to a solid phase that captures the capture agent;
      • (e) releasing the extended oligonucleotide species bound to the solid phase in (d) from the solid phase; and
      • (f) detecting the mass of each extended oligonucleotide species released from the solid phase in (e) by mass spectrometry; whereby the presence, absence or amount of the genetic variants is detected.
  • B2. The method of embodiment 1, wherein each oligonucleotide species comprises a mass distinguishable tag located 5′ of the hybridization sequence
  • B3. The method of embodiment 1 or 2, wherein the first variant is a lower abundance variation and the second variant is a higher abundance variation.
  • B4. The method of any one of embodiments 1 to 3, wherein the genetic variants are single nucleotide polymorphism (SNP) variants, the first variant is a lower abundance allele and the second variant is a higher abundance allele.
  • B5. The method of any one of embodiments 1 to 4, wherein the one or more terminating nucleotides consist of one terminating nucleotide.
  • B6. The method of any one of embodiments 1 to 4, wherein the one or more terminating nucleotides consist of two terminating nucleotides.
  • B7. The method of any one of embodiments 1 to 4, wherein the one or more terminating nucleotides consist of three terminating nucleotides.
  • B8. The method of any one of embodiments 1 to 4, wherein the one or more terminating nucleotides independently are selected from ddATP, ddGTP, ddCTP, ddTTP and ddUTP.
  • B9. The method of any one of embodiments 1 to 4 wherein the extension composition comprises a non-terminating nucleotide.
  • B10. The method of embodiment 9, wherein the extension composition comprises one or more extension nucleotides, which extension nucleotides comprise no capture agent.
  • B11. The method of any one of embodiments 1 to 10, wherein releasing the extended oligonucleotide species comprises contacting the solid phase with a releasing agent.
  • B12. The method of embodiment 11 wherein the capture agent comprises biotin or a biotin analogue, the solid phase comprises streptavidin and the releasing agent comprises free biotin or a biotin analogue.
  • B13. The method of embodiments 11 or 12 wherein the releasing agent has a higher affinity for the solid phase than the capture agent.
  • B14. The method of any one of embodiments 11 to 13 wherein releasing the extended oligonucleotide species in (e) comprises heating from about 30° C. to about 100° C.
  • B15. The method of embodiment 14, comprising heating from about 60° C. to about 100° C.
  • B16. The method of embodiment 14, comprising heating from about 89° C. to about 100° C.
  • B17. The method of embodiment 14, comprising heating to about 90° C.
  • B18. The method of any one of embodiments 1 to 17, wherein the plurality of target nucleic acid species is 20 or more target nucleic acid species.
  • B19. The method of any one of embodiments 1 to 18, wherein the plurality of target nucleic acid species is 200 or more target nucleic acid species.
  • B20. The method of any one of embodiments 1 to 19, wherein the plurality of target nucleic acid species is 200 to 300 target nucleic acid species.
  • B21. The method of any one of embodiments 1 to 20, wherein the extension conditions in (c) comprise cycling 20 to 300 times.
  • B22. The method of any one of embodiments 1 to 19 wherein the extension conditions in (c) comprise cycling 200 to 300 times.
  • B23. The method of any one of embodiments 1 to 22 wherein the extension reaction comprises a competitor oligonucleotide.
  • B24. The method of any one of embodiments 1 to 23 comprising washing the solid phase after the extended oligonucleotide species is captured.
  • B25. The embodiment of B24 wherein the washing removes salts that produce interfering adducts in mass spectrometry analysis.
  • B26. The embodiment of B25 wherein extended oligonucleotides are not contacted with an ion exchange resin.
  • B27. The method of any one of embodiments B1 to B26, wherein the detecting in (f) is with a signal to noise ratio greater than a signal to noise ratio for detecting after releasing without competition with a competitor.
  • B28. The method of any one of embodiments B1 to B27, wherein a signal to noise ratio for extending only a mutant allele is greater than a signal to noise ratio for extending a wild type and a mutant allele.
  • B29. The method of any one of embodiments B1 to B28, wherein the sensitivity of detecting a mutant allele in (f) is greater for extending only a mutant allele than for extending a wild type and a mutant allele.
  • B30. The method of any one of embodiments B1 to B29, wherein the extended oligonucleotide species of the second variant is not detected.
  • B31. The method of any one of embodiments B12 to B30, wherein the free biotin or biotin analogue is added at a concentration from about 10 to about 100 ug/ml.
  • B32. The embodiment of B31, wherein the free biotin or biotin analogue is added at a concentration of about 25 ug/ml.
  • B33. The method of any one of embodiments B1 to B32 wherein the composition comprises a synthetic template and the amount and/or percentage of a first variant in the composition is determined wherein the synthetic template comprises a variant different than in the first variant and second variant and hybridizes to the same oligonucleotides species.
  • The entirety of each patent, patent application, publication and document referenced herein hereby is incorporated by reference. Citation of the above patents, patent applications, publications and documents is not an admission that any of the foregoing is pertinent prior art, nor does it constitute any admission as to the contents or date of these publications or documents.
  • Modifications may be made to the foregoing without departing from the basic aspects of the technology. Although the technology has been described in substantial detail with reference to one or more specific embodiments, those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that changes may be made to the embodiments specifically disclosed in this application, yet these modifications and improvements are within the scope and spirit of the technology.
  • The technology illustratively described herein suitably may be practiced in the absence of any element(s) not specifically disclosed herein. Thus, for example, in each instance herein any of the terms “comprising,” “consisting essentially of,” and “consisting of” may be replaced with either of the other two terms. The terms and expressions which have been employed are used as terms of description and not of limitation, and use of such terms and expressions do not exclude any equivalents of the features shown and described or portions thereof, and various modifications are possible within the scope of the technology claimed. The term “a” or “an” can refer to one of or a plurality of the elements it modifies (e.g., “a reagent” can mean one or more reagents) unless it is contextually clear either one of the elements or more than one of the elements is described. The term “about” as used herein refers to a value within 10% of the underlying parameter (i.e., plus or minus 10%), and use of the term “about” at the beginning of a string of values modifies each of the values (i.e., “about 1, 2 and 3” is about 1, about 2 and about 3). For example, a weight of “about 100 grams” can include weights between 90 grams and 110 grams. Thus, it should be understood that although the present technology has been specifically disclosed by representative embodiments and optional features, modification and variation of the concepts herein disclosed may be resorted to by those skilled in the art, and such modifications and variations are considered within the scope of this technology.
  • Embodiments of the technology are set forth in the claim(s) that follow(s).

Claims (30)

1. A method for detecting the presence, absence or amount of a plurality of genetic variants in a composition, comprising:
(a) preparing a plurality of amplicons derived from a plurality of target nucleic acid species, or portions thereof, wherein each target nucleic acid species comprises a first variant and a second variant;
(b) hybridizing the amplicons to oligonucleotide species, wherein each oligonucleotide species hybridizes to an amplicon derived from a target nucleic acid species, thereby generating hybridized oligonucleotide species; and
(c) contacting the hybridized oligonucleotide species with an extension composition comprising one or more terminating nucleotides under extension conditions; wherein:
(i) at least one of the one or more terminating nucleotide comprises a capture agent, and
(ii) the hybridized oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the first variant are extended by a terminating nucleotide and the hybridized oligonucleotide species that hybridize to the second variant are not extended by a terminating nucleotide, thereby generating extended oliognucleotide species;
(d) capturing the extended oligonucleotide species to a solid phase that captures the capture agent;
(e) releasing the extended oligonucleotide species bound to the solid phase in (d) from the solid phase; and
(f) detecting the mass of each extended oligonucleotide species released from the solid phase in (e) by mass spectrometry; whereby the presence, absence or amount of the genetic variants is detected.
2. The method of claim 1, wherein each oligonucleotide species comprises a mass distinguishable tag located 5′ of the hybridization sequence.
3. The method of claim 1, wherein the first variant is a lower abundance variation and the second variant is a higher abundance variation.
4. The method of claim 1, wherein the genetic variants are single nucleotide polymorphism (SNP) variants, the first variant is a lower abundance allele and the second variant is a higher abundance allele.
5. The method of claim 1, wherein the one or more terminating nucleotides consist of one terminating nucleotide.
6. The method of claim 1, wherein the one or more terminating nucleotides consist of two terminating nucleotides.
7. The method of claim 1, wherein the one or more terminating nucleotides consist of three terminating nucleotides.
8. The method of claim 1, wherein the one or more terminating nucleotides independently are selected from ddATP, ddGTP, ddCTP, ddTTP and ddUTP.
9. The method of claim 1, wherein the extension composition comprises a non-terminating nucleotide.
10. The method of claim 1, wherein the extension composition comprises one or more extension nucleotides, which extension nucleotides comprise no capture agent.
11. The method of claim 1, wherein releasing the extended oligonucleotide species comprises contacting the solid phase with a releasing agent.
12. The method of claim 11 wherein the capture agent comprises biotin or a biotin analogue, the solid phase comprises streptavidin and the releasing agent comprises free biotin or a biotin analogue.
13. The method of claim 11 wherein the releasing agent has a higher affinity for the solid phase than the capture agent.
14. The method of claim 1 wherein releasing the extended oligonucleotide species in (e) comprises heating from about 60° C. to about 100° C.
15. The method of claim 1, wherein the plurality of target nucleic acid species is 20 or more target nucleic acid species.
16. The method of claim 1, wherein the plurality of target nucleic acid species is 200 or more target nucleic acid species.
17. The method of claim 1, wherein the plurality of target nucleic acid species is 200 to 300 target nucleic acid species.
18. The method of claim 1, wherein the extension conditions in (c) comprise cycling 20 to 300 times.
19. The method of claim 1, wherein the extension conditions in (c) comprise cycling 200 to 300 times.
20. The method of claim 1, comprising washing the solid phase after the extended oligonucleotide species is captured.
21. The method of claim of 20, wherein the washing removes salts that produce interfering adducts in mass spectrometry analysis.
22. The method of claim of 1, wherein extended oligonucleotides are not contacted with an ion exchange resin.
23. The method of claim 1, wherein a signal to noise ratio and/or a sensitivity for extending only a mutant allele is greater than a signal to noise ratio and/or a sensitivity for extending a wild type and a mutant allele.
24. The method of claim 1, wherein the extended oligonucleotide species of the second variant is not detected.
25. The method of claim 11, wherein the releasing agent is added at a concentration from about 10 to about 100 ug/ml.
26. The method of claim 1, wherein the composition comprises a synthetic template and the amount and/or percentage of a first variant in the composition is determined wherein the synthetic template comprises a variant different than in the first variant and second variant and hybridizes to the same oligonucleotides species.
27. A method for determining the presence or absence of a plurality of target nucleic acids in a composition, which comprises:
(a) preparing amplicons of the target nucleic acids by amplifying the target nucleic acids, or portions thereof, under amplification conditions;
(b) contacting the amplicons in solution with a set of oligonucleotides under hybridization conditions, wherein:
(i) each oligonucleotide in the set comprises a hybridization sequence capable of specifically hybridizing to one amplicon under the hybridization conditions when the amplicon is present in the solution,
(ii) each oligonucleotide in the set comprises a mass distinguishable tag located 5′ of the hybridization sequence,
(iii) the mass of the mass distinguishable tag of one oligonucleotide detectably differs from the masses of mass distinguishable tags of the other oligonucleotides in the set; and
(iv) each mass distinguishable tag specifically corresponds to a specific amplicon and thereby specifically corresponds to a specific target nucleic acid;
(c) generating extended oligonucleotides that comprise a capture agent by extending oligonucleotides hybridized to the amplicons by one or more nucleotides, wherein one of the one of more nucleotides is a terminating nucleotide and one or more of the nucleotides added to the oligonucleotides comprises the capture agent;
(d) contacting the extended oligonucleotides with a solid phase under conditions in which the capture agent interacts with the solid phase;
(e) releasing the mass distinguishable tags in association with the extended oligonucleotides that have interacted with the solid phase from the solid phase by competition with a competitor; and
(f) detecting the mass distinguishable tags released in (e) by mass spectrometry; whereby the presence or absence of each target nucleic acid is determined by the presence or absence of the corresponding mass distinguishable tag.
28. The method of claim 27, wherein competition with a competitor comprises contacting the solid phase with a competitor.
29. The method of claim 27, wherein the competitor consists of free capture agent, or a competing fragment or multimer thereof.
30. The method of 27, wherein the detecting in (f) comprises a signal to noise ratio greater than the signal to noise ratio for a method in which releasing does not comprise competition with a competitor.
US13/551,486 2011-05-19 2012-07-17 Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification Active US10604791B2 (en)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US13/551,486 US10604791B2 (en) 2011-05-19 2012-07-17 Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification
US13/790,996 US20140011195A1 (en) 2011-05-19 2013-03-08 Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification
US16/793,732 US11667958B2 (en) 2011-05-19 2020-02-18 Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification
US18/139,303 US20230407375A1 (en) 2011-05-19 2023-04-25 Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US201161488082P 2011-05-19 2011-05-19
PCT/US2012/038710 WO2012159089A1 (en) 2011-05-19 2012-05-18 Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification
US13/551,486 US10604791B2 (en) 2011-05-19 2012-07-17 Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US2012/038710 Continuation WO2012159089A1 (en) 2011-05-19 2012-05-18 Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification

Related Child Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/790,996 Division US20140011195A1 (en) 2011-05-19 2013-03-08 Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification
US16/793,732 Continuation US11667958B2 (en) 2011-05-19 2020-02-18 Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20130017960A1 true US20130017960A1 (en) 2013-01-17
US10604791B2 US10604791B2 (en) 2020-03-31

Family

ID=46147797

Family Applications (4)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/551,486 Active US10604791B2 (en) 2011-05-19 2012-07-17 Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification
US13/790,996 Abandoned US20140011195A1 (en) 2011-05-19 2013-03-08 Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification
US16/793,732 Active US11667958B2 (en) 2011-05-19 2020-02-18 Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification
US18/139,303 Pending US20230407375A1 (en) 2011-05-19 2023-04-25 Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification

Family Applications After (3)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US13/790,996 Abandoned US20140011195A1 (en) 2011-05-19 2013-03-08 Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification
US16/793,732 Active US11667958B2 (en) 2011-05-19 2020-02-18 Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification
US18/139,303 Pending US20230407375A1 (en) 2011-05-19 2023-04-25 Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification

Country Status (8)

Country Link
US (4) US10604791B2 (en)
EP (1) EP2710144B1 (en)
JP (2) JP6040227B2 (en)
CN (2) CN103717751A (en)
AU (1) AU2012254985C1 (en)
CA (1) CA2835942C (en)
EA (1) EA027558B1 (en)
WO (1) WO2012159089A1 (en)

Cited By (7)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10233489B2 (en) 2015-04-24 2019-03-19 Agena Bioscience, Inc. Multiplexed method for the identification and quantitation of minor alleles and polymorphisms
US10604791B2 (en) 2011-05-19 2020-03-31 Agena Bioscience, Inc. Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification
US10640817B2 (en) 2015-04-24 2020-05-05 Agena Bioscience, Inc. Multiplex methods for detection and quantification of minor variants
US20210054435A1 (en) * 2016-09-15 2021-02-25 ArcherDX, Inc. Methods of nucleic acid sample preparation
US20210180118A1 (en) * 2016-11-02 2021-06-17 Archerdx, Llc Methods of nucleic acid sample preparation for immune repertoire sequencing
US20220119874A1 (en) * 2011-05-20 2022-04-21 Fluidigm Corporation Nucleic acid encoding reactions
US11857940B2 (en) 2015-12-16 2024-01-02 Fluidigm Corporation High-level multiplex amplification

Families Citing this family (51)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US8623603B2 (en) 2010-03-08 2014-01-07 Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Inc. Full cold-PCR enrichment with reference blocking sequence
US20190300945A1 (en) 2010-04-05 2019-10-03 Prognosys Biosciences, Inc. Spatially Encoded Biological Assays
US10787701B2 (en) 2010-04-05 2020-09-29 Prognosys Biosciences, Inc. Spatially encoded biological assays
US11130992B2 (en) 2011-03-31 2021-09-28 Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Inc. Methods and compositions to enable multiplex COLD-PCR
GB201106254D0 (en) 2011-04-13 2011-05-25 Frisen Jonas Method and product
CN113403303A (en) 2013-03-15 2021-09-17 雅培分子公司 Compositions and methods for nucleic acid extraction
WO2014210225A1 (en) 2013-06-25 2014-12-31 Prognosys Biosciences, Inc. Methods and systems for determining spatial patterns of biological targets in a sample
EP3736344A1 (en) 2014-03-13 2020-11-11 Sequenom, Inc. Methods and processes for non-invasive assessment of genetic variations
US10774374B2 (en) 2015-04-10 2020-09-15 Spatial Transcriptomics AB and Illumina, Inc. Spatially distinguished, multiplex nucleic acid analysis of biological specimens
WO2016210224A1 (en) 2015-06-24 2016-12-29 Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Inc. Selective degradation of wild-type dna and enrichment of mutant alleles using nuclease
CN109952607B (en) 2016-08-05 2021-08-24 堺显示器制品株式会社 Drive circuit and display device
US11371090B2 (en) 2016-12-12 2022-06-28 Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Inc. Compositions and methods for molecular barcoding of DNA molecules prior to mutation enrichment and/or mutation detection
US20190367970A1 (en) * 2018-06-01 2019-12-05 Agena Bioscience, Inc. Products and processes for nucleic acid detection and quantification
CN108913791A (en) * 2018-06-26 2018-11-30 福建医科大学孟超肝胆医院 One kind being based on target gene MassARRAY Drug Resistance Detection method
JP7423603B2 (en) * 2018-08-09 2024-01-29 スピードックス・プロプライエタリー・リミテッド Multiplex detection of nucleic acids
US11519033B2 (en) 2018-08-28 2022-12-06 10X Genomics, Inc. Method for transposase-mediated spatial tagging and analyzing genomic DNA in a biological sample
WO2020123316A2 (en) 2018-12-10 2020-06-18 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods for determining a location of a biological analyte in a biological sample
US11926867B2 (en) 2019-01-06 2024-03-12 10X Genomics, Inc. Generating capture probes for spatial analysis
US11649485B2 (en) 2019-01-06 2023-05-16 10X Genomics, Inc. Generating capture probes for spatial analysis
CN110144399B (en) * 2019-04-09 2021-12-03 中源维康(天津)医学检验所有限公司 Primer group and kit for detecting lung cancer related gene mutation in human circulating tumor DNA and using method
WO2021092433A2 (en) 2019-11-08 2021-05-14 10X Genomics, Inc. Enhancing specificity of analyte binding
EP4055185A1 (en) 2019-11-08 2022-09-14 10X Genomics, Inc. Spatially-tagged analyte capture agents for analyte multiplexing
FI3891300T3 (en) 2019-12-23 2023-05-10 10X Genomics Inc Methods for spatial analysis using rna-templated ligation
US11732299B2 (en) 2020-01-21 2023-08-22 10X Genomics, Inc. Spatial assays with perturbed cells
US11702693B2 (en) 2020-01-21 2023-07-18 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods for printing cells and generating arrays of barcoded cells
US11821035B1 (en) 2020-01-29 2023-11-21 10X Genomics, Inc. Compositions and methods of making gene expression libraries
US11898205B2 (en) 2020-02-03 2024-02-13 10X Genomics, Inc. Increasing capture efficiency of spatial assays
US11732300B2 (en) 2020-02-05 2023-08-22 10X Genomics, Inc. Increasing efficiency of spatial analysis in a biological sample
US11835462B2 (en) 2020-02-11 2023-12-05 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods and compositions for partitioning a biological sample
US11891654B2 (en) 2020-02-24 2024-02-06 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods of making gene expression libraries
US11926863B1 (en) 2020-02-27 2024-03-12 10X Genomics, Inc. Solid state single cell method for analyzing fixed biological cells
US11768175B1 (en) 2020-03-04 2023-09-26 10X Genomics, Inc. Electrophoretic methods for spatial analysis
EP4242325A3 (en) 2020-04-22 2023-10-04 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods for spatial analysis using targeted rna depletion
EP4153775A1 (en) 2020-05-22 2023-03-29 10X Genomics, Inc. Simultaneous spatio-temporal measurement of gene expression and cellular activity
EP4153776A1 (en) 2020-05-22 2023-03-29 10X Genomics, Inc. Spatial analysis to detect sequence variants
WO2021242834A1 (en) 2020-05-26 2021-12-02 10X Genomics, Inc. Method for resetting an array
AU2021283184A1 (en) 2020-06-02 2023-01-05 10X Genomics, Inc. Spatial transcriptomics for antigen-receptors
EP4025692A2 (en) 2020-06-02 2022-07-13 10X Genomics, Inc. Nucleic acid library methods
WO2021252499A1 (en) 2020-06-08 2021-12-16 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods of determining a surgical margin and methods of use thereof
WO2021252591A1 (en) 2020-06-10 2021-12-16 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods for determining a location of an analyte in a biological sample
AU2021294334A1 (en) 2020-06-25 2023-02-02 10X Genomics, Inc. Spatial analysis of DNA methylation
US11761038B1 (en) 2020-07-06 2023-09-19 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods for identifying a location of an RNA in a biological sample
CN116547388A (en) * 2020-09-15 2023-08-04 10X基因组学有限公司 Method for releasing extended capture probes from a substrate and use thereof
US11926822B1 (en) 2020-09-23 2024-03-12 10X Genomics, Inc. Three-dimensional spatial analysis
US11827935B1 (en) 2020-11-19 2023-11-28 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods for spatial analysis using rolling circle amplification and detection probes
WO2022140028A1 (en) 2020-12-21 2022-06-30 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods, compositions, and systems for capturing probes and/or barcodes
CN112941182B (en) * 2021-03-11 2021-09-21 南京先声医学检验实验室有限公司 Gene detection method for medicine for treating rheumatic immune diseases based on nucleic acid mass spectrometry and application of gene detection method
EP4301870A1 (en) 2021-03-18 2024-01-10 10X Genomics, Inc. Multiplex capture of gene and protein expression from a biological sample
WO2023034489A1 (en) 2021-09-01 2023-03-09 10X Genomics, Inc. Methods, compositions, and kits for blocking a capture probe on a spatial array
WO2023125898A1 (en) * 2021-12-31 2023-07-06 柏锘(上海)医疗科技有限公司 Nucleic acid testing method and system
CN117558380B (en) * 2024-01-10 2024-04-09 中国科学院深圳先进技术研究院 High-flux preparation method and system of magnetic micro-nano material based on artificial intelligence algorithm

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5885775A (en) * 1996-10-04 1999-03-23 Perseptive Biosystems, Inc. Methods for determining sequences information in polynucleotides using mass spectrometry
US20050233381A1 (en) * 2001-03-19 2005-10-20 Liu David R Evolving new molecular
US20060166201A1 (en) * 2002-09-01 2006-07-27 Philipp Schatz Method for the detection of nucleic acid sequences by means of crackable probe molecules
US20080167197A1 (en) * 2000-03-14 2008-07-10 Electrophoretics Limited Mass labels
US20080305479A1 (en) * 2006-12-05 2008-12-11 Sequenom, Inc. Detection and quantification of biomolecules using mass spectrometry

Family Cites Families (88)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US4711955A (en) 1981-04-17 1987-12-08 Yale University Modified nucleotides and methods of preparing and using same
DE3301833A1 (en) 1983-01-20 1984-07-26 Gesellschaft für Biotechnologische Forschung mbH (GBF), 3300 Braunschweig METHOD FOR SIMULTANEOUS SYNTHESIS OF SEVERAL OLIGONOCLEOTIDES IN A SOLID PHASE
US5059654A (en) 1983-02-14 1991-10-22 Cuno Inc. Affinity matrices of modified polysaccharide supports
US4515781A (en) 1983-02-23 1985-05-07 The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Department Of Health And Human Services 2',5'-Riboadenylate-morpholinoadenylate nucleotides
US4582789A (en) 1984-03-21 1986-04-15 Cetus Corporation Process for labeling nucleic acids using psoralen derivatives
US4957858A (en) 1986-04-16 1990-09-18 The Salk Instute For Biological Studies Replicative RNA reporter systems
US5118605A (en) 1984-10-16 1992-06-02 Chiron Corporation Polynucleotide determination with selectable cleavage sites
WO1986002666A1 (en) * 1984-10-29 1986-05-09 Microgenics Corporation Methods for protein binding enzyme complementation assays
US5064754A (en) 1984-12-14 1991-11-12 Mills Randell L Genomic sequencing method
US4683195A (en) 1986-01-30 1987-07-28 Cetus Corporation Process for amplifying, detecting, and/or-cloning nucleic acid sequences
DE3788914T2 (en) 1986-09-08 1994-08-25 Ajinomoto Kk Compounds for cleaving RNA at a specific position, oligomers used in the preparation of these compounds and starting materials for the synthesis of these oligomers.
EP0269520A3 (en) 1986-11-21 1988-08-24 Institut Pasteur Retrovirus of the type hiv-2, susceptible to provoke aids, and its antigenic and nucleic-acid constituents
US5037882A (en) 1987-03-11 1991-08-06 Steel Samuel L Synthesis of oligonucleotide analogs
GB8810400D0 (en) 1988-05-03 1988-06-08 Southern E Analysing polynucleotide sequences
EP0347365B1 (en) 1988-06-14 1996-08-28 QIAGEN GmbH HIV-2 virus variants
US5003059A (en) 1988-06-20 1991-03-26 Genomyx, Inc. Determining DNA sequences by mass spectrometry
US5512439A (en) 1988-11-21 1996-04-30 Dynal As Oligonucleotide-linked magnetic particles and uses thereof
US5489507A (en) 1988-11-30 1996-02-06 Perkin-Elmer Corporation DNA detection by color complementation
US5237016A (en) 1989-01-05 1993-08-17 Siska Diagnostics, Inc. End-attachment of oligonucleotides to polyacrylamide solid supports for capture and detection of nucleic acids
US5242974A (en) 1991-11-22 1993-09-07 Affymax Technologies N.V. Polymer reversal on solid surfaces
US5143854A (en) 1989-06-07 1992-09-01 Affymax Technologies N.V. Large scale photolithographic solid phase synthesis of polypeptides and receptor binding screening thereof
AU650622B2 (en) 1989-07-11 1994-06-30 Gen-Probe Incorporated Nucleic acid sequence amplification methods utilizing a transcription complex
WO1991011533A1 (en) 1990-01-26 1991-08-08 E.I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Method for isolating primer extension products from template-directed dna polymerase reactions
US5650489A (en) 1990-07-02 1997-07-22 The Arizona Board Of Regents Random bio-oligomer library, a method of synthesis thereof, and a method of use thereof
EP0566670A4 (en) 1990-12-17 1993-12-08 Idexx Laboratories, Inc. Nucleic acid sequence detection by triple helix formation
US5364759B2 (en) 1991-01-31 1999-07-20 Baylor College Medicine Dna typing with short tandem repeat polymorphisms and identification of polymorphic short tandem repeats
US5888819A (en) 1991-03-05 1999-03-30 Molecular Tool, Inc. Method for determining nucleotide identity through primer extension
US6004744A (en) 1991-03-05 1999-12-21 Molecular Tool, Inc. Method for determining nucleotide identity through extension of immobilized primer
ATE173767T1 (en) 1992-04-03 1998-12-15 Perkin Elmer Corp SAMPLES COMPOSITION AND METHODS
US5412083A (en) 1992-04-16 1995-05-02 Northeastern University Carbohydrate heterobifunctional cross-linking reagent
WO1994000562A1 (en) 1992-06-24 1994-01-06 The Mt. Sinai School Of Medicine Of The City University Of New York A novel human immunodeficiency virus
US5710028A (en) 1992-07-02 1998-01-20 Eyal; Nurit Method of quick screening and identification of specific DNA sequences by single nucleotide primer extension and kits therefor
US6194144B1 (en) 1993-01-07 2001-02-27 Sequenom, Inc. DNA sequencing by mass spectrometry
US5605798A (en) 1993-01-07 1997-02-25 Sequenom, Inc. DNA diagnostic based on mass spectrometry
CA2153387A1 (en) 1993-01-07 1994-07-21 Hubert Koester Dna sequencing by mass spectrometry
US6074823A (en) 1993-03-19 2000-06-13 Sequenom, Inc. DNA sequencing by mass spectrometry via exonuclease degradation
JPH08507926A (en) 1993-03-19 1996-08-27 シーケノム・インコーポレーテツド DNA sequencing by mass spectrometry via exonuclease degradation
US5399857A (en) 1993-05-28 1995-03-21 The Johns Hopkins University Method and apparatus for trapping ions by increasing trapping voltage during ion introduction
JPH07159404A (en) * 1993-12-06 1995-06-23 Doujin Kagaku Kenkyusho:Kk Method of measuring substance using biotin spin labeled
US5976798A (en) 1994-03-30 1999-11-02 Mitokor Methods for detecting mitochondrial mutations diagnostic for Alzheimer's disease and methods for determining heteroplasmy of mitochondrial nucleic acid
GB9417211D0 (en) 1994-08-25 1994-10-12 Solicitor For The Affairs Of H Nucleotide sequencing method
AU708375B2 (en) * 1995-02-09 1999-08-05 University Of Washington Modified-affinity streptavidin
US6428955B1 (en) 1995-03-17 2002-08-06 Sequenom, Inc. DNA diagnostics based on mass spectrometry
WO1996030545A1 (en) 1995-03-24 1996-10-03 Mitokor Mutation detection by differential primer extension of mutant and wildtype target sequences
CA2218188A1 (en) 1995-04-11 1996-10-17 Trustees Of Boston University Solid phase sequencing of biopolymers
US5770272A (en) 1995-04-28 1998-06-23 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Matrix-bearing targets for maldi mass spectrometry and methods of production thereof
US5700642A (en) 1995-05-22 1997-12-23 Sri International Oligonucleotide sizing using immobilized cleavable primers
US5869242A (en) 1995-09-18 1999-02-09 Myriad Genetics, Inc. Mass spectrometry to assess DNA sequence polymorphisms
AU2217597A (en) 1996-03-18 1997-10-22 Sequenom, Inc. Dna sequencing by mass spectrometry
US5965363A (en) 1996-09-19 1999-10-12 Genetrace Systems Inc. Methods of preparing nucleic acids for mass spectrometric analysis
EP1164203B1 (en) 1996-11-06 2007-10-10 Sequenom, Inc. DNA Diagnostics based on mass spectrometry
DE69735445T2 (en) 1996-12-10 2006-08-10 Sequenom, Inc., San Diego NON-VOLATILE, NON-VOLATILE MOLECULES FOR MASS MARKING
US6613509B1 (en) 1999-03-22 2003-09-02 Regents Of The University Of California Determination of base (nucleotide) composition in DNA oligomers by mass spectrometry
US20050287592A1 (en) 2000-08-29 2005-12-29 Yeda Research And Development Co. Ltd. Template-dependent nucleic acid polymerization using oligonucleotide triphosphates building blocks
EP1176212A1 (en) * 2000-07-24 2002-01-30 Centre National de Genotype Method for haplotyping by mass spectrometry
US20030027169A1 (en) 2000-10-27 2003-02-06 Sheng Zhang One-well assay for high throughput detection of single nucleotide polymorphisms
GB0102568D0 (en) * 2001-02-01 2001-03-21 Magnetic Biosolutions Sweden A Method
US20040121314A1 (en) 2002-12-06 2004-06-24 Ecker David J. Methods for rapid detection and identification of bioagents in containers
US20030027135A1 (en) 2001-03-02 2003-02-06 Ecker David J. Method for rapid detection and identification of bioagents
US7226739B2 (en) 2001-03-02 2007-06-05 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc Methods for rapid detection and identification of bioagents in epidemiological and forensic investigations
US7217510B2 (en) 2001-06-26 2007-05-15 Isis Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods for providing bacterial bioagent characterizing information
US20030119004A1 (en) 2001-12-05 2003-06-26 Wenz H. Michael Methods for quantitating nucleic acids using coupled ligation and amplification
JP3752466B2 (en) * 2002-04-24 2006-03-08 株式会社日立製作所 Genetic testing method
EP1543153A2 (en) * 2002-06-07 2005-06-22 The Regents Of The University Of California Electrochemical detection of single nucleotide polymorphisms (snps)
US7074597B2 (en) 2002-07-12 2006-07-11 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Multiplex genotyping using solid phase capturable dideoxynucleotides and mass spectrometry
US20040259105A1 (en) 2002-10-03 2004-12-23 Jian-Bing Fan Multiplex nucleic acid analysis using archived or fixed samples
DK1660680T3 (en) 2003-07-31 2009-06-22 Sequenom Inc Process for High Level Multiplex Polymerase Chain Reactions and Homogeneous Mass Extension Reactions for Genotyping Polymorphisms
WO2006019407A2 (en) * 2004-02-18 2006-02-23 The Trustees Of Boston University Method for detecting and quantifying rare mutations/polymorphisms
CN100400673C (en) * 2004-03-18 2008-07-09 华晶基因技术有限公司 Method for detecting mononucleotide polymorphism and point mutation
WO2006073436A2 (en) 2004-04-29 2006-07-13 The Trustees Of Columbia University In The City Of New York Mass tag pcr for multiplex diagnostics
WO2005113804A1 (en) 2004-05-20 2005-12-01 Trillion Genomics Limited Use of mass labelled probes to detect target nucleic acids using mass spectrometry
JP4735926B2 (en) * 2004-05-27 2011-07-27 アイシン精機株式会社 Highly efficient recovery method of nucleic acid
US7785843B2 (en) 2004-06-23 2010-08-31 Sequenom, Inc. Target-specific compomers and methods of use
CA2599013A1 (en) * 2005-02-28 2006-09-08 Gen-Probe Incorporated Compositions and methods of detecting an analyte by using a nucleic acid hybridization switch probe
JP2006320271A (en) * 2005-05-20 2006-11-30 Tokyo Institute Of Technology Method for evaluation of binding between low molecular weight compound with protein
JP2008545444A (en) 2005-06-13 2008-12-18 エフ.ホフマン−ラ ロシュ アーゲー IL10SNP associated with acute rejection
US8586708B2 (en) 2005-10-28 2013-11-19 Massachusetts Institute Of Technology Monovalent streptavidin compositions
US9249423B2 (en) 2007-02-02 2016-02-02 Yale University Method of de-differentiating and re-differentiating somatic cells using RNA
WO2009046507A1 (en) 2007-10-10 2009-04-16 Atanas Atanasov Wave power station
CA2742272C (en) * 2008-10-30 2018-05-29 Sequenom, Inc. Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification
MX2011004763A (en) 2008-11-05 2011-06-01 Genentech Inc Genetic polymorphisms in age-related macular degeneration.
US8685655B2 (en) * 2009-09-17 2014-04-01 Jsr Corporation Dissociation method and dissociation agent for avidin and biotin derivatives
EP2710144B1 (en) 2011-05-19 2020-10-07 Agena Bioscience, Inc. Processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification
CA2877493C (en) 2012-07-24 2020-08-25 Natera, Inc. Highly multiplex pcr methods and compositions
CN103131787B (en) 2013-03-11 2014-05-21 四川大学 Forensic medicine compound detection kit based on Y chromosome SNP (single nucleotide polymorphism) genetic marker
CN103602740A (en) 2013-11-06 2014-02-26 毅新兴业(北京)科技有限公司 Method and kit for identifying free DNAs in serum by adopting mass spectrometer and applications of method and kit
CN107787371B (en) 2015-04-24 2022-02-01 基纳生物技术有限公司 Parallel method for detecting and quantifying minor variants
CN107406882B (en) 2015-04-24 2022-03-01 基纳生物技术有限公司 Multiplexing method for identification and quantification of minor alleles and polymorphisms

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US5885775A (en) * 1996-10-04 1999-03-23 Perseptive Biosystems, Inc. Methods for determining sequences information in polynucleotides using mass spectrometry
US20080167197A1 (en) * 2000-03-14 2008-07-10 Electrophoretics Limited Mass labels
US20050233381A1 (en) * 2001-03-19 2005-10-20 Liu David R Evolving new molecular
US20060166201A1 (en) * 2002-09-01 2006-07-27 Philipp Schatz Method for the detection of nucleic acid sequences by means of crackable probe molecules
US20080305479A1 (en) * 2006-12-05 2008-12-11 Sequenom, Inc. Detection and quantification of biomolecules using mass spectrometry

Non-Patent Citations (9)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Dubiley et al., Nucleic Acids Research, 1999, Vol. 27, No. 18, pages 1-6 *
Duffield et al., Simultaneous determination of multiple mRNA levels utilizing MALDI-TOF mass spectrometry and biotinylated dideoxynucleotides, RNA (2010, 16, pages 1285-1291. *
Gardner et al., "Acyclic and dideoxy terminator preference denote divergent sugar recognition by archaeon and Taq DNA polymerases," Nucleic Acids Research, 2002, vol. 30, no. 2, pages 605-613. *
Gardner et al., Acyclic and dideoxy terminator preferences denote divergent sugar recognition by archaeon and Taq DNA polymerases, Nucleic Acids Research, 2002, Vol.30, No.2, pages 605-613. *
Hirsch et al., Easily reversible desthiobiotin binding to streptavidin, avidin, and other biotin-binding proteins:uses for protein labeling, detection and isolation, Analytical Biochemistry, 308 (2002), pages 343-357. *
Kim et al., "Solid phase capturable dideoxynucleotides for multiplex genotyping using mass spectrometry," Nucleic Acids Research 2002, vol. 30, no. 16, e85, pages 1-6 *
Kim et al., Digital genotyping using molecular affinity and mass spectrometry, Nature Reviews Genetics, Volume 4, December 2003, pages 1001-1008 *
KIm et al., Multiples genotyping of the human beta 2- adrenergic receptor gene using solid-phase captureable dideoxynucleotides and mass spectrometry, Analytical Biochemistry (2003) 316, pages 251-258. *
Tost et al., Mass Spectrometry Reviews, 2002, 21, pages 388-418 *

Cited By (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10604791B2 (en) 2011-05-19 2020-03-31 Agena Bioscience, Inc. Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification
US11667958B2 (en) 2011-05-19 2023-06-06 Agena Bioscience, Inc. Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification
US20220119874A1 (en) * 2011-05-20 2022-04-21 Fluidigm Corporation Nucleic acid encoding reactions
US10233489B2 (en) 2015-04-24 2019-03-19 Agena Bioscience, Inc. Multiplexed method for the identification and quantitation of minor alleles and polymorphisms
US10513728B2 (en) 2015-04-24 2019-12-24 Agena Bioscience, Inc. Multiplexed method for the identification and quantitation of minor alleles and polymorphisms
US10640817B2 (en) 2015-04-24 2020-05-05 Agena Bioscience, Inc. Multiplex methods for detection and quantification of minor variants
US10865439B2 (en) 2015-04-24 2020-12-15 Agena Bioscience, Inc. Multiplexed method for the identification and quantitation of minor alleles and polymorphisms
US11680289B2 (en) 2015-04-24 2023-06-20 Agena Bioscience, Inc. Multiplexed method for the identification and quantitation of minor alleles and polymorphisms
US11857940B2 (en) 2015-12-16 2024-01-02 Fluidigm Corporation High-level multiplex amplification
US20210054435A1 (en) * 2016-09-15 2021-02-25 ArcherDX, Inc. Methods of nucleic acid sample preparation
US11795492B2 (en) * 2016-09-15 2023-10-24 ArcherDX, LLC. Methods of nucleic acid sample preparation
US20210180118A1 (en) * 2016-11-02 2021-06-17 Archerdx, Llc Methods of nucleic acid sample preparation for immune repertoire sequencing

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CA2835942A1 (en) 2012-11-22
CN110564819A (en) 2019-12-13
AU2012254985A1 (en) 2014-01-09
JP2016144474A (en) 2016-08-12
US20230407375A1 (en) 2023-12-21
JP2014515264A (en) 2014-06-30
US20140011195A1 (en) 2014-01-09
US20200318169A1 (en) 2020-10-08
JP6040227B2 (en) 2016-12-07
US11667958B2 (en) 2023-06-06
EP2710144B1 (en) 2020-10-07
CA2835942C (en) 2019-01-22
CN103717751A (en) 2014-04-09
AU2012254985C1 (en) 2017-02-23
EA201391723A1 (en) 2014-06-30
WO2012159089A1 (en) 2012-11-22
EP2710144A1 (en) 2014-03-26
US10604791B2 (en) 2020-03-31
AU2012254985B2 (en) 2016-11-10
EA027558B1 (en) 2017-08-31

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11667958B2 (en) Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification
CA2742272C (en) Products and processes for multiplex nucleic acid identification
EP2620511B1 (en) Single molecule nucleic acid sequence analysis processes
US11680289B2 (en) Multiplexed method for the identification and quantitation of minor alleles and polymorphisms
EP3802867A1 (en) Products and processes for nucleic acid detection and quantification

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AS Assignment

Owner name: SEQUENOM, INC, CALIFORNIA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:HONISCH, CHRISTIANE;VAN DEN BOOM, DIRK JOHANNES;MOSKO, MICHAEL;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20120829 TO 20121212;REEL/FRAME:029484/0536

AS Assignment

Owner name: BIOSCIENCES ACQUISITION COMPANY, CALIFORNIA

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:SEQUENOM, INC.;REEL/FRAME:033182/0062

Effective date: 20140530

AS Assignment

Owner name: AGENA BIOSCIENCE, INC., CALIFORNIA

Free format text: CHANGE OF NAME;ASSIGNOR:BIOSCIENCES ACQUISITION COMPANY;REEL/FRAME:033248/0073

Effective date: 20140530

AS Assignment

Owner name: MIDCAP FINANCIAL TRUST, MARYLAND

Free format text: SECURITY INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:AGENA BIOSCIENCE, INC.;REEL/FRAME:041621/0548

Effective date: 20170131

AS Assignment

Owner name: MIDCAP FINANCIAL TRUST, AS AGENT, MARYLAND

Free format text: SECURITY INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:AGENA BIOSCIENCE, INC.;REEL/FRAME:042050/0888

Effective date: 20170317

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NOTICE OF ALLOWANCE MAILED -- APPLICATION RECEIVED IN OFFICE OF PUBLICATIONS

FEPP Fee payment procedure

Free format text: ENTITY STATUS SET TO UNDISCOUNTED (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: BIG.); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: PUBLICATIONS -- ISSUE FEE PAYMENT VERIFIED

STCF Information on status: patent grant

Free format text: PATENTED CASE

AS Assignment

Owner name: AGENA BIOSCIENCE, INC., CALIFORNIA

Free format text: RELEASE OF SECURITY INTEREST IN REEL 041621 FRAME 0548;ASSIGNOR:MIDCAP FINANCIAL TRUST;REEL/FRAME:056860/0557

Effective date: 20210712

AS Assignment

Owner name: AGENA BIOSCIENCE, INC., CALIFORNIA

Free format text: RELEASE BY SECURED PARTY;ASSIGNOR:MIDCAP FUNDING IV TRUST;REEL/FRAME:058741/0005

Effective date: 20211020

AS Assignment

Owner name: JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A., ILLINOIS

Free format text: SECURITY INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:AGENA BIOSCIENCE, INC.;REEL/FRAME:058358/0661

Effective date: 20211209

MAFP Maintenance fee payment

Free format text: PAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEE, 4TH YEAR, LARGE ENTITY (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: M1551); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: LARGE ENTITY

Year of fee payment: 4